Revit Architecture 2008

Metric Tutorials

April 2007

Copyright© 2007 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF ACQUISITION OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE, IF ANY, OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN. Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of the product at the time of publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Revit, Showcase, SketchBook, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, and Wiretap. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, Wire.

Third Party Trademarks
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

Third Party Software Program Credits
ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Copyright© 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc.© Pantone, Inc., 2002 Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for use only in combination with certain Autodesk software products. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. AutoCAD 2008 is produced under a license of data derived from DIC Color Guide® from Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Copyright © Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. All rights reserved. DIC Color Guide computer color simulations used in this product may not exactly match DIC Color Guide, DIC color Guide Part 2 identified solid color standards. Use current DIC Color Guide Manuals for exact color reference. DIC and DIC Color Guide are registered trademarks of Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002).

Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Contents

Part 1

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . Performing Common Tasks as You Work in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Part 2

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Creating the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Adding Project Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Creating a Column Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Adding Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Linking a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Part 3

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 . 112 . 115 . 121 . 126 . 130 . 130 . 133 . 136 . 137 . 140 . 146 . 146 . 149 . 153

Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Contents | v

Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 . 160 . 165 . 169 . 172 . 172 . 177 . 179 . 181 . 183 . 189 . 192 . 195 . 195 . 196 . 199 . 204 . 204 . 206 . 206 . 210 . 211 . 215 . 215 . 221 . 223 . 227 . 230 . 231 . 238 . 238 . 244 . 248 . 250 . 252 . 254 . 258 . 259 . 260 . 260 . 262 . 278 . 278 . 283 . 283 . 284 . 284 . 287 . 292 . 292 . 294 . 296

Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . Creating a Component Legend Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 6 Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

vi | Contents

Working with Revisions . . . . Importing from Other Applications . Importing Image Files . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 297 . 299 . 299 . 300 . 301

Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Part 4

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Viewing a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exploring the Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View with a Camera . . . . . . . . . Creating a Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Fill Pattern Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material . . . . . . . Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type . Creating a View Plan Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Render Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Daylights and Rendering the View . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 . 324 . 327 . 333 . 335 . 337 . 337 . 339 . 340 . 341 . 346 . 346 . 350 . 352 . 355 . 358 . 358 . 360 . 364 . 365 . 367 . 367 . 370 . 372 . 376 . 376 . 377 . 379 . 382 . 382 . 383 . 384 . 384 . 387 . 388 . 388 . 390 . 391 . 394 . 394

Chapter 9 Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Chapter 12 Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Contents | vii

Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 399 . 401 . 403 . 406 . 406 . 408 . 411 . 411 . 415 . 417 . 420 . 422 . 429 . 429 . 436 . 440

Part 5

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 Creating a Daylight Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457

Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462

Part 6

Creating

Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

Chapter 15 About Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Using Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Introduction to Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Introduction to the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Creating 3D Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Process Overview: Creating a Family . . . . . . . . . . Defining the Origin of a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Priorities for Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Family Parameters and Family Types . . . . Lock geometry to reference planes . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Work Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Solid Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 2D Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Door Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing the Door Plan View Components . . . . Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry . . . . . . Assigning Materials to the Door Components . . . Defining New Door Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the New Window Parameters . . . . . Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry . . . Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry . . . . Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry . . . Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry . . Assigning Materials to the Window Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 . 480 . 481 . 481 . 483 . 484 . 490 . 491 . 491 . 491 . 491 . 495 . 496 . 497 . 498 . 503 . 506 . 508 . 511 . 512 . 513 . 519 . 521 . 526 . 538

viii | Contents

Defining New Window Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Complex Model Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Family Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Skeleton for a Complex Wall Opening . Modelling a Complex Wall Opening . . . . . . . . . Creating Window Frame Geometry . . . . . . . . . . Defining the Window Sash Parameters . . . . . . . . Defining Visibility Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Reference Planes for the Glass Geometry . . Creating the Glass Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Formulas to Define Width . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Default Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Material Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Nested Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Sill Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading Sill Families into the Window Family . . . . Creating a Length Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing the Sill Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing Nested Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the Family in a Project Environment . . . . . Creating a Furniture Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters . . . . . Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry . . . . Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Defining New Furniture Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Baluster Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Baluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run . . . . . . . Creating Profile Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Sweep Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Rail Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Reveal Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Host Sweep Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path . . . . . . . . . Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Room Tag Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Annotation Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol . Adding the New North Arrow to a Project . . . . . . . Creating a Titleblock Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet . . . . . . . Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock . . . . . . . Adding the Titleblock to a New Project . . . . . . . . Creating In-Place Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family . . . . . . . Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family . . . . . . Appendix A - Exploring Family Templates . . . . . . . . . Model Family Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotation Family Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . Titleblock Family Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 540 . 545 . 547 . 548 . 551 . 554 . 561 . 565 . 566 . 567 . 570 . 573 . 574 . 574 . 575 . 575 . 577 . 578 . 579 . 580 . 581 . 582 . 583 . 584 . 591 . 594 . 603 . 609 . 612 . 614 . 614 . 616 . 618 . 618 . 618 . 619 . 620 . 621 . 622 . 624 . 626 . 626 . 628 . 628 . 630 . 631 . 631 . 634 . 642 . 644 . 644 . 650 . 653 . 654 . 668 . 669

Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
Planning a Parametric Component Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672

Contents | ix

Determining Component Needs . . . . . . . . Selecting the Family Template . . . . . . . . . Creating the Component Skeleton . . . . . . . . . Adding Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Dimensions and Constraints . . . . . Creating New Length Parameters . . . . . . . Flexing the Component Model . . . . . . . . Adding Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Solid Extrusions . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry . . Creating Additional Solid Geometry . . . . . . Testing the Family in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . Loading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . . Testing a Family Instance in a Project . . . . . Working with Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . Adding a Nested Component . . . . . . . . . Creating Formula-controlled Parameters . . . Arraying Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . Reloading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters . Creating and Applying Subcategories . . . . . Creating Material Parameters . . . . . . . . . Controlling Component Visibility . . . . . . . . . Assigning Detail Level and View Controls . . . Creating Component Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multiple Component Types . . . . . Creating Conditional Formulas . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 672 . 673 . 676 . 676 . 682 . 686 . 690 . 693 . 693 . 695 . 698 . 707 . 707 . 708 . 712 . 712 . 716 . 721 . 726 . 728 . 728 . 733 . 735 . 735 . 738 . 738 . 739

Part 7

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744 . 744 . 753 . 755 . 755 . 758 . 760 . 764 . 764 . 765 . 768 . 774 . 774 . 778 . 780 . 782 . 785 . 787 . 788 . 789 . 791 . 792 . 793 . 794

Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743

Chapter 19 Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 20 Area Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797
Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798

x | Contents

Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804

Chapter 21 Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . . Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808 . 808 . 813 . 815 . 815 . 816 . 819 . 822 . 822 . 825 . 825 . 828 . 832 . 834 . 837 . 842 . 846 . 846 . 853 . 857 . 859 . 860 . 863 . 866 . 866 . 870 . 870 . 876 . 880 . 882 . 889 . 893 . 895 . 899 . 900 . 904 . 904 . 905 . 913 . 916 . 917 . 921 . 932 . 938 . 939 . 940 . 942 . 942 . 943

Chapter 22 Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845

Chapter 23 Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay . Sketching Structural Walls . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning and Modifying Walls . . . . Adding Structural Columns and Beams . . . . . Adding Structural Columns . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Beams and Girders . . . Adding Joists and Purlins . . . . . . . . . Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels . . . Defining New Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating the Existing Design . . . . . . Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation . . . . . Creating a Framing Elevation . . . . . . . Adding Structural Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 24 Structural . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903

Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950

Contents | xi

Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. 950 . 950 . 953 . 957 . 961 . 965 . 970 . 970 . 980 . 987

Chapter 26 Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969

Chapter 27 Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998

Chapter 28 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003 . 1003 . 1011 . 1014 . 1017 . 1019 . 1020 . 1021 . 1024 . 1026 . 1027

Part 8

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Render Scene Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034 . 1034 . 1036 . 1038 . 1039 . 1041 . 1041 . 1045 . 1047 . 1048 . 1053 . 1055 . 1056 . 1059 . 1059 . 1060 . 1064 . 1067 . 1069 . 1071 . 1072 . 1074

Chapter 29 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033

xii | Contents

Getting Started

1

1

2 | Chapter 1 Getting Started

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2008 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

3

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to get started with the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to locate the training files specified in the tutorials and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title to display the titles of the lessons in the tutorial, and expand a lesson title to display a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for the tutorials. The training files, like the tutorials, are bundled with the product. Training files are provided to help you work through the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training. Training files are grouped into three folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files specifically for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files specifically for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information.

IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a dataset?
A dataset is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that is used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Dataset section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing dataset.

Open a dataset
1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of dataset.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the dataset name, and click Open.

Save a dataset
5 To save a dataset with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required.

For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the dataset with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt.

For Save as type, verify that Project Files is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template
7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing dataset, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse. In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates. 10 In the Choose Template dialog, review the Revit Architecture templates.

Accessing Training Files | 5

Templates are available for specific building types: commercial, construction, and residential. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. For most tutorial projects, you will use the default template, and customize the project as necessary. 11 Select DefaultMetric.rte, and click Open. 12 Click OK.

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You begin with the fundamental concepts that Revit Architecture is built upon. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, how to navigate the user interface, and how to perform some common tasks in the product.

What is Revit Architecture 2008?
The Revit Architecture platform for building information modeling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modeling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit Architecture model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This concept is important because it is this capability that delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Revit Architecture 2008 keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit Architecture uses two key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
Revit Architecture uses five software element classes: host, component, annotation, view, and datum.

Hosts include walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings.

6 | Chapter 1 Introduction

■ ■ ■ ■

Components include windows, doors, and furniture. Annotations are 2D, view-specific elements that help you produce documentation. Views are dynamic representations of the model and are always up-to-date. Datums are reference elements that help you put your building together.

This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. In Revit Architecture, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning two walls, for example.

Understanding Revit Architecture 2008 terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. However, there are some terms that are unique to Revit Architecture, and understanding them is crucial to understanding the software. This section defines the basic terms used in Revit Architecture. Project: In Revit Architecture, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all the information for your building design, from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter your design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan tiled next to it.

Element: When creating your project, you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. All elements are considered categories. Revit Architecture classifies elements by model component elements and annotation elements.
■ ■

A model component element, such as a door, desk, or roof, represents the actual 3D geometry of the building. An annotation building element, such as a door tag, elevation symbol, or room tag, helps document the model.

Understanding the Basics | 7

Family: Families are classes of elements in a category that group elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, six-panel colonial doors could be considered one family, although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Families are either component families or system families:

Component family files can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. System families include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels, and are not available for loading or creating as separate files.
■ ■

Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system; however, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects.

Type: Each family can have different types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. A family can have several types. For example, a table could come in several different sizes. Each different size would be a new type within the same family. Instance: Instances are the actual items that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

Revit Architecture 2008 terms

Navigating the User Interface
One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use, specifically its clear user interface. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled, making it easy to understand what each button represents. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions, learning Revit Architecture is much easier.

8 | Chapter 1 Introduction

In the following illustration, the user interface is labeled. In the steps that follow, you navigate and become familiar with the user interface.

Start a new project
1 On the Standard toolbar, click .

This creates a new project based on the default template.

The Title Bar
2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open.

By default, new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. In addition, the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based.

The Menu Bar
3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom.

Navigating the User Interface | 9

You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. Notice the bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. While working in the drawing area. The Toolbar 4 On the Window menu. notice a door type is specified. Notice the design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. On the left side of the Options Bar. place the cursor over the menu name. To choose commands. click Toolbar. Many of the commands also have shortcut keys to speed up the design process. These shortcut keys are listed next to the command on the menu. Edit.The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. and click. A context menu appears with a list of all available commands. There are six toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . click the command name to start the command. TIP For example. and View. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. 6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. Another timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. The buttons on the toolbar represent some of the more common commands. Then. The context menu changes depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. You can control the visibility of the six toolbars and turn the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window ➤ Toolbar menu.

Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available within the project. For example. notice the list of walls that are available. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. First. You use the Type Selector in two ways. The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . you can select a component type before you add it to the building model. 9 In the Type Selector. the door type active in the Type Selector is the door type that is added when you insert it into the building model.The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. Within the drawing area. if you intend to add a door. If you select the Door tool. You can also use the Type Selector to change a component type after it has been added to the building model. you can select any component and then change the type from the Type Selector. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list.

■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: includes commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: all the commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the project construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered 3D images ■ 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction .The Show Design Bars dialog is displayed. containing buttons grouped by function. immediately below the Type Selector. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. 11 Click OK. The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar.

families. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . click the tab. walls. select Views (all). family category (doors. The browser is conveniently organized by view type (floor plans. delete. elevations. You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for executing conceptual massing commands Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to your project Construction tab: includes commands for creating construction industry information To access the commands within a tab. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the context menu. windows). 3D). and group name. and the respective commands are displayed on the Design Bar. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. and groups. and rename views. reports. sheets. schedules. Expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or sign next to the name. families. In the Project Browser.

■ ■ To open a view. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. The browser is dockable. double-click the name. Do not click. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The cursor is displayed as a pencil. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. click Cancel. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. 14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. click Wall. ■ 13 In the Type Selector. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for both views and sheets. After you create a browser organization scheme.

you can use the Status Bar and the Tab key to toggle between components and select the desired component. It highlights when the cursor is over it. Revit Architecture 2008 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2008 Help. TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view. You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu. regarding selected components within a view. The elevation symbol consists of two parts. it highlights and the status bar displays the component name. When attempting to select a specific component in a complex or crowded view. use the Tab key to alternate between nearby components. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . When you place the cursor over a component. and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol. notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you should do next. Elevations: Elevation: Elevation 5. click Modify. in conjunction with Tooltips. notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: West. In the Status Bar. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. 18 On the Design Bar. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. The Status Bar also provides information. In this case. Make sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol. the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. 20 Press TAB.In the bottom left corner of the window.

You can select a topic on the Contents tab. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. click . and the topic specific to the dialog box opens. You can use this tri-pane. You can access Help in the following ways: ■ Dialog Boxes: Dialog boxes include Help buttons. you open a dataset and practice adjusting the view with the zoom commands. TIP You can control the level of Tool Tip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . For example. Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the Tool Tip displays. click Training Files. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the unique tasks for each tutorial. There are several tools that help you find information. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. You can also press SHIFT+F1. There are several ways to access zoom options: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ View menu commands Zoom command on the View toolbar Shortcut keys Wheel mouse Dynamic View dialog In the following steps. Context-sensitive help is also available to provide instant help on any menu command.rvt. If there is no Help button displayed. After you are familiar with how to complete these tasks. Use zoom commands to adjust the view 1 In the tutorials. press F1 to get help on that dialog box. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture In this exercise. Windows: From any window. Tool Tips: To see Tool Tips. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. find a keyword on the Index tab. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. and then click on a specific menu command or command button for Help. press F1 to get the topic associated with the window.Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. Toolbar: From the Toolbar. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click the Help button.

and enter the shortcut keys ZR to zoom in on a region. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options.The 3D isometric view displays: 4 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom options menu. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and the shortcut keys for each option. 8 Click in the drawing area. this is referred to as a crossing selection. 7 Click Zoom To Fit. 5 Click Zoom Out (2x). NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself automatically activates the Zoom In Region command. 9 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region you wish to zoom. and the view of the buiding model is sized to fit the available window. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture | 17 . 6 On the View toolbar.

zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. Small blue dots. called drag controls. and drag the cursor in the drawing area. NOTE As you zoom in and out within a view. ■ Resize elements using drag controls 13 In the Project Browser. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view dynamically. on the View toolbar. and drag the cursor. Without clicking in the dialog. To modify or add snap increments.10 If you use a mouse where the middle button is a wheel. referred to as shape handles. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . 14 Enter ZR. click . click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. and select the wall. Similar controls. If you do not have a wheel mouse. and tops of selected walls in elevation and 3D views. 11 Zoom is also available in Dynamic View mode. hold the middle mouse button (or left mouse button on a wheel mouse). press and hold CTRL. The Dynamic View dialog displays in the lower-left corner of the screen. use a zoom menu command or the Toolbar option to zoom out within the view. click Zoom. 12 Use one of the following methods to zoom: ■ ■ In the Dynamic View dialog. as shown: Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. When drawing or modifying a building model. display along the ends. and double-click 2nd Flr. expand Floor Plans. To display the Dynamic View dialog in a 2D or 3D view. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. bottoms. On a wheel mouse. roll the wheel to zoom the view. expand Views (all). Cnst. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. These are the drag controls.

In this case. require two clicks to complete the command. 18 Select the Craftsman02 table. 19 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. for example. you want to move the table closer to the wall.15 Click and drag the left control. After selecting the element to be moved. such as Move and Copy. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture | 19 . and on the Edit toolbar. click to specify the starting position. Some commands. and click again to specify the ending position. 16 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. to lengthen the wall. click (Move). moving the cursor to the left horizontally. Move an element 17 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan.

20 Click next to the lower wall. and drag it on top of the table. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Select the plant. Undo commands 22 On the Standard toolbar. you decide that you like the table better where it was placed originally. In this example. click the drop-down menu next to . Selecting the second action in the list will undo the last two actions. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. The Undo command allows you to undo several commands by clicking the drop-down menu next to the Undo command on the Toolbar. All changes you make to a project are tracked. 23 On the Undo menu. Move. The table moves down and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. 21 Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. as shown. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. select the second item in the list.

click Modify. or press and hold CTRL and enter Z. 25 Click in the drawing area to start the line and click again to end it. on the Standard toolbar. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture | 21 . stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. click the Undo command. such as the Lines command. End a command 24 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 26 To end the command. Press ESC twice. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to place lines. 27 Close the file without saving your changes. On the Design Bar. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. Some commands.NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. click Lines.

22 | Chapter 1 Introduction .

Developing Your Designs 2 23 .

24 | Chapter 2 Developing Your Designs .

Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them. it is good practice to test the constraints. 25 . As you develop the building design.Creating a Building Information Model 2 In this tutorial. and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. For example. or “flex the model” by changing parameters. a wall or a column can be constrained to grid. If the grid moves. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2008. you learn how to use parametric design techniques. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. a curtain wall. You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. the wall or column will move with it. a central service core. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial.

The project datasets have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project dataset. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. After the beginning exercises. from the product library. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises. such as a door or window.Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. 26 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . In practice. you load any required family type that is not in your project.

reflected ceiling plan views. you design inside the elevation markers. To create the project file. and click Browse. For this project. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created.Creating the Project In this exercise.rte. South. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. under Create new. and settings. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. change their properties. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. These views are customizable: you can rename them. and delete them. The new project opens. click Training Files. duplicate them. notice four elevation markers. construction. expand Floor Plans. with an RVT extension. 2 In the New Project dialog. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North. 5 Click OK. NOTE If you create a project without a template. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. views. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. In views that display elevation markers. Creating the Project | 27 . and families in your project. or by opening the view in the Project Browser. and residential. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. select Project. 3 Under Template file. Ceiling Plans. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. verify the second option is selected. but contains no geometry. locate the Project Browser. In the drawing space in the right pane. You can access these views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. schedules. and customize the project as necessary. and Elevations (Building Elevation). The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. you will use the default template. and elevation views created in the project by the template. you use a template that is provided with the software. West. 7 If necessary. sheets. East. expand Views (all). The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. Create the project from the default template 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. The project is stored as a single file. levels.

double-click South. Schedules/Quantities. You can add. 16 Click Save. 14 For File name. and other properties. Families. such as schedules and legends. view the Save Reminder interval. 28 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . verify that Level 1 displays as bold. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. as well as change their names. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. and click Training Files. you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. the view you see in the drawing area. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. and duplicate levels. Adding Project Levels In this exercise. Two level lines. Groups. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. 15 For Save as type.8 Under Floor Plans. This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. content and building model reports. You change the names of the 2 default levels. As you design and document your building model. delete. notice the Legends. Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. Click Settings menu ➤ Options. as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. Sheets (all). enter Revit Retail Building.rvt) is selected. created by the template. Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. heights.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. double-click Metric. 10 In the Project Browser. 13 In the file window. display in the south elevation. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. and on the General tab. will be accessible from the Project Browser. “Adding Project Levels” on page 28. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building. After you modify the two default levels. verify Project Files (*. you will want to save your work frequently.

and press ENTER. or constrained. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. and windows within the building model. 3 Double-click the Level 1 text. so that when one level moves. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. expand Views (all). When you begin designing. and press ENTER. 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. enter 0 mm. and double-click South. Adding Project Levels | 29 . enter 01 Entry Level.You learn how the levels are locked. to each other. 5 In the Project Browser. enter 00 Foundation. 4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. enter -1800 mm. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. the other levels move and change with it. doors. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation.

click Level. 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed green line displays alignment with the two existing levels. and enter 02 Level. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. and click Basics. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. and then move it up. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab. 30 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . verify Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. right-click Level 3. 13 On the Options Bar. 21 In the Project Browser. A dashed green line indicates where the new level will be drawn. 14 Click Plan View Types. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. As you move the cursor. and move it slightly upward. Next. and for Offset.Next. 3750 mm above 01 Entry Level. and press ESC. not all the tabs are visible. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. This is the Options Bar. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line. and click OK. click Rename. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. If it does not. When you add the new level. verify and Make Plan View are selected. By default. 19 Click OK. enter 3750 mm. which should display by default. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. 18 In the Project Browser. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. view the Design Bar. 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. under Floor Plans. 3750 mm above the 02 Level line. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. click Level. 16 Enter 3750 mm. you add another level. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click . right-click. 23 On the Options Bar. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. using a different option.

27 Press ESC. as shown. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option.25 Click to place the level line. the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line. and rename the corresponding views. If you create a level by copying it. or on the Design Bar. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line. 26 Rename the level 03 Level. 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line. 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. click Modify to end the command. add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level. Adding Project Levels | 31 .

When the grid is complete. click Modify. double-click 00 Foundation.Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. Create vertical column grid lines 1 On the Project Browser. click Grid. In the following exercise. you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. specify a start point for the grid line. and specify the grid line endpoint. you constrain the column heights to the roof level. you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. select . On the Design Bar. Notice that by moving the top level. the levels are no longer constrained. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained. Move the cursor up. until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. By using the grid to control placement of columns. the column height changes as well. Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. In a later exercise. under Floor Plans. “Creating a Column Grid” on page 32. If you select a level and click its lock. ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. 32 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . all the levels move. and you can move them independently. so that if the roof elevation changes.

Click to place the grid line. and click to place the line. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. and click to place the line. Enter A. On the Options Bar. 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. ■ The first vertical grid bay is created. use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. enter 4500 mm. and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line. and for Offset. click Grid. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. for Offset. enter 7500 mm. Creating a Column Grid | 33 . Next.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. enter 7500 mm. click . ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. On the Options Bar. for Offset. and click to place the line. and press ENTER.

add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. 11 On the Design Bar. 34 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E. On the Options Bar.8 Press ESC. Dimension the grid and lock the grid bay spacing 13 On the Design Bar. click Grid. Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. 10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1. click and specify an Offset of 0 mm. The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. click Dimension. click Grid. as shown. and specify the grid line endpoint. specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. ■ ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm.

click Modify. By pinning these central grid lines. 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. Creating a Column Grid | 35 . 23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. and select grid line A. until it is closer to grid line A. select grid lines C and 3. click and drag the blue circular grip up. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown. you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will ''grow'' out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. until it is closer to grid line 5. At the left endpoint of the grid line. 15 Starting with grid line A. and press ESC. 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. 21 Press ESC.14 On the Options Bar. 22 While pressing CTRL. At the bottom endpoint of the grid line. The pins are hidden. 24 Press ESC. 18 On the Design Bar. click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension. select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. 16 When you select the last vertical grid line. Two pins display on the grid lines. click Dimension. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and press ESC. click .

for From. The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. 37 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. 36 On the Standard toolbar. 33 While pressing CTRL. Next. and press ENTER. select 01 Entry Level. and on the Options Bar. Add columns to the grid 26 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 28 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden. 34 On the Options Bar. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. double-click 01 Entry Level. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 38 In the Project Browser. 32 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. select grid line A. click Camera. lock it. 35 Enter 9000 mm. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. 40 On the Options Bar. 30 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red). and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B. For Place By. Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. click Activate Dimensions. If it is unlocked. select UC-Universal Column: 305x305x97UC. 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select all of the column grid lines. click twice to restore the original locked grid dimension. 27 In the Type Selector. click Structural Column. and unlock it. and specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera. ■ 29 While pressing CTRL. 41 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. click (Grid Intersection). 36 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click Finish.■ If necessary. 31 Press ESC.

The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. Creating a Column Grid | 37 . The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays. and click to place the target point of the camera.■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A.

you add beams to build the structure of the building model. ■ ■ Right-click 3D View 1. displays in bold under 3D Views. named 3D View 1 by default. 38 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan. In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. and then copy them to the subsequent levels. 44 Save the drawing. and click Rename.42 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can view all of the columns. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. “Adding Beams” on page 38. enter To Building. expand 3D Views. Adding Beams In this exercise. The current view. under Views (all). 43 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser.

click Beam. under 3D Views. verify UB-Universal Beam: 305x165x40UB is selected. select each grid line. 6 In the Type Selector. double-click 01 Entry Level. The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. 9 On the Options Bar. double-click To Building to view all of the beams. you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level. 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. the icon on the right side of the scale. A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. The selected grid lines display as red. under Floor Plans. 10 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Options Bar. view the icons on the View Control Bar. 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 8 While pressing CTRL. click Finish. click Grid.When you finish adding beams. Adding Beams | 39 . Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click the Detail Level icon . 4 Click Medium. The view is currently set to Coarse.

under Floor Plans. which only extend to the 5th level. right-click. and click Select All Instances. click Modify. 40 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and click OK. When you created the columns. All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. double-click 01 Entry Level. select 02 Level. 13 On the Design Bar. 12 On the View toolbar. The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns. NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. select 06 Roof. 17 In the Select Levels dialog. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level. 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. click to view the default 3D view of the structure. 14 Select one of the beams.Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. press and hold SHIFT.

21 With the column selected. and click Element Properties.Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. and if necessary. All of the columns display as red. click . but it would only change the height of the single selected column. double-click To Building. The columns now extend to the top level of the building. Adding Beams | 41 . select 06 Roof. resize the view to see the entire structure. 24 Press ESC. and click Select All Instances. 22 On the Options Bar. 20 Click Cancel. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. for Top Level. under Constraints. right-click. right-click. and click OK. under 3D Views. You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. view the Top Level Constraint parameter. 25 In the Project Browser. under Instance Parameters. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 06 Roof.

on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style. Click Detail Level. as lines only. double-click South. area. 28 Save the drawing. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. but want to display them in less detail. You can view the columns and beams in the elevation. 27 At the lower left corner of the drawing. under Elevations. and click Hidden line. and click Coarse. “Adding Braces” on page 43.View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser. 42 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . The structural elements (columns and beams) display only as lines.

you create 8 framing elevation views. 4 Select the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. you add braces to the four corners of the building structure. double-click the elevation marker arrow. Adding Braces | 43 . and press ESC to end the command. Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid. under Floor Plans.Adding Braces In this exercise. double-click 00 Foundation. verify Attach to Grid is selected. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. To better add the braces to the structure. click Framing Elevation. Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid. Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar.

10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level. 44 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 8 In the Type Selector. but when placed the braces are placed. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. After you add the final brace. and when the endpoint snap displays. press ESC.The associated framing elevation view displays. 6 Use the grips that display on the crop region to adjust both sides of the view. and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. verify UB-Universal Beam: 305x165x40UB is selected. add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. 11 Using the same technique. click Brace. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements. so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B. 7 On the Design Bar. click to specify the start point of the brace. NOTE Do not copy or array braces.

IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level. The height of the roof lowers.Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height. Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams. delete it and redraw it. enter 18000 mm. Adding Braces | 45 . and press ENTER.

enter 12000 mm. click twice to restore the original level heights. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow. 14 On the Standard toolbar. and click the lock that displays to unlock it. double-click 00 Foundation. but this time add them from right to left. and press ENTER. enter 10000 mm. 17 Add diagonal braces to the structure. 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B. and on the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. as shown in the 3D view below. and press ENTER. 19 In the Project Browser. Add brace in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. 21 Select grid line A. double-click 00 Foundation. Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser. click Activate Dimensions. 46 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .13 Double-click the 04 Level height. 16 On the bottom right side of the grid. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). under Floor Plans.

and roof height.23 In the Project Browser. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. Test connectivity of the columns. double-click South. and if necessary. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 24000 mm. and drag it away from the structure. double-click 00 Foundation. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Foundation | 47 . 28 On the Standard toolbar. 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. 26 In the Project Browser. 31 Save the drawing. lock it. beams. under Elevations. open the 3D view and notice the change in the size. “Creating a Foundation” on page 47. Creating a Foundation In this exercise. under 3D Views. 24 In the Project Browser. grid size. 29 In the Project Browser. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure. double-click 3D. under Floor Plans. click 3 times to restore the locked dimension.

click Training Files. click Edit. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. and click View Properties. under View Depth. and expand Structural Foundation. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it.Before you can add the pile caps. and how to load specific families into a project. where you must adjust the view range before you can view them. The foundation pile cap now displays. In the View Range dialog. click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. The pile cap has been added in the view. 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. for View Range. 7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900 mm. expand Families. After you load the pile cap family. and open Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. under Extents. under Floor Plans. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view.rfa. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. and drag it to the drawing area. 6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). 9 Close the warning dialog. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. A warning displays. select Unlimited. for Level. The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree. Click OK twice. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. Verify the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. In the Element Properties dialog. 48 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click 00 Foundation. and press ESC. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid.

under 3D Views. 12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation. double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation. press ESC. Creating a Foundation | 49 . and click Create Similar.Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap. When the final pile cap is placed. 13 In the Project Browser.

All of the columns in the building model display as red. right-click.14 Click File menu ➤ Save. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 On the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. double-click 3D. 50 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . under 3D Views. “Changing Structural Member Types” on page 50. You load new column. and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure. View the round hollow columns in the building model. beams. select CHS-Circular Hollow Section-Column: 508x12. click Modify. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Type Selector.rvt. and braces that you used to create the building structure. and brace families into the project. beam. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure.5CHS. you change the types of the columns. click Training Files. 2 Select one of the columns. and click Select All Instances. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. It is not available in a perspective or camera view.

select M_Round Bar: 75 mm. double-click Elevation 1-a. You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the 25mm bar type.9. 10 On the Options Bar. and click Select All Instances. 6 In the Type Selector. click Modify. and click OK. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only. 9 In the Type Selector. 19 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 16 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Name dialog. 7 On the Design Bar. This not the size that you want to use. the braces as well as the beams change. 15 In the Project Browser. click Modify. click . select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS203.6x15. but it is the only size of its type currently available. The brace type changes. Changing Structural Member Types | 51 . click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model.Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams. Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type. click Brace. select the braces in the elevation one by one. select M_Round Bar: 25mm. for d. under Dimensions. 18 In the Type Selector. for Type. click Edit/New. and changing its size parameter. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75 mm. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. enter 75 mm. 17 While pressing CTRL.2x101. you change the brace type. Change the brace type 8 On the Design Bar. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar. and click OK twice. In the following steps. enter 75 mm. click . right-click.

double-click 01 Entry Level. under Floor Plans. Adding Floors In this exercise. click Floor. “Adding Floors” on page 52. You are now in the sketch editor.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. click Lines. Some other Revit Architecture elements. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building. such as roofs. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and railings are also created from sketches. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. click Training Files. Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. ■ On the Sketch tab. you must sketch them first in a sketch editor. stairs. In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. 52 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors. 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. To create floors. and elements in the current view display as gray.

Do not lock the dimension. click . Adding Floors | 53 . the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. select the top floor line. and then the 1st horizontal grid line. Using a crossing window. 4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. click Dimension. as you resize it in the next steps. If the grid changes size.■ ■ On the Options Bar. and click above the 1st horizontal grid line to place the dimension. sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important. 5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. Do not lock the dimensions. Move the cursor to the left. 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. At the top left corner of the grid. Leave this dimension unlocked. past the first vertical grid line.

7 On the Design Bar. and change their values to 300 mm. At the top left corner of the grid. Select and lock the dimensions. and on the Options Bar.6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. click Modify. this is how you would do it. 8 Select the floor. click Quit Sketch. Move the cursor to the right dimension. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. If you needed to modify the floor after you created it. on the Design Bar. 54 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. and click the temporary dimension value. press ENTER. click Finish Sketch to create the floor. select the top floor line. 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. click . They display on the floor sketch. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300 mm. Enter 300 mm. Next. using a different sketching technique. and then press ESC. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor.

11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click . IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. enter 1500mm. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown.Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser. and lock the dimensions. 14 On the Design Bar. Select the three remaining floor lines. double-click 02 Level. click Floor. The 02 Level floor sketch displays. Adding Floors | 55 . and for Offset. under Floor Plans. On the Options Bar. 13 At the bottom right corner of the grid. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. On the Sketch tab. and move the cursor until the dashed green line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. The 02 Level floor displays. ■ 12 At the top left corner of the grid. and press ESC. click Finish Sketch. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. click Lines.

22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor.Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser. 18 On the Options Bar. 20 On the Tools toolbar. click Align . and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line. 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line. 19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor. 56 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click . click Floor. double-click 03 Level. The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate the Align command is active. under Floor Plans. click Lines. The 02 Level floor is visible in the view. Click the locks to constrain the floors. and a lock icon displays.

and enter 4500 mm. View the floors in the 3D building model and test connectivity 36 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. Adding Floors | 57 . 30 In the Select Levels dialog. 31 In the Project Browser. dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser. under Views ➤ 3D Views. Alternatively. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level. under Floor Plans. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid. and on the Options Bar. double-click 00 Foundation. 39 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. 35 On the Design Bar. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floors. 41 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay. and click Activate Dimensions. 32 Select the floor. and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. under Floor Plans.24 On the Design Bar. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. and lock the edges. you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level. 38 In the Project Browser. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Finish Sketch. and unlock it. 37 On the View Control Bar. dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. click Model Graphics Style. and click OK. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 33 At the top left corner of the grid. 40 Select grid line A. under Floor Plans. double-click {3D}. and click Shading with Edges. click Edit. select 05 Roof Garden.

double-click {3D} to view the grid. 44 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. click to restore the grid bay size to 7500 mm.42 In the Project Browser. double-click 00 Foundation. 43 On the Standard toolbar. “Adding a Roof ” on page 58. you add a sloped roof over the corner of the building. Adding a Roof In this exercise. 58 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and lock the dimension that you unlocked in a previous step. under Floor Plans. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.

click Lines. you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. double-click 06 Roof.To create the roof. When a green dashed line displays. ■ ■ For Offset. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and press ENTER. click Training Files. 3 On the Design Bar. Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof. You sketch the footprint. enter 1800 mm. and specify which roof edges will define the roof slope. Adding a Roof | 59 . 4 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Defines Slope.rvt. The roof sketch line displays with a slope marker. of the roof in a plan view. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. Click . under Floor Plans. 5 Move the cursor over grid line E. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click to place the roof line. or the perimeter.

10 Press ESC. enter 0 mm. The roof sketch line displays with a slope marker.6 Select grid line 5. For Offset. and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5. click (Trim/Extend). Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep). 8 Select grid line C to place another roof line. Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown. ■ 60 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . move the cursor slightly below the grid line. 11 Trim the rooflines: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. and lock it. click to place the roof line. 9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line. and when the green dashed line displays. 7 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Defines Slope. and lock it.

double-click 06 Roof.00. click . under Floor Plans. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding a Roof | 61 . click . View the roof 19 On the View toolbar. under Dimensions. click . click Finish Roof.12 Optionally. place a dimension between the roof slope edges and the grid to constrain them. for Slope Angle. Change the roof slope 16 In the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar. enter 4. 13 On the Design Bar. and click OK. View the roof 14 On the View toolbar. 15 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. 17 Select the roof.

7 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ . When you duplicate a type.rvt. Adding a Curtain Wall In this exercise. The type is saved in the project. click Wall. click Edit/New. Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. the curtain wall resizes with it. “Adding a Curtain Wall” on page 62. for Spacing. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall. you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you add a curtain wall. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Join Condition. You constrain the curtain wall to the grid.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 6 In the Name dialog. enter 2100 mm. enter 1050 mm. 62 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 3 In the Type Selector. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ Click . 5 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Retail Storefront. for Type. and click OK. select Horizontal Grid Continuous. for Spacing. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. select Curtain Wall: Storefront. Click OK twice. click 01 Entry Level. so if you resize the grid. click Duplicate. Under Construction.

■ ■ ■ For Level. Adding a Curtain Wall | 63 . you can delete the dimension. select 05 Roof Garden. select 01 Entry Level. 11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior. 9 Move the cursor over the grid line 1 near its endpoint. dimension both corners of the curtain wall to the grid. and trim each curtain wall segment. the locks ensure that the curtain wall will move with it. 13 On the Design Bar. and move it slightly toward the building interior. 10 When a green dashed line displays. but opt to keep the constraint when prompted. These dimensions are not in a sketch. If you want to hide them. click to place the 1st curtain wall segment. so they remain in the view. click Dimension. click (Trim/Extend). For Height. Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar. If the grid moves. For Offset. and lock the dimensions. enter 600 mm.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and click Hidden Line. “Creating an Entrance” on page 65. Click Model Graphics Style. under 3D Views. 64 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click To Building. 16 Proceed to the next exercise.View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser. and click Shading with Edges. 15 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style.

Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display. 5 Under Visibility.rvt. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall. and double-click South. click Detail Level. Creating an Entrance | 65 . Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Creating an Entrance In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Views (all). 4 On the Model Categories tab. under the element list. and click None. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass. clear one element to clear all the elements. click All. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns. 2 On the View Control Bar. To better work with the curtain wall panels. 6 Under Visibility. and click Medium. click Training Files. All the elements in the list are selected. you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance. expand Elevations (Building Elevation).

in the center of the 01 Entry Level. click Modify. and click OK. in the Type Selector. 9 On the Design Bar. select System Panel: Solid. 8 Zoom in to the entrance area. 11 When all 9 panels are selected. 14 In the Select View Template dialog. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 12 With the panels selected. select Architectural Elevation. 7 Click OK. 15 Zoom to the drawing extents. and select the other panels around the entrance as shown.Do not select Columns. 10 Select 1 panel. click the pin to remove it from each of the panels. as these usually represent internal pilasters. press and hold CTRL. 66 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .

16 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. double-click {3D}. 19 In the Project Browser. If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under 3D Views. 17 In the Project Browser. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. you see that the visibility of many of the Model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. 18 On the View Control Bar. in this case an architectural elevation. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Creating an Entrance | 67 . The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for. double-click To Building.

26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Add or Remove Segments. and click to select it. 25 Select the mullion that you selected previously. 21 Zoom to the front of the building. click Curtain Grid. 23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line. and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown.20 In the Project Browser. 68 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown. 24 On the Options Bar. under Elevations (Building Elevation). double-click South. select another mullion to the right.

select M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. 35 Zoom in to the front of the building. click Modify. and view the new entrance. Creating an Entrance | 69 . 34 On the View toolbar. click . 30 On the Design Bar. 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion. 32 In the Type Selector. 33 Repeat for the next 3 panels. 31 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections).27 On the Options Bar. 29 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. and unpin it. select One Segment.

70 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . remove the mullions from the 2nd. 3rd. 37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion. 39 Using the same process.36 Zoom in to the first panel. press TAB until it is selected. select it. and 4th panels. and unpin it. 38 Press DELETE.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance. under Floor Plans. and click View Properties. under Graphics. and add an entrance to the north side of the building. for Underlay. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Right-click in the view. open the North elevation.40 Optionally. 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. “Creating a Drop Ceiling” on page 71. click Training Files. 5 Click OK. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 71 . 1 In the Project Browser. select 02 Level. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building. Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise. double-click 01 Entry Level.rvt. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.

and specify a point to complete the callout.6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 8 Select the callout. 72 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column. select the grip closest to the callout head. click Callout. The cursor changes to a pencil. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column. which indicates you must draw the callout.

click Section. and click OK. under Floor Plans. 14 Press ESC. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar.9 In the Project Browser. right-click. ■ ■ Specify the section start point just below the right framing elevation marker. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 73 . and specify a point past grid line D. 15 Double-click the section marker to view the section. Move the cursor horizontally to the left. and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level. 16 Select the section box. 12 Draw a section line. 13 Select the section line. enter Display Area. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. and click Rename. 10 In the Rename View dialog. and click Flip Section.

32 In the Type Selector. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click . Click . 18 In the Rename View dialog. 21 In the Type Selector. click Wall. expand Sections (Building Section). select Basic Wall: Interior-135mm Partition (2 hr). and lock the dimension. and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm rectangular wall inside the grid lines. 19 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Dimension. double-click 01 Entry Level. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 25 Press ESC. right-click Section 1. For Loc Line. 27 On the Options Bar. click (Align). for Prefer. and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay.17 In the Project Browser. under Ceiling Plans. select Finish Face: Exterior. and lock the dimension. under Floor Plans. and click Rename. 26 On the Design Bar. 33 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Sketch. 74 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . select Wall faces. 24 On the Tools toolbar. Lock both alignments. enter Section Display Area. ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor. 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600 mm Grid. click Ceiling. 28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. 30 In the Project Browser. 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. and click OK.

38 In the Project Browser under Sections (Building Section). 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. 41 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 36 Press ESC. 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces.■ Click Click . 37 On the Design Bar. The ceiling grid displays inside of the walls. ■ 34 Sketch the ceiling within the walls. double-click Section Display Area. and click to select the walls. . click . Creating a Drop Ceiling | 75 . 39 On the View Control Bar. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected.

press TAB until you select the wall chain. 48 Modify the ceiling grid: ■ To start the tiles on a wall edge. under Constraints. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. Select the 02 Level Floor. and click OK. 46 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. for Top/Base. and drag it to the interior face of the horizontal or vertical wall. and specify a distance. select any horizontal or vertical ceiling grid line. for Height Offset From Level. click Modify. ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor.42 In the Element Properties dialog. 44 Select the ceiling. enter 2700 mm. 47 In the Project Browser. under Ceiling Plans. 43 On the Design Bar. ■ 76 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and click . To position the grid. and click to select the walls. double-click 01 Entry Level. on the Tools toolbar. and click OK. for Base Offset. under Constraints. select a grid line. On the Options Bar. click Move. click Attach. enter 2700 mm.

52 In the Edit Assembly dialog. under Construction. 53 Click OK.View the ceiling structure 49 Select the ceiling. click (Rotate). 55 In the Element Properties dialog. 51 In the Type Properties dialog. 57 On the Options Bar. for Structure. click Edit. for Type. click Edit/New. and click . Rotate the ceiling grid 56 Select the center ceiling grid line. 58 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. 54 In the Type Properties dialog. view the ceiling structure. 50 In the Element Properties dialog. click Cancel. click Cancel. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 77 .

enter 45. 78 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .59 Click. and press ENTER. 61 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid. 60 Press ESC.

64 On the View Control Bar. 63 On the View Control Bar. you must cut an opening through the floors on each level. Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. double-click To Building. 65 Optionally. 66 Proceed to the next exercise. copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels.View the building in 3D with shadows 62 In the Project Browser. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 79 . under 3D Views. and then copying it to the 05 Level. After the stairs and stairwell have been copied to levels 01-05. click Shadows On. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building. “Creating Multi-Level Stairs” on page 79. click Shadows Off. You begin by creating a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building.

and 3. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair_. double-click 01 Entry Level. You will create the stair in the area between these columns. 2 Zoom in to the area defined by grid lines B. click Ref Plane. When the temporary dimensions indicate the cursor is 1500 mm from the grid line intersection. click to specify the start point of the reference plane. and specify the reference plane endpoint on grid line B. 2. under Floor Plans. Move the cursor vertically. click Training Files. 3 On the View Control Bar. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Move the cursor to the left along grid line 3. C.rvt. ■ 80 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 5 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor over the intersection of grid lines C and 3.

Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining. 7 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and specify a point to create first stair flight. click Stairs. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 81 .■ Draw another reference plane 1500 mm from grid line 2.

and select the 2nd reference plane. click Wall. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. 82 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . The complete stair displays. 9 On the Design Bar. and click to select it. 10 In the Type Selector.225mm Masonry. 11 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line. and specify a point. click Align. 8 On the Options Bar. select Basic Wall: Generic . including its handrails. 13 On the Tools toolbar. 16 Using the same technique. beyond the end of the stair. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. ■ 12 Draw walls around the stair. Move the cursor down. select Finish Face: Interior. with a message that 20 risers have been created and that 0 remain. and lock the alignment. 15 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall. 14 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. Click . click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing.■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left.

click . 18 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and press DELETE. and press DELETE. 19 Select the dimension. Select the bottom of the stair. click Dimension. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 83 .17 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Wall faces. and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. Click Modify. Because the dimension is constrained. 21 Select the stair. 23 While pressing CTRL. Lock the dimension. 20 Click OK to delete the dimension. select the dimension value. a warning displays. Select the interior face of the wall. for Prefer. The stair and walls move to the left. and press ENTER. select both reference planes. Select the wall. and specify a point away from the wall. enter 1200 mm. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. 22 On the Standard toolbar.

TIP To flip the door swing. 31 Select the stair. and click . The Dynamic View dialog displays in the left corner of your screen. select all 4 walls. 29 While pressing CTRL. 84 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . for Multistory Top Level. Under Constraints. 28 On the Design Bar. click Door. and click 30 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. 25 In the Type Selector. press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. select 05 Roof Garden. 33 On the View toolbar. press and hold the left mouse button. select 00 Foundation. you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. For Top Constraint. 26 On the Options Bar. . and move the cursor to spin the building model. select M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm. You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. 35 Press SHIFT. click . click Modify. 27 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. click 34 On the View toolbar. but if you view the top level of the building. verify Up to level: 06 Roof is selected. clear Tag on Placement. You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. Click OK.Add a door to the stairwell 24 On the Design Bar. Click OK. for Base Constraint.

. 45 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft. ■ 40 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. 42 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. 44 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. 39 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click . click Align. double-click 01 Entry Level. and lock the alignment. 48 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. and lock the alignments. Copy the door to multiple levels 46 Select the door. 37 Zoom in to the stairs.Create a shaft opening 36 In the Project Browser. 43 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. 47 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 38 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 41 On the Tools toolbar. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 85 .

you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor. and click 54 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ . click . 55 On the View toolbar.49 In the Select Levels dialog. click . under Floor Plans. ■ For Top Constraint. 53 Select the shaft. click 56 On the View toolbar. 86 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 52 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry Level. select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. . 57 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. and click OK. and click OK. The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. enter 300 mm. Under Constraints. View the shaft and stair 50 On the View toolbar. By offsetting the base. . select Up to Level: 06 Roof. click 51 On the View toolbar. and spin the building so you can see the roof. for Base Offset. Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening.

Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 87 . you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof Level.rvt. “Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height” on page 87.58 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 59 Proceed to the next exercise.

under Graphics. 6 On the Options Bar. select 06 Roof. and press ENTER. for Underlay. 10 Change the dimension value: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click Wall. Enter 1050 mm.225mm Masonry. select Core Face: Interior. and draw a 10650 mm wall along grid line 3. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Type Selector. select Basic Wall: Generic . 9 Dimension the space between grid line C and the left face of the wall on grid line 3. Select the wall. 2 Right-click in the view. and click OK. and click View Properties. double-click 05 Roof Garden. click Dimension. 7 Move the cursor near the column at the intersection of grid lines C and 3. Select the dimension value. You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3.Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. for Loc Line. 88 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . under Floor Plans.

click Edit Profile. and click to place a line. 18 Select the top endpoint of the left vertical profile line. The profile of the wall that you just modified displays as a purple sketch. move the cursor up 4500 mm. 15 Select the wall. move the cursor up 6000 mm. click Lines. 19 Press ESC. and on the Options Bar. 22 Move the cursor horizontally 1520 mm to the left. click Lines. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 89 . 21 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical profile line. double-click Elevation: South. Modify the profile of the wall 14 On the Design Bar. 13 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. 20 On the Design Bar. and click to place a line. and then select the right face of the wall. 17 On the Design Bar. 23 Press ESC. The South elevation displays. and click to place a line. 16 In the Go To View dialog.11 On the Tools toolbar. click (Align). click Modify. 12 Select the floor on the right side of the wall.

31 Move the cursor to the left. and click (Circle). Select the top right portion of the circle.24 On the Design Bar. 30 Using the Quadrant snap. click Lines. move the cursor out until a circle with a radius of 1520 mm displays. 26 Snap to the endpoint of the line that you just drew. 29 On the Options Bar. 25 On the Options Bar. 90 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . Select the top horizontal profile line. Press ESC. and select the endpoint of the left vertical profile line. 27 Press ESC. 32 Click Modify. Select the top right portion of the circle. Select the short right profile line. click . click the drop-down arrow that displays next to the sketching tools. click (Trim/Extend). snap to the top of the circle. and select it. and click to place it. click Lines. 33 Trim the profile lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. 28 On the Design Bar.

Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 91 . You need a closed sketch to complete the profile. 36 Snap to the endpoint of the short horizontal line. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. 35 On the Options Bar. note that for Top Constraint. 47 Click Cancel. 45 On the Options Bar. 48 Change the 06 Roof level height to 19000 mm. click Modify. 40 On the Design Bar. click Lines. click Modify. and press DELETE. 41 Select the horizontal line across the middle of the profile sketch. instead of lengthening the existing edge. and click to place it. click Continue. and select the wall. 43 In the Warning dialog. 42 On the Design Bar. click Modify. By adding extra height to the wall. click . 38 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. move the cursor out until a circle with a radius of 1000 mm displays. and press DELETE.34 On the Design Bar. you maintained the relationship to the roof level. under Constraints. Up to level: 06 Roof is selected. click Finish Sketch. select the short horizontal line on the right. click . click the Close button. 37 On the Design Bar. 39 In the Error dialog. unlock it. 44 On the Design Bar.

View the wall 50 In the Project Browser. 51 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. and how to place and adjust them in project views. 52 Proceed to the next exercise. You learn how to load these components into the project. and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk. click to restore the original height of the roof. under 3D Views. double-click 3D. 92 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . “Adding Entourage and Site Components” on page 92. Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise.49 On the Standard toolbar. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building. you place planters on the 05 Roof level to create a roof garden.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed green line that helps you to place the next planter. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 93 . 3 In the Type Selector. click Training Files. as shown. between grid lines C and D. Create the roof garden 1 On the Project Browser. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\m_RRB_host.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Floor Plans. click Component. select M_Planter : 1200 x 1200mm. double-click 05 Roof Garden. TIP After you place the 1st planter. 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5.rvt.

click Edit/New.5 Meters. and in the Type Selector. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest.5 On the Basics tab. click Component. and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof.Deciduous: Cornus Florida 4. enter 1500 mm. and press ESC. 19 In the Project Browser. Create a sidewalk outside of the building 20 In the Project Browser. 18 While pressing CTRL. 13 In the Element Properties dialog.5 Meters.Deciduous: Cornus Florida 1. and click OK. select Tree . and on the Options Bar. click . 15 In the Name dialog. select the 2 remaining trees. for Plant Height. under Floor Plans. click . 14 In the Type Properties dialog. The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof. select M_Tree .5. 16 In the Type Properties dialog. double-click 05 Roof Garden. for Type. 11 In the Project Browser. 12 Select 1 of the trees. under Floor Plans. 17 Click Apply. double-click 01 Entry Level. 8 On the View toolbar. click Duplicate. under Other. 94 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 6 In the Type Selector. under 3D Views. and then click OK twice. 10 View the roof. double-click {3D}. enter Cornus Florida 1. 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter.

click Lines. 26 Using the same method. for Offset. 23 On the Options Bar: Click . and click to place the line.21 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 24 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B. click Floor. 22 On the Design Bar. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 95 . and click to sketch a line. 25 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. 29 Select the right vertical floor line. enter 0 mm. sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. and click to sketch a line. 27 On the Options Bar. enter 2400 mm. ■ ■ For Offset. 28 Select the bottom horizontal floor line.

36 Select the line between grid lines A and B. 37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. 96 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. and click to finish the line.30 On the Options Bar. clear Chain. and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1. click Finish Sketch. 35 Select the line that you just drew. move the cursor up 900 mm. 34 On the Tools toolbar. The completed sidewalk displays. move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm. click . click (Trim/Extend). and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. 38 On the Design Bar. and click to finish the line. 31 On the Options Bar. 32 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line.

and on the Options Bar. click Edit/New. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 46 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. as it is currently a floor element. 45 Click OK. click Component. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. under Constraints. and specify a point to rotate him so he is facing the column. create a new type for the sidewalk element. and second line inside the circle indicates the person’s line of sight. near Column E5. and click to place her on the sidewalk. 43 Click OK twice. 49 On the Options Bar. 52 Move the cursor toward the column. select M_RPC Female: Cathy. 41 In the Type Properties dialog. In plan view. for Type. click Duplicate. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 97 . 48 In the Type Selector. 50 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. select M_RPC Male: Alex. enter Sidewalk. enter -250 mm. for Height Offset from Level. 53 In the Type Selector. The circle is divided in half by a line. 47 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 39 Select the sidewalk. select Rotate after placement. click .Next. 51 Move the cursor so the rotation line displays along Alex’s line of sight and specify a point. RPC people are represented by a circle. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. 42 In the Name dialog.

60 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click the car. click Camera. select M_RPC Beetle. you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. 63 Select and drag both Cathy and Alex above the sidewalk. 55 In the Type Selector. and place it along the sidewalk behind him. 64 Select Cathy. When you select a host for a component. and on the Options Bar. click Pick Host. 56 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex.54 Rotate Cathy so she is facing Alex. 62 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. for Offset. double-click West. 58 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. and click . enter -300 mm. 57 Press ESC. Next. 59 In the camera view (3D View 1). 98 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . under Elevations. under Constraints. 61 In the Project Browser.

65 Click the sidewalk. pick the sidewalk as the host for the car. 66 Select Alex. 69 Using the same method. you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building. both Cathy and Alex will move with it. under 3D Views. “Linking a Service Core to the Building Project” on page 99. 67 Click the sidewalk. and replace them with a service core. double-click To Building. Linking a Service Core to the Building Project | 99 . 68 Select and move both Cathy and Alex until they are standing on the sidewalk. View the front of the building 70 In the Project Browser. Linking a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise. If the sidewalk changes height. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and on the Options Bar. click Pick Host. 71 Proceed to the next exercise.

click . Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building. By deleting the stairwell from the 06 Roof. so it will cut through the floors of the building. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. . press SHIFT. After the service core is linked to your project. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell. click 5 On the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. you must cut another shaft opening around it. and shaft opening. Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 On the Project Browser.rvt.The service core is contained in an external file that you link to your current project. you delete the entire stairwell. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_host_style_railings. 100 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click 06 Roof. and spin the building. 3 Select the entire stairwell. 4 On the View toolbar. including the stairs. walls. and press DELETE.

8 In the left pane of the Add Link dialog. Select Cursor at center. 14 Select the top horizontal floor line.Link a new service core into the building model 6 In the Project Browser. 11 Click Open. The building service core displays in your drawing. click (Align). Do not click the lock to constrain the core and floor. 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. Linking a Service Core to the Building Project | 101 . under Positioning: ■ ■ Select Manually place. 12 Specify a point to place it between grid lines B-D. click Training Files.rvt. You cannot constrain elements in the current project to elements in linked models. 13 On the Tools toolbar. select m_RRB_link. 10 At the bottom of the dialog. and then select the top horizontal core wall. double-click 01 Entry Level. under Floor Plans. 9 In the Metric folder.

Create a shaft opening for the service core 15 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 102 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click 24 On the View toolbar. For Top Constraint. enter 300 mm. click . click Finish Sketch. View the service core in the building model 23 On the View toolbar. 17 On the Options Bar. 19 Trace the outer edges of the core elements to sketch the service core as shown: 20 On the Design Bar. 18 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. click . 21 Select the shaft opening and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . select Up to level: 06 Roof. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. click Lines. select Chain. for Base Offset. Under Constraints. Click OK.

rvt. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and spin the building to get a better view of the core. 25 Proceed to the final exercise. press SHIFT. You can see that the service core cuts through the floors of the building. 3 In the new project. “Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings” on page 103. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Renderings. After you modify it. and open Metric\m_Conference. You copy the railing type into your project from another project. where it is hosted within a railing family. in the Project Browser. click Training Files. The rendering displays. you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. click Training Files. 2 In the left pane of the dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise. Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. Notice the glass railing in the foreground.. and double-click Lounge Perspective.rvt. This is the railing that you want to add to your model. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 103 . you add glass railings around the floor edges.

press and hold CTRL. and expand Railings. 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. and click to split the floor. and Parapet. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C. under Floor Plans. click Modify. 104 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click Edit. and select Glass. 5 Expand Railing.rvt or m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings. 8 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 13 On the Options Bar. The floor sketch displays. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. and on the Options Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. 10 Close the warning dialog that displays. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it. 12 Select the floor. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D.Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser. click OK. 7 Click Window menu ➤ Revit Retail Building. Handrail only. click (Split). and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B. expand Families.rvt. Modify the 02 Level floor 11 In the Project Browser. double-click 02 Level.

24 On the Tools toolbar. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 105 . and click the lock to lock the alignment. select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. 23 Complete the sketch as shown.18 On the Design Bar. move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long. click (Align). 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched. and click to place it. 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown. 19 Select the left endpoint of the floor. and click to draw another line. 25 Select grid line B. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D. and click the lock to lock the alignment. 20 Move the cursor horizontally to the right 1500 mm and click to draw another line. 27 On the Tools toolbar. 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. move the cursor vertically 1500 mm. 26 Select grid line D. click . click Lines. and lock the alignment.

Lock the dimensions. click Dimension. for Type. 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension.rvt project. For Offset. click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. 31 In the Revit dialog. 106 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . select Glass. click Dimension. 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown. click Railing Properties. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.29 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click . click Railing. and click OK. 37 On the Design Bar. This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. 30 On the Design Bar. enter 100 mm. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. 33 On the Design Bar.

41 Place the camera and camera target as shown.39 Click Finish Sketch. You can view the railing that you just added. A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays. View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Click Model Graphics ➤ Shading with Edges. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 107 . 42 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics ➤ Hidden Line. click Camera.

108 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 43 Close all project drawings.■ Click Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region to hide the frame around the view.

BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2008. and a roof garden. 109 . exterior fire stairs. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. balconies. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. lofty ceilings.Documenting Your Projects 3 In this section of the tutorials. a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial datasets in this section. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units.

NOTE For training purposes. slight modifications to the building design have been made. 110 | Chapter 3 Documenting Your Projects .

you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 3 In this tutorial. including plan. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views ■ 111 . section. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. elevation.

Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. You learn how to create new views from existing views. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Dataset ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. how to create section and elevation views.Creating Views In this lesson. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. you learn how to create views from a building model. 112 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. Duplicating Plan Views | 113 . click Training Files. and click OK. select Level 2. 9 In the Project Browser. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. 3 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.rvt. under Floor Plans. and click OK. under Floor Plans. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views. 7 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. 8 In the Rename View dialog. 2 In the Project Browser.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans.

11 Under Floor Plans. click the current scale. under Floor Plans. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 13 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. 114 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Next. 15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. double-click Vicinity Plan. 14 On the View Control Bar.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. and click 1: 1000. enter Vicinity Plan. and click OK.

Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 115 . 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden.16 Right-click.rvt. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.

rvt. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. 116 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. click Elevation. double-click Level 1. 4 On the Options Bar. 3 In the Type Selector. select1:100. under Floor Plans. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. for Scale.South East elevation view Section view Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. select Elevation: Building Elevation.

click Modify.Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 10 In the Rename View dialog. under Elevations. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. 8 On the Design Bar. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. double-click South East. Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 117 . 11 In the Project Browser. 7 Select and move the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. enter South East. click Modify. under Elevations (Building Elevation).

click Section. 118 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. and double-click Level 1. 15 On the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Section: Building Section. Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. under Views (all). 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. ■ Move the cursor down.Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. select 1:100. for Scale. 14 In the Type Selector.

Creating Elevation and Section Views | 119 . 19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. and click to place it.18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents. click Split Segment. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Click the midpoint of the section line. drag it to the right until it cuts through the stair. and move them to just outside of the left side of the building.

expand Sections (Building Section). 120 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 23 On the View Control Bar. click Modify. 24 Select gridline F. and double-click Section 1. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium.21 On the Design Bar.

Creating Callout Views | 121 . you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.25 On the Design Bar.rvt. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save.Enlarged Stair Plan Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. To create each view. click Modify. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan Resulting callout view . Creating Callout Views In this exercise. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of the each new callout view.

Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. 5 Draw the callout around the large stair in the center of the plan: ■ Specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. click Callout. and select the callout boundary. 122 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 4 On the Options Bar. select 1:50. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. select Floor Plan. and specify a point to complete the callout. 3 In the Type Selector. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. 6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. for Scale.

The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. 7 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Rename View dialog.■ Select the middle grip. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. click Modify. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. and click OK. Creating Callout Views | 123 . Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head.

under Sections (Building Sections). select 1:50. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. and specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. for Scale. double-click Section 1. select Detail View: Detail. 13 In the Type Selector. and specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. ■ Move the cursor diagonally down.Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. click Callout. 124 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 14 On the Options Bar.

under Detail Views (Details). enter Roof Overhang Detail.16 Modify the callout leader as shown. Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. expand Detail Views (Details). Creating Callout Views | 125 . and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. double-click Roof Overhang Detail. and click OK. 18 In the Rename View dialog. 17 In the Project Browser.

Existing stair callout head and boundary 126 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . You change the appearance of the section mark head. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. the elevation markers.20 Click File menu ➤ Save.

click Edit/New. 12 For Section Tag. under Floor Plans. and click OK. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. and click OK. click Duplicate. Section Tail – Filled. .Filled. for Section Head. 8 In the Name dialog. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select the current project. select the section line. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser.Custom. 10 On the floor plan. and click OK. 4 On the Design Bar. click Training Files.rfa. and click Open.Modified stair callout head and boundary Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 127 . open Metric\Families\Annotations. enter Section Head – Custom. double-click Level 1. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. select Custom-Section Head. Section Tail . and click OK twice.rvt. select Section Head . and can be applied to the section line. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. scroll to Section Line. 15 Under Category. click the Annotation Objects tab. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. clear any others. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. click Load into Project. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open.

select 12. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Open. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. 128 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .5mm Square. select 3. For Line Weight. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. and click OK. and click OK. enter 12. select Custom-Callout Head. and select 2. 27 Click OK twice. and on the Options Bar. open Metric\Families\Annotations. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. enter 12. select Square. click Edit/New. select the current project.16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 30 On the Design Bar. and select 3. . 22 In the Name dialog. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. click Training Files.5mm Square. Click OK. For Dimensions ➤ Width. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. scroll to Section Marks. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. for Elevation Tag. On the floor plan.5 mm. clear all others. 19 Click OK. On the floor plan. notice the square elevation markers that display. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line.rfa. click Load into Project. click Duplicate. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. 17 Under Category.

select the callout. for Callout Tag. 45 For Line Pattern. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field.33 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 6 mm. Click OK. Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radiusand click OK. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. 36 In the drawing. click Edit/New. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 34 In the Name dialog. Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. scroll down to Callout Boundary. 43 Under Category. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. click Duplicate. expand Callout Boundary. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 129 . . enter . select Dash. For Corner Radius. click the Annotation Objects tab. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. select . 46 Under Category. and select 7. and on the Options Bar. 40 Press ESC. and select 4. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. 39 Click OK twice. 49 Click OK.

you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. click Training Files. Presentation view Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. masking regions. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a View Template In this exercise. 130 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . View templates provide and easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. view regions. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson.rvt. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. and visual overrides. You learn to create view templates. filters.50 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Elevations. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. and apply it to multiple elevation views. and double-click East. The crop region displays as red. 2 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. To accomplish this. and features blue triangular grips and break marks.

right-click East. 5 On the View Toolbar. and click Properties. 10 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. 8 Click OK. under Visibility. click Zoom to Fit. 13 Under Visibility. Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 9 On the View Control bar. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections Creating a View Template | 131 . click Modify to hide the crop region grips and display it as black. 6 On the Project Browser. 12 Click the Annotation Categories tab. clear Entourage.3 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. under Extents. under Elevations. clear Crop Region Visible. 4 On the Design Bar.

levels. and section lines are now hidden in the view. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. under Elevations. and click OK. and click Apply View Template. 19 In the Project Browser. click OK. under Elevations. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. grids. elevation markers. 15 On the View Control bar. 17 In the New View Template dialog.14 Click OK. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. 21 In the Select View Template dialog. 18 In the View Templates dialog. 20 In the Project Browser. right-click North. click Apply. Callouts. 16 In the Project Browser. double-click North. 132 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . right-click East. and click OK. and click Create View Template From View. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation.

select Level Below (Level 4). as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views.rvt. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. for View Range. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. under Floor Plans. and click Properties. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. select Level Below (Level 4).22 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. select Penthouse. View Range and Plan Regions | 133 . under Extents. click Edit. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. for Level. 2 In the Project Browser. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. for Bottom. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. right-click. Under View Depth. 23 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. double-click Penthouse. Click OK twice. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise.

for View Range. right-click.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. double-click Roof Plan. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Properties. Click OK twice. click Edit. under Floor Plans. select Level 4. 6 In the Project Browser. under Extents. for Level. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Under View Depth. 134 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . for Bottom. select Roof Plan. select Level 4.

15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 11 On the Options Bar. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). Under View Depth. 17 On the Design Bar. click Edit. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. In the left corner of the building. Click OK twice. click Region Property. under Extents. for Level. click Finish Sketch. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. for View Range. 13 On the Design Bar. select Unlimited. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. View Range and Plan Regions | 135 . for Bottom. 16 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Move you cursor diagonally. click Lines. click Modify. click Plan Region. select Unlimited.

3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. in this case. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. the fire rating of the walls. under Filters. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.rvt. 7 In the Filters dialog. under Views (all). 6 In the Filter Name dialog. 5 In the Filters dialog. under Categories. enter Rated Walls. click Edit/New. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ For Filter by.18 Click File menu ➤ Save. After you apply the filter. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. expand Floor Plans. select Walls. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click the Filters tab. click (New). Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 136 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and double-click Level 1. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. select Fire Rating. 4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.

for Rated Walls. To accomplish this. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. 16 Click OK. 9 Click OK. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. 10 On the Filter tab. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. select the red color. and click OK. click Override under Patterns. under Projection/Surface. under Basic colors. 11 Select Rated Walls. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. 14 In the Color dialog. for Color. you obscure or ''wipe out'' geometry in portions of a view. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. and click OK. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click No Override. click Add. and click OK. click OK. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. 12 On the Filter tab. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. for Pattern. 17 Using the same method. Masking Portions of a View | 137 .■ ■ Select contains. click Remove. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. Enter Hr. select Solid Fill.

2 Select Copy of Level 1. click Show Crop Region. 4 On the View Control Bar.Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. under Floor Plans. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.rvt. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. as shown. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. 5 On the View menu. right-click. 1 In the Project Browser. 138 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left.

and adjust the view again until it displays as shown.7 On the View menu. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. click Masking Region. Masking Portions of a View | 139 . Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click (Rectangle). 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. 12 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Type Selector. select Invisible lines. 8 Select the crop region. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 9 On the View Control Bar.

Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise.14 On the Design Bar.rvt. right-click Unit 18 Plan . 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson.Level 1. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. 140 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. under Floor Plans. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. click Finish Sketch.

NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. 4 On the View Control Bar. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. under Visibility. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. click the current scale. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 7 Under Cut. and click Rename. and click OK. Working with Visual Overrides | 141 . and click 1: 50. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and click OK. click in the Patterns field. right-click. select Walls. for Color. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 11 Click OK twice. for Pattern. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. right-click. select Solid fill. click No Override. click black. under Pattern Overrides. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. and click Override.

Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. under Visibility. click Modify. 16 Under Visibility. clear Floors. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 12 On the Design Bar. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Grids. 142 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click OK.

Working with Visual Overrides | 143 .18 Right-click. 19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. and click Hide in View ➤ Category.

click a purple color. 23 In the Color dialog. 144 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. select the sofa. right-click. select Dash. and click OK twice. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. and click OK. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. 28 For Color. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. click Override. under Lines. click By Category Override. 29 In the Color dialog. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. select a bright green color. By using the previous method to make the selection. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. click Projection Lines. 21 Under Projection/Surface.20 Right-click. 25 Click OK twice. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. for Color. click No Override. for Pattern.

right-click. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. click . The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. 32 Select one of the lamps. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category.30 On the Design Bar. click . 33 On the View Control Bar. Working with Visual Overrides | 145 . The hidden crop region is also revealed. click Modify.

Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project. and click OK. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. select A0 metric. 146 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .rvt.Creating Sheets. how to add views to the sheets. and click View. right-click.34 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Sheet. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise.

click Modify.Unnamed. expand Sheets (all). enter Site Plan. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. 5 When the title block highlights. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . on the Options Bar. and select the title block.A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. Creating Drawing Sheets | 147 . The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. enter A101. 3 In the Project Browser. For Sheet Name. under Identity Data: ■ ■ (Properties). For Sheet Number. NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar.

enter 15 May. click Modify. For Project Number. for Project Address. enter For Approval. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. Smith. Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. The new project information displays in the titleblock. enter 2007-1. MA 12345 12 Click OK. For Project Name. enter Freighthouse Flats. 2007. 14 Click OK. 148 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 On the Design Bar. under Other. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. click Edit. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. For Project Status. enter J. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. For Client Name.■ Click OK.

Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. for Name. select the new sheet name. and click OK.Elevations A106 .rvt.Sections A108 .Floor Plan. under Floor Plans. and click to place the view. The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. 17 In the Project Browser. 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. right-click. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. you add views to these sheets. select Level 1.Elevations A105 . click Modify. 4 On the Design Bar. and drag it to the sheet.Stairs In the following exercise. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. 2 In the Project Browser. enter Floor Plan. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. under Sheets (all). Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. double-click A102 . create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . select A0 metric. and click OK. and click Save.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser.Layout Plan A104 . and click Rename.rvt. Adding Views to Sheets | 149 .Elevations A107 . Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps.

drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. under Elevations (Building Elevation).The red border around the view no longer displays. 6 In the Project Browser.Elevations. 8 On the Design Bar. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. 7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. and click to place it. click Modify. under Sheets (all). align it with the East elevation. and click to place it. double-click A104 . 150 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

and click to place it. 12 On the Design Bar. Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. 16 Select title bar. select 1:5. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. under Sheets (all). . drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. double-click A107 . Adding Views to Sheets | 151 . click Modify. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). and click OK. for View Scale. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail).Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. and click to place it. and on the Options Bar.Sections. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog.

19 On the Design Bar.Stairs. under Sheets (all). click Modify. 152 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . move the cursor over it. zoom in to the grip. double-click Level 1. and click to place it. and press TAB until it highlights. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. double-click A108 .NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. 18 Under Floor Plans. View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet.

23 Click File menu ➤ Save. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. and then make changes and deactivate the view. under Sheets (all). double-click A107 .rvt. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. you must first activate the view on the sheet. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. In order to do this.22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 153 .Sections. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers.

and press ENTER. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. 5 On the Design Bar. 6 Right-click. 154 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . enter 16700 mm. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. click Modify.2 Select the building section view. 7 In the Project Browser. and click Deactivate View. right-click. and click Activate View. Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. double-click North.

select the new sheet name. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. you create a title sheet for your drawing set.Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet.rvt. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. click Camera. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. enter T. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. right-click. Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. double-click Level 1. Click OK. 3 In the Project Browser. enter Title Sheet. For Sheet Name. The camera view displays. After you create the sheet. under Floor Plans. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 155 . and click OK. 7 Place the camera as shown. select A0 metric. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. You modify the view to hide the view title.

click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. 14 Under 3D Views. Under Extents. 156 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Title Sheet. double-click T . Click OK. enter100000 mm. For Target Elevation. for Eye Elevation.8 On the Options Bar. under Sheets (all). 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. Under Camera. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. For Far Clip Offset. enter 1500 mm. 12 On the View Control Bar. select Far Clip Active. drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. enter 18000 mm. 11 On the View Control Bar. and click to place it in the center of the sheet. 13 In the Project Browser.

click Size. click Edit/New. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. enter Viewport/no title mark. 19 Select the view on the sheet. 24 Click OK twice. Click Apply. and then click OK. enter 635 mm.15 With the view selected. on the Options Bar. 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. click Modify. Under Model Crop Size. click Modify. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 22 In the Name dialog. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 157 . for Show title. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. under Graphics. for Height. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. select No. . 16 In the Crop Region dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. select Scale (locked proportions). and on the Options Bar. 25 On the Design Bar.

and close the exercise file.26 Click File menu ➤ Save. 158 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

Tagging and Scheduling 4 In this tutorial. You also learn to create different types of schedules. 159 . you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. such as room and window schedules. such as doors and windows. in your Revit Architecture 2008 projects.

Because of the open style floor plan. expand Floor Plans. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. click Training Files. right-click in the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser.Level 1. 160 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged.rvt. and click Room and Area. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan.Tagging Objects In this lesson. click Room Separation.

move the cursor to the right. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 161 .4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. as shown: 6 Use the same method to create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). as shown: 5 Use the same method to create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right.

7 On the Design Bar. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Room. click OK. click Modify. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. The room tag number displays in blue. and the rectangle contains the room tag. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag.rfa. indicating that it can be edited. click Load. and click to place the room and tag. click Training Files. and select the room tag. 162 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 9 In the Tags dialog. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. 14 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. 11 In the Tags dialog. click Modify. 13 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. verify that Tag on placement is selected. 10 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

and press ENTER. and press ENTER. Click to place the new room and tag. click Room. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. enter Entry. ■ Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 163 . enter U18-1. 17 Click the room text label. click it. 18 On the Design Bar.16 Zoom in on the tag number. click Modify. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. 19 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar.

and Living): Hide the room separations 23 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Modify. Dining. 164 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. enter Kitchen. 21 Click the room text label. 20 On the Design Bar. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. 22 Use the same method to place rooms and tags. Sequential letters are also supported. and press ENTER.

Level 2. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. Tagging Doors and Windows | 165 .24 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. Tag rooms on upper level 25 In the Project Browser. click Modify.rvt. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. but they need to be tagged. click Room Tag. The rooms are already placed. clear Room Separation.Level 1. 30 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. in the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans.rvt. 28 On the Design Bar. double-click Unit 18 Plan . and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. and moving clockwise. expand Lines. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. you learn how to place door and window tags. Model Categories tab. and click OK. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. 27 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). 29 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. 26 On the Design Bar.

8 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. clear Leader. 7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left. enter U18-2. 166 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . enter U18-1. and press ENTER. and on the Options Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. for Mark. 3 On the Options Bar. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door. under Identify Data. click (Properties). 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Living room door 5 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

double-click Unit 18 Plan . Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser. under Category. select Door Tags. and click OK. click Tag All Not Tagged. Tagging Doors and Windows | 167 . and drag it down to center it in the doorway.9 Using one of the methods you just learned. 13 On the Design Bar.Level 2. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right. rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags. 11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.

19 In the Tags dialog. 16 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown: Place window tags 17 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. click Load. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag. and click OK. click Tag All Not Tagged. and double-click Level 1.15 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. click Training Files. expand Floor Plans. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 18 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. select Window.rfa. 21 Click OK. 168 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .

5 At the confirmation prompt. Window tags are placed in the Level 2 plan view. Zoom flyout. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Tagging Other Objects In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click Tag All Not Tagged. 4 Select a dining room chair. 25 Under Floor Plans. 28 Select Window Tags.rfa. you learn how to tag furniture objects. click Tag ➤ By Category. Tagging Other Objects | 169 . and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag. click Yes to load a tag. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags. click Training Files. select Leader. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and modify the tag placement and display.Level 1. 26 On the View toolbar. click Zoom To Fit to see the entire drawing.rvt. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser. 27 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 2. and click OK.24 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. 3 On the Options Bar.

Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. and on the Options Bar. 170 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . clear Leader. modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. and drag it above the chair tag. 13 Optionally. 11 Select the tag for the table.8 Select the furniture in the living room. 12 Click the elbow control. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1). 14 Click Modify. and drag it up to form an angled leader. 9 Click Modify.

click (Filter Selection). Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser. click Modify. double-click Unit 18 Plan . Tagging Other Objects | 171 . and on the Design Bar. select M_Furniture tag : Standard.16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table.Level 2. click Tag All Not Tagged. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged. under Floor Plans. and click OK. Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture. 18 On the Design Bar. 20 On the Options Bar.

You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. and click Modify. 22 In the Type Selector. click Check None. select Furniture Tag: Boxed. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule. you create a window schedule for the building model shown below. you learn to add schedules. and click OK. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Furniture Tags. Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise.21 In the Filter dialog. 172 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .

that is. you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. click Training Files. a schedule that lists every window in the building. in which windows are listed by window type.rvt. You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.You begin by creating a window instance schedule. you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule. Next. Creating a Window Schedule | 173 . and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams. Finally. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

select Comments and click Add. and double-click Level 1. under Category. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. 4 For Name.Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click the Fields tab. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. 174 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 3 In the New Schedule dialog. 6 Under Available fields. 9 Click OK. and click View. enter Building Window Schedule. click Schedule/Quantities. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. 7 Using the same method. select Windows. expand Floor Plans. right-click in the Design Bar. and click OK. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 8 Under Scheduled fields.

for Sort by. you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. you are prompted to open one that does. Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. click Close. click Edit. and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area. and click OK twice. click OK to search through relevant views of the building model. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. select Type Mark. If no open view shows the selected element. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays. The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model. 12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog. 13 In the Project Browser. and click View Properties. Creating a Window Schedule | 175 . NOTE By clicking Show. under Other. right-click the schedule. and on the Options Bar. for Sorting/Grouping. click Show. in large building models with many views. However. expand Schedules/Quantities.A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model. this can be a time-consuming process.

The window type schedule is displayed. 18 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type. clear Itemize every instance. 23 Change the Type Mark for the other window types. and press ENTER. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 19 Right-click on the schedule. for Sorting/Grouping. 21 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Change type mark from the schedule 17 In the window schedule. change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A. double-click Level 2. The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. under Floor Plans. 176 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . click Edit. so that the types are sequentially named from A to H. under Other. and click View Properties.The window schedule is displayed. sorted by type mark. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 Click OK twice. as shown: 24 In the Project Browser.

5 Click OK. In this case. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. and double-click Building Window Schedule. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. expand Schedules/Quantities. for Name. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule In this lesson. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save As. select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 177 . 6 Use the same method to create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. select Type.25 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed. unlike shared parameters. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. enter Head Detail. click OK.rvt. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and. you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. click Add to create the new parameter. Under Parameter Data. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. For Group parameter under. jamb. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Categories. For Discipline. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. and sill conditions for a window can be found. you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head. you cannot use them to tag objects.rvt. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select Construction.

and click Properties. TIP To select all 3 headers. 12 Click OK twice. under Available fields. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule. and while pressing the left mouse button. Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule. under Other. click Edit. right-click Building Window Schedule. Jamb Detail. 14 On the Options Bar. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail 11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list. and Sill Detail. move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. select the following fields. select Head Detail. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. click in the Head Detail header. 178 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . so that they are listed before Comments. click Group.Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser. enter Window Details. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. for Fields.

3 In the New Schedule dialog. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise. you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. enter 3/A107. and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. 6 Under Available fields. For example. and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Mark in the first field. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. enter 1/A107. You then hide the column used for the filter. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Select contains in the second field.Level 1. Under Name. click Schedule/Quantities. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. enter 2/A107. enter Unit 18 . and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark 7 Click the Filter tab. Verify the Phase is Phase 1. and for Sill Detail. Enter U18 in the third field. click the Fields tab. Verify Schedule building components is selected. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. expand Floor Plans. select the following fields. This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. for Head Detail. 4 Click OK. select Doors.rvt. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 179 .Door Schedule. and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. for Jamb Detail. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . under Type Mark A.

select Mark.8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. click Unit 18 . 14 Click to place the schedule in the upper-left corner of the sheet. 11 Under Field formatting. 9 Click the Formatting tab.Door Schedule. Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. select Family and Type. expand Sheets (all). and drag it to the sheet. 13 In the Project Browser.Unit 18. 180 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 15 On the Design Bar. 10 Under Fields. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule. select Hidden Field. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule. click Modify. and double-click A102 . The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. and click OK. and specify the following options: ■ ■ For Sort by. but is not included as a column in the schedule. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row).

double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 19 On the Design Bar.rvt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. and click Add. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. under Category. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. and click OK. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. click Schedule/Quantities. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Creating a Room Schedule | 181 . select Number. and click View. select Bold to display the schedule headers in bold font. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial. under Available fields. select Rooms. you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. 7 To the right of Header text. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. 8 Click OK. under Floor Plans. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 6 Click the Appearance tab.Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. right-click in the Design Bar. click Modify. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. 5 Using the same method.

for room 101. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. For 102. 182 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. select Storage. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. For 104. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. and press ENTER. For 103. and press ENTER. 11 Using the same method. for Name. click New. 101-106. enter Corridor. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. 10 Edit the number to be 101. enter Building Entry. The room Number is U17-9. For 105. select Corridor. and press ENTER. enter Storage. Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. add 5 more rooms. next to Rows.

Under Custom colors. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. you add room separation lines. double-click Level 1. under Visibility/Graphics Overrides. and modify room names. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. For Weight.■ For 106. click Override. click Room Separation. enter Stair. expand Lines. under Floor Plans. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. In the Line Graphics dialog. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. select 9. click the bright green swatch. and click OK. Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. click the Lines field. and click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Click OK. For Room Separation. In the Lines field. and press ENTER. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ In the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click the Color field. place rooms from a program list. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 183 . under Projection/Surface.

click Modify. 8 On the Design Bar.7 Click to add 2 room separation lines to the right side of the drawing in the corridor. click Room. 184 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . Place rooms from a program list 9 On the Design Bar. draw the horizontal line. First. Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line.

Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 185 .Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. for Room. 11 Click to place the room in the newly-defined entry area (lower-right). select 102 Storage. select 101 Building Entry. 12 On the Options Bar. enter 2400 mm. for Room. 13 For Offset. 10 On the Options Bar.

click Modify. under Schedules/Quantities. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. Place 106 in the space with the stairs. 16 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. double-click Room Schedule. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. under Floor Plans. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 17 In the Project Browser. 15 Use the same method to place the following rooms. 186 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101.14 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. and zoom in to the Corridor.

enter As Selected. 29 On the Options Bar. 30 For Key Name. 28 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. Create key schedule 24 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. as shown: 20 On the Options Bar. select Rooms. and for all 3 finishes. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. select the 3 small walls (in the 2 storage areas). enter Units. double-click Room Schedule. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. click (Properties). 21 In the Element Properties dialog. under Constraints. clear Room Bounding. under Category. and click Add. 25 In the New Schedule dialog. Floor Finish. click New to add a new row.19 While pressing CTRL. 22 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 27 In the Schedule Properties dialog. while pressing CTRL. under Available fields. 23 In the Project Browser. and click OK. select Base Finish. click Schedule/Quantities. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 187 . 26 Select Schedule keys. and Wall Finish.

click Room Style. 41 On the Options Bar. for Fields. for Available fields. 188 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . right-click Room Schedule. and click Add. double-click Level 1. and click Properties. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. double-click Room Schedule. 36 In the Project Browser. 40 Draw a selection box around floor plan. 37 Under U17-8. 34 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Edit. under Schedules/Quantities. click (Filter Selection). 33 In the Element Properties dialog. click Zoom To Fit. select Rooms. add 2 more key names: Service and Public.31 Using the same method. select Units. for Room Style. under Other. 39 On the View toolbar. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. 32 In the Project Browser. 42 In the Filter dialog. and click OK. under Floor Plans. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 38 In the Project Browser. Zoom flyout. click Check None. 35 Click OK twice.

select Room Type. select Room Style. under Floor Plans. 7 Since you are creating a new color scheme. expand Floor Plans. 4 In the New Color Scheme dialog. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. select Service. enter Room Type. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. select Public. for Name. and 106. right-click Level 1. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. 104. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. 45 In the Project Browser. 8 Click OK. under Views (all). For rooms 102 and 105. 9 In the Project Browser. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 103. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). and click OK. click OK. and click OK. enter Room Type. and double-click Level 1. 47 Click File menu ➤ Save.rvt. click (Duplicate). and apply it to the Level 1 view. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 189 . Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. 46 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. and click OK. click (Properties).43 On the Options Bar. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. at the warning prompt. select Units. 5 For Title. click the Color Scheme field. 6 For Color. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. double-click Room Schedule. and click Properties. 11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. for Room Style. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. under Schedules/Quantities.

15 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. select Foreground. and click OK. select blue. and click OK twice. 19 In the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 17 In the drawing area. expand Lines. click Modify. click the value in the Color column.12 For Visibility/Graphics Overrides. A legend displays at the tip of the cursor. 22 In the Color dialog. 16 On the Design Bar. for Display Color Fill in. and clear Room Separation. click Color Scheme Legend. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. under Custom color. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). 20 In the Options panel at the bottom of the dialog. Add a color scheme legend 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select the color legend. clear Visible. click Edit Color Scheme. 18 On the Options Bar. 190 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . click Edit.

28 Under Title Text. under Graphics. 24 Click OK. for Swatch Width.23 Use the same method to change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray respectively. click Edit/New. enter 5 mm. (Properties). on the Options Bar. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 191 . click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. for Size. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. enter 25 mm. and click OK twice. 27 In the Type Properties dialog.

m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. double-click {3D}. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building.29 On the Design Bar. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials.rvt. under 3D Views. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. 2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. click Modify. 192 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .

11 Click the Formatting tab. For Then by. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. select Family and Type. The Roof Materials Takeoff Schedule displays. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. Creating a Material Takeoff | 193 . click Family and Type. and specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. select Material: Area. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. select Material: Description. 4 In the Type Selector. under Available fields. under Category. 9 Using the same method. select Calculate totals. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff.Insulation on Plywood Deck . and click OK.EPDM. and specify the following values: ■ ■ Under Fields. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. select Roofs. and click Add. Under Field formatting. 5 On the Design Bar. 10 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab.3 While pressing CTRL. 12 Click OK. click Modify. Select Grand totals. Clear Itemize every instance.

and under Fields. 21 Click the Formatting tab. for Name.80 5. click Material: Cost. 19 For Formula. for the Material: Cost field. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. 23 In the Material Takeoff. 24 In the Project Browser. enter Estimated Cost. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. enter the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Wood Joist Value 16 13. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog.35 The Estimated cost is calculated. 20 Click OK. and click Add.40 50. under Other. for Fields. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. click Estimated Cost.TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. and click Properties. and click OK twice. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so the cost estimate value can be calculated. 194 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . select Calculate totals. under Available fields. and click Properties. 22 For Field formatting. enter Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). click Edit. 17 Click Calculated Value.

you create an exiting plan for the building. You draw a travel path line. In this lesson. 28 Click OK 3 times. tag the line. 26 On the Formatting tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. 27 Click Field Format. under Fields. and reporting the shared parameters. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 195 . for Formatting. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. adding the shared parameters to a family. These shared parameters can be added to any family. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. either within family components or within the project template. you create a shared parameter file. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. select 2 decimal places. and are defined and stored in an external file. click Edit. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. creating a generic tag to tag the family. click Estimated Cost. regardless of category. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. For Rounding.rvt. click Training Files. For Units. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. ensuring consistency across families and projects. select Fixed. and schedule the total distance of each path.25 In the Element Properties dialog. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings.

for Name. 7 Under Parameters. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. and click OK. for Type of Parameter. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. under Groups. click Create. click New. 9 Under Parameters. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 11 Click OK. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog.txt. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. select Length. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. for Name. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. enter Path ID.rvt. and click OK. and click OK. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. click Training Files. enter Exiting. click New. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. click New. enter Travel Distance. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters.rvt.1 In the Project Browser. for Name. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and click Save. enter OfficeStandardsParameters. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. 196 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . for File name.

verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. and click OK. and select Instance. Create a tag using shared parameters 15 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. 10 Use the same method to add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. click Add.rvt. select Constraints. 7 For Group parameter under. 13 On the Design Bar.2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. following the equals symbol (=). 14 If necessary. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. otherwise the family loads into the current project. 3 On the Design Bar. for Travel Distance Formula. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. and click OK. 12 Click Apply. and click OK. 11 In the Family Types dialog. 9 In the Family Types dialog. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. click Family Types. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 197 . and click Select. and click OK. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. select Shared parameter. group it under Dimensions. under Parameters. enter Length. click Load into Projects. under Dimensions. in the Load into Projects dialog. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Click Training Files. click Add.rfa. under Parameters. 4 In the Family Types dialog. If you have multiple projects open. 8 Select Instance.

20 Click the intersection of the reference planes in the drawing window to display the Select Parameter dialog. and click OK 3 times. click Label. click Add. 25 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. select Travel Distance. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 26 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. under Parameters. and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. 198 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . click Select. and click Open. 19 On the Design Bar.rft. 24 On the Design Bar. click Modify.16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 17 Select Generic Tag. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog.rft. click Label. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes.

and click Save. and move it down. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. After the lines are tagged. 31 On the Design Bar.rvt. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance.Level 1. under Floor Plans.Tagging. 28 Select the Note in the upper-left area of the drawing window.Tagging. double-click Exiting Plan . verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. click Load into Projects. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. enter M_Travel Distance Tag. for File Name. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 199 . 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. 32 On the Load into Projects dialog. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.rfa. and click OK. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and press DELETE. Placing. select Path ID.rvt is selected.27 In the drawing window. 30 In the Save As dialog. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. 29 Click File ➤ Save As. Placing.

200 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . and click in the center of the corridor. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Component. 6 Move the cursor to the right. above the exterior door as shown.2 Zoom in to the corridor. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. 4 On the Options Bar. select Chain.

click Component. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. through the door. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. clear Leader. 10 On the Options Bar. verify that Chain is selected. and click OK. 12 On the Design Bar. under Constraints.7 Move the cursor down. for Path ID. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and click (Properties). 17 On the Options Bar. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 201 . Placing. double click Exiting Plan . click Modify. and click outside of the building. under Floor Plans. 13 While pressing CTRL.Tagging. click Tag ➤ By Category. enter 1-1. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Level 2. select the 2 dashed travel lines. click Modify. 8 On the Design Bar.

20 On the Design Bar. 21 On the Design Bar. and click above the door to the stair. 202 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. 19 Move the cursor up through the door. click Modify. move the cursor near the right corner. 22 Click at the center starting point. click Component. and click. move the cursor to the left.18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan.

enter 2-1. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. and click OK. 30 Use the same method to specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. 33 For Name. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. for Path ID. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 203 . (Properties). under Constraints. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. Placing. 27 On the Design Bar. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. click Modify. 24 On the Design Bar.23 Move the cursor down. and click OK. under Category. click Modify. enter Level 1 Exit Distance.Tagging. 28 While pressing CTRL. and click in the stair. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities.

40 Click the Formatting tab. while pressing CTRL. and in the third field. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. and click OK twice. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. select Calculate Totals. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. 46 In the Project Browser. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. under Schedules/Quantities. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. under Available fields. select Path ID. enter 2-. in the second field. 43 In the Project Browser. 41 Under Fields. for Filter by. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. under Other. and click Add. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 38 For Sort by. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. and click View. 35 Click the Filter tab. in the first field. 36 For Filter by. click Edit. select Travel Distance. in the third field. enter Level 2 Exit Distance. select contains. and under Field formatting. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. and click Properties. click Training Files. click Schedule/Quantities. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. enter 1-. right-click the Design Bar. 44 In the Project Browser. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. for Filter. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. 204 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 45 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. select Path ID. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Rename. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 42 Click OK.rvt. select Path ID and Travel Distance.

Interiors\C10 .2 In the New Schedules dialog. click the Value field. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog.152 mm. click the Fields tab.Drywall w/ Metal Stud.Partitions . expand C . and click the browse button. select Walls. and click OK. right-click Generic .Interior Construction\C1010 Partitions\C1010100 . and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule.Fixed Partitions. 4 Under Available fields. click C1010145 . and click Properties. and click OK twice. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. for Assembly Code. expand Families\Walls\Basic Wall. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 205 . Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select the following fields. under Categories.

206 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog.mdb for Database Name. click the File Data Source tab. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. and click Next. click Create. 5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. click Training Files. 11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. 12 Click OK in the remaining dialogs. 8 In the New Database dialog. and click Next. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. Additionally. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. 10 Close the exercise file. and open the database in Microsoft Access. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb). 9 Under Directories. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. 3 Click New. 6 Click Finish. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Database. click OK. and click OK to create the database. enter Revit_Project. under Database Name.rvt. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types.9 In the schedule. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. click OK in the dialog. select a location for the database file. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. 10 When the confirmation displays. 1 On the File menu. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database.

For example. 13 Close the exercise file. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 207 . This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes.A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. in addition to the Id column. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element.

208 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .

you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. 209 . and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2008 projects.Annotating and Dimensioning 5 In this tutorial.

You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project.Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm. Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project 210 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels.

After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project. and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt. click Training Files. the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1. you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m.Relocating a Project In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Relocating a Project | 211 .

click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. 8 Select the Level 1 line. If you did that now. The south elevation is displayed. and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1.Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser. so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project. and double-click South. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line. for Elevation Base. The levels in the project are not shared. click Edit/New. click (Properties). select Shared. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. and click OK. and press ENTER. you specify the new location of the project. 3 On the Options Bar.Shared Elevation. However. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated. Under Constraints. you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. enter 10000 mm. to better demonstrate how shared levels work. In the Name dialog. expand Views (all). Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 212 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. By selecting the Level 1 line. 6 Click OK twice. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 On the View menu. enter8 mm Head . By entering 10000 mm in this step. only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time. The elevation of the other levels remains the same. the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. 2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. 5 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Duplicate.

14 In the Project Browser. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration.Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. double-click North. 12 In the Type Selector. as well as other views of the building model. under Elevations. select Level : 8 mm Head . Relocating a Project | 213 . 13 On the Design Bar. click Modify. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view.Shared Elevation.

Shared Elevation. On the Design Bar.15 Define the remaining levels as shared: ■ ■ ■ Press and hold CTRL. 214 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . the Penthouse level. select Level : 8 mm Head . and select Levels 2-4. and the Roof Plan level. In the Type Selector. click Modify. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation.

and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model. expand Views (all). Dimensioning In this lesson. you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. multi-segmented. In Revit Architecture. click File menu ➤ Save As. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. You place linear. and save the exercise file with a unique name.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser. permanent dimensions are created automatically. In this case. there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Linear and multi-segmented dimensions Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans. and angular dimensions. although you must turn on their visibility to view them. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. 17 Proceed to the next lesson. radial. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models.16 If you want to save your changes. “Dimensioning” on page 215. except when you sketch profiles to complete families. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. and double-click Level 1. Dimensioning | 215 .

By default. and when a green dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain. and when a green dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall. 216 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning .2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. dimensions are aligned. 3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view. 4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. select it. click Dimension. and are created by selecting individual reference points. select it. snap to wall centerlines.

Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way. The lock displays as locked. Creating Dimensions | 217 .5 Move the cursor above the view. and click to place the dimension. click Dimension. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. 7 On the Design Bar.

218 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . 17 Move the cursor up. 15 Move the cursor to the right. and select its left exterior face. but below the first dimension that you placed. Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 18 With the multi-segmented dimension selected. and select it. for Prefer. select the right endpoint of the planter. 12 13 On the Options Bar. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays. click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another. and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. 11 Using the same method. and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 16 After you select the reference points on the final planter. and click to place the multi-segmented dimension.9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step. select the right side of the curtain wall. above the plan view of the building. select Wall Faces. 14 Move the cursor to the planter on the right.

Place a radial dimension with a Typ. suffix 20 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. select Wall faces. 26 Select the radial dimension. For Prefer. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Radial). and specify a point to place the dimension. 24 Move the cursor outside the wall. 23 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights. 21 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Dimension. Creating Dimensions | 219 . 27 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right. click Modify. 25 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and select it.19 On the Basics tab.

enter Typ. Place an angular dimension 31 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5.. click (Properties). on the Options Bar. 220 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Modify. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. for Suffix. For Prefer. 33 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Angular). and click OK. 30 On the Basics tab. 34 Select the horizontal line. verify Wall faces is selected.28 With the dimension still selected. click Dimension.

“Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions” on page 221. you select only the wall. click Modify. 35 Select the left exterior face of the planter.This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building. 36 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 221 . When you dimension the wall. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings. 38 Proceed to the next exercise. and click to place the dimension. instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions In this exercise. you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. 37 On the Basics tab.

Click OK.Automatic wall dimension Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select Entire Walls.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 3. 3 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Prefer. Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. For Pick. select Wall centerlines. 222 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . expand Views (all). Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. click Dimension. expand Floor Plans. Click Options. select Openings. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings. and select Widths. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows. 4 In the Automatic Dimension Options dialog: ■ ■ Under Select References. and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.

expand Floor Plans. click Modify. For example. 7 On the Basics tab. Controlling Witness Lines | 223 . you specify their origin on the Options Bar. “Controlling Witness Lines” on page 223.Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall. and double-click Level 1. in some cases. you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser. you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. and click to place the automatic dimension string. expand Views (all). for a multi-segmented dimension. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 Move the cursor down below the plan view. where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. However. Controlling Witness Lines In this exercise. and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. When you place dimensions.

and select it. verify Wall centerlines is selected. and click to place the dimension. click Dimension. 224 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . select the right edge of the planter. select Individual References. For Pick. 7 Using the same method. 5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter.3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Prefer. move the cursor down. 6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights.

8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted. 10 Using the same method. select the bottom right endpoint. Controlling Witness Lines | 225 . and specify a point to place the dimension. and select it. 11 Move the cursor down.

click Dimension. select it. click Modify. 226 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . 13 On the Options Bar. and drag the dimension down the wall.Dimension the partition walls to center lines 12 On the Basics tab. 18 Press and hold SHIFT. select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls. and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed. and click to place the dimension. for Prefer. 15 Moving the cursor to the right. 16 On the Design Bar. select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark. select Wall centerlines. and when the wall centerline highlights. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan.

After you create the new family type. 20 Release SHIFT. you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style.19 Release SHIFT. select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap. click Modify. 22 On the Basics tab. and click the blue middle grip until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions In this exercise. create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. you change the Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 227 . 21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan. and using the same methods. “Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions” on page 227.

and click OK. click Edit/New.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. For Text Font. for Tick Mark.dimension tick mark. text font. Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select CityBlueprint. enter Office Standard. 5 In the Name dialog.2 mm. 228 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. click Duplicate. and select the lower dimension. select Arrow 30 Degree. for Text Size. Under Text. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 2 Click (Properties). enter 3. zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4.

select another font. 8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. 10 On the Basics tab. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 229 . 9 In the Type Selector. and select the bottom dimension. select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. click Modify. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type.NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. ■ Click OK twice. click Modify. 7 On the Basics tab. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list.

You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes. create a new angular dimension type. select the angular dimension on the planter. 12 Proceed to the next lesson. Creating Text Annotation In this lesson. and how to add leaders to the text notes.11 Using the same method. and modify it to use the office standard parameters. you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. “Creating Text Annotation” on page 230. 230 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning .

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click and drag to create a text box. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 231 . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. zoom to planter near grid line 5. 4 Move the cursor above grid line 4. but below the upper dimension string. you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. click Text. for Leader. click (None).Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan In this exercise.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. 3 On the Options Bar.

enter EXISTING BUILDING. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 Select the text box. enter 6 mm Arial Notes. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. for Text Size. 232 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Duplicate. 10 In the Name dialog box. and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify. select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box. and click . under Graphics.5 In the text box. 11 Under Text. select Arc Leaders. Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar. enter 6 mm. and click OK. and click OK. If so. You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. click Edit/New.

Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar. A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. click Text. and enter Planting Bed. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Add Right Arc Leader). click Modify. 15 On the Design Bar. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 233 . 16 Select the Planting Bed text box. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4.

and click OK. for Leader Arrowhead. 23 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader. 24 On the Design Bar. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. Under Graphics. 21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders. select Arrow 30 Degree. and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 234 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . In the Rename dialog.■ Click (Add Left Arc Leader). enter Standard Notes. 20 On the Design Bar. for New. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. Under Text. click Modify. Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box. for Text font. click Modify. select CityBlueprint. Click Rename. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader. click Edit/New. Click OK twice.

over the Planting Bed text. for Leader.Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 235 . 28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3. click (Arc). 27 On the Options Bar. select Text: Standard Notes. 26 In the Type Selector. 29 Move the cursor up and to the right. 30 When green dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text. click Text. click to place the text box.

click File menu ➤ Save As.31 Click in the text box. 32 If you want to save your changes. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Wall. and enter 457 mm Conc. 236 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . and save the exercise file with a unique name.

like a standard door header condition. These components display at the required scale. and metal studs. plywood. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. 237 . using detail components to represent materials like lumber. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model.Detailing 6 In this tutorial. you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2008.

as well as detail lines. you detail the view of the roof edge. In the callout view. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. you trace over the building model geometry. In order to detail from the building model. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. which means that all detail components.Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. region objects. and use the model as an underlay for the detail.rvt. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. After you add components. Detailing the View In this exercise. 238 | Chapter 6 Detailing . you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. and insulation objects. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. In the left pane of the Open dialog. They are also view specific. add detail components. click Training Files. You load detail components.

and click OK. for Pattern ➤ Detail. and click Open. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. enter 406. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. The roof overhang detail displays. 10 On the Options Bar. 17 In the drawing area. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 13 In the Name dialog. double-click the detail callout head. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. 7 In the drawing area. click Edit/New. click Detail Component. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. Exact location is not important. 16 Click OK twice. click Repeating Detail. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Corrugated Metal. 5 In the alert dialog. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal. click .5mm. 15 For Spacing. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Detailing the View | 239 . select As underlay. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Graphics ➤ Display Model.Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model.rfa. click Duplicate. 8 Delete the component. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. click Training Files. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point.

click Modify.18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. 21 Select the original instance of the corrugated metal component. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. 19 On the Design Bar. 240 | Chapter 6 Detailing . and on the Edit toolbar. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. click Load. ■ Click Modify. 20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. and press DELETE. click (Move). click Detail Component. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. 23 On the Options Bar. Add lumber detail components 22 On the Design Bar.

rfa. press SPACEBAR 3 times. verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal.rvt. Load components as a group 27 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. 32 To properly orient the component. 25 In the Type Selector. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. and click Open. 28 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. Because you still have several components to load. 33 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. click OK. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section.24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 26 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. you load them as a group from a single file. click Training Files. and place it in the detail view as shown. 29 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 31 In the Type Selector. 34 In the Type Selector. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. 30 On the Design Bar. Detailing the View | 241 . and click Open. click Detail Component. click Training Files. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal.

39 Select the horizontal segment. select Chain. 37 Place the wallboard component as shown. and click Modify. click Insulation. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. 242 | Chapter 6 Detailing . Add insulation 40 On the Design Bar. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm.Add wallboard detail component 35 In the Type Selector. click the Flip instance arrows. 36 On the Options Bar. 38 Click Modify.

enter 140mm. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. ■ Click Modify. as shown. Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. Detailing the View | 243 . 46 In the Type Selector. and on the Edit toolbar. 44 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. click (Move). Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point. click Detail Component.41 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. Add lumber components 45 On the Design Bar. 43 Click Modify. select to near side. 42 Place 2 segments of insulation. 47 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. For Offset.

53 Proceed to the next exercise. 244 | Chapter 6 Detailing . drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. 2 In the Type Selector. 51 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. Add rigid insulation 50 In the Type Selector. “Adding Detail Lines” on page 244. 4 Click Modify. you add lines to your detail. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select Thin Lines. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. as shown. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click Detail Lines.48 In the Type Selector. they are view specific. meaning they display only in this view. 49 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. and lock the component. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm. Like detail components. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar.rvt. 52 Click Modify.

as shown. enter 10mm. For Offset.Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. Adding Detail Lines | 245 . 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. For Offset. as shown. and press ENTER. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. 7 In the Type Selector. select Medium Lines. and press ENTER. 11 In the Type Selector. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 10 On the Design Bar. select Thin Lines. click Detail Lines. click Detail Lines. enter 10mm.

16 On the Options Bar.Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. and draw the detail lines as shown. and clear Chain. draw the detail lines as shown. 246 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. click (Draw). as shown. select Thin Lines. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. select Chain. 18 In the Type Selector.

the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. enter 10mm.20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. For Offset. click Detail Lines. select the Penthouse level line. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 In the Project Browser. When you turn the display model off. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. select Do not display. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. Adding Detail Lines | 247 . under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). right-click. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 26 In the Type Selector. and click Properties. and click OK. Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. and press ENTER. select Vapor Barrier. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 24 On the View Control Bar. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. click ➤ Hide Crop Region. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard.

Adding Text Notes In this exercise. click Detail Component. 32 Click Modify. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. select M_Break Line.29 On the Design Bar.rvt. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. press SPACEBAR as necessary. “Adding Text Notes” on page 248. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. 248 | Chapter 6 Detailing . you add text notes to complete the detail. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 30 In the Type Selector. click Text. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

for Text ➤ Suffix. Adding Text Notes | 249 .. click Dimension. 6 Click Modify. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar. and click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. 8 In the Element Properties dialog.2 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click (Arc) to create an arced leader. 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. 7 Select the dimension line. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. enter Typ. and click (Properties). Enter the text. Click again to specify the location of the text box.

10 Proceed to the next exercise. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. pressing TAB. and click OK. while pressing CTRL. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). right-click. click Select All Instances. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote.rvt. 7 Click Modify. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 3 In the Rename View dialog. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. and press DELETE. select all the coping linework. and click Rename. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. and save the exercise file. and click OK. (Filter Selection). enter Roof Overhang Detail . “Creating Detail Components” on page 250. right-click.Keynotes. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. click 6 In the Filter dialog. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. and selecting the chain. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping.9 Click File menu ➤ Save. select a text note. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. right-click. on the Options Bar. click Roof Overhang Detail. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. 250 | Chapter 6 Detailing .

Creating Detail Components | 251 . The original linework remains selected. click Training Files.Keynotes view is not the open view. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. 24 On the Options Bar. 21 To place the component. 15 Use a window to select all linework. clear Detail Items. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. enter Roof Edge. 14 Click Modify. and the component can be placed in the detail. and click OK. and click Open. click Detail Component. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. While pressing SHIFT. in the Type Selector. 18 In the Save As dialog. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . select the coping.9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 22 Click Modify. select Medium Lines. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. double-click it in the Project Browser. 25 In the Filter dialog. for File name. navigate to your preferred location. click Load into Projects. 11 In the left pane of the New dialog. 16 Click Modify. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework.rft. and click Save. click . 23 Using a window.

click Detail Component. delete the underlying linework. 27 On the Design Bar. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component.rvt. and click OK. Adding Keynotes In this exercise. 31 Using the same method used previously. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. 252 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 30 In the drawing area. click Training Files.rfa. click Load. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project.26 Press DELETE. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 28 On the Options Bar.rfa. and click Open. “Adding Keynotes” on page 252.B5. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. 2 In the alert dialog. In the Keynotes dialog. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. click Training Files. you place keynotes on objects. 63mm Rigid Insulation. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. click Keynote ➤ Element. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. and click Open. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click to place the leader arm.

select the metal fascia with drip edge. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. click in the Value column. Roof Edge4. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. use keynote 06160.C1.5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. click Keynote ➤ Element. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. 6 Click Modify. 12 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. click Edit/New. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. use keynote 06110. For the metal coping. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. Adding Keynotes | 253 . Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. FasciaProfile_1. 13 Tag components: ■ (Properties).G1. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard.I1. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For the 50 x 300. navigate to 07645.F1. 19mm Plywood. 11 Click OK 3 times. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. For the 50 x 200.F1. use keynote 06110.D1.D11. use keynote 09250. use keynote 06160. For the 50 x 150. For the 19mm Plywood Siding. use keynote 07645. use keynote 06110.D11.

select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown.A8. 17 Keynote the component. 4 In the Type Selector. select Corrugated Metal. “Creating Line-based Detail Components” on page 254. 15 In the Type Selector. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. 18 Save the file. click Load into Projects. for File name. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. 6 Lock the line. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 254 | Chapter 6 Detailing . you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them.rvt. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. and click Save. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. click Training Files. 5 In the drawing area. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click Detail Component. select the left end point of the reference line. navigate to your preferred location.20 Ga.rft. 8 In the Save As dialog. 22mm Corrugated Steel . and click Open. select Medium Lines. and select the right end point. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog.14 On the Design Bar. using keynote 07460. You do this in order to keynote the component. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. click Lines. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 On the Design Bar. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. and click Modify.

34 In the Name dialog. and click . enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. 19 In the Name dialog. click Detail Component. 24 While pressing CTRL. click Detail Component.11 Press DELETE. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Duplicate. 22 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. and click (Properties). invisible. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 13 In the Type Selector. 27 On the Design Bar. and click OK. enter EPDM Membrane. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. 30 Click Modify. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. click Load. click Edit/New. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. 31 Select the component. 28 In the Type Selector. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 255 . and click Open. select m_Light Line Detail Component. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. 29 In the drawing area. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. click Training Files. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. click in the Value column.A1. and m_Light Line Detail Component. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. 25 Next. 15 Click Modify. select Medium Line Detail Component. 37 Click OK 3 times. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. You add the components to the project and keynote them. click Detail Component. click the end points at the top of the roof. click Duplicate. 20 Click OK 3 times. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. 16 Select the component. and hidden) used in the view.

click Detail Component. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. 41 Select the component just added. and assign it keynote 07260. and click the lower end at the break line. (Move). 52 In the Type Selector. click 50 Move the air barrier to the right. 44 On the Design Bar. name the component Air Barrier. 53 On the Options Bar. and click . select Chain. 49 With the component selected. Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar.G1. 47 Select the component. 40 Click Modify.A5. on the Edit toolbar. click Detail Component. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. and click . 256 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 42 Using the same method used previously. against the 3/4" plywood. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. 46 Click Modify. 48 Using the same method used previously. name the component 50 x 200 Framing. and assign it keynote 06110.38 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component.

A4. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. leaving the detail component lines. and click .55 Click Modify. 58 Using the method used previously. and Vapor Barrier. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. and assign it keynote 07260. name the component Vapor Barrier. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 257 . click Keynote ➤ Element. Air Barrier. 50 x 200 Framing. 60 On the Design Bar. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. 61 In the drawing area.

3 In the text editor. click Load into Projects. Enter 07463. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. add a keynote for the component. 69 Using the method used previously. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation.rfa. and click . 63 In the drawing area. 71 Save the file. click File menu ➤ Save. The database file opens in a text editor. 67 In the drawing area.A4. click Detail Component. and press TAB. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.txt. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. 68 Select the component. 258 | Chapter 6 Detailing . “Modifying a Keynote Database” on page 258. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric. and close the text editor.rvt. in the Type Selector.Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component. and press ENTER. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component. and press TAB. select the component.A1. 72 Proceed to the next exercise.. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file.rfa. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Enter 07460.A9. name the component Batt Insul. and assign it keynote 07210. select Invisible Lines. 70 In the drawing area. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing.

click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. under Keynote Table. Each keynote displays as a simple number. and click OK. navigate to 07463. select all the keynotes.A1. you learn how to create a drafted detail. select Absolute. 6 In the Select Keynote File dialog. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. 11 Click Modify. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang).Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. 14 Save the file. ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. and click to place the note. click Keynote ➤ Element.txt. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. After you create a drafting view. 9 In the drawing area. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. In the Type Selector. and click OK. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. 13 Click Modify. click Browse. ■ Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. and click Open. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes. under Path Type. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. Creating a Drafted Detail | 259 . 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. These details do not update with changes to the building model. click to place the leader. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry.

select Reference other view. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Use the dataset you used in a previous exercise. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. For Layer/Level Colors. right-click Drafting 1. select Center-to-center. The detail is imported as an import symbol. 260 | Chapter 6 Detailing . and click Rename. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. select Black and white. click Training Files. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. enter EPDM Metal Coping. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail).rvt. for Scale.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. and click OK. and click OK. The detail that you import is in DWG format. For Positioning ➤ Automatically place. 3 On the Options Bar. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise.dwg. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 6 In the Project Browser. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 4 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. select 1 : 5. “Creating a Reference Callout” on page 260. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Click Open. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area.rvt. click Callout. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. 7 In the Rename View dialog.

11 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. The callout head no longer displays a reference label.4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. and double-click the callout. click Edit/New. Creating a Reference Callout | 261 . Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. and use the callout grips to move the callout head.No Reference. enter Detail . and click OK. 5 Click Modify. 12 Click OK twice. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. and click Properties. delete the existing value. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. 10 In the Rename dialog. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. click Rename. 6 Select the callout. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. for New.

2 In the New Drafting View dialog./Sect. The callout is updated with the sheet information. 262 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. 3 On the View Control Bar. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view.rvt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product./Det. “Creating a Detail in a Drafting View” on page 262 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. for Name. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). and click OK. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail.Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. verify that the scale is 1 : 5. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. enter Header @ Sliding Door.Elev. double-click A105 . 18 Save the file. so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View.No Reference).

click Region Properties. ■ ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the 2x6 lumber as the start point. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. for Name. 18 While pressing CTRL. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 17 Click Modify. enter Gyp. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 16 Select the left edge of the region. select Gypsum-Plaster. Board. 19 In the Type Selector. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 11 In the Name dialog. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. click Detail Component. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and enter 20. click Filled Region. and click OK. click Duplicate. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. 5 In the Type Selector. 14 Click OK 3 times. select the width dimension. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 263 . 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. click .Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. . 15 Draw the region: On the Options Bar. select Wide Lines. select the left and bottom edges of the region.5mm. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. Draw a rectangle as shown.

20 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor up. Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point. (Draw). Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. click 22 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. and click above the top of the region as the end point. 264 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 24 Select the mirrored region. click 23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ (Mirror). and on the Edit toolbar. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150.

36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. enter Wood . in the Type Selector. and click OK. click Region Properties. 34 Draw the region: On the Options Bar. for Name. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. ■ ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 265 . for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern.Finish. click Finish Sketch. 30 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate. click . 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. verify that the thickness is 19mm. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. and select the right edge of the wood region. 33 Click OK 3 times.25 Click Modify. select Wood .Finish. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. select Medium Lines. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 29 In the Type Properties dialog. 37 On the Design Bar. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. click (Align). Draw a rectangle as shown. click Filled Region.

click Ref Plane. and press ENTER. verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63. sketch the new region as shown. 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick). 42 On the Design Bar. click (Align). click . You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. 46 On the Tools toolbar. Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. 39 In the Type Selector. 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. click Finish Sketch. 266 | Chapter 6 Detailing . select Medium Lines.38 On the Design Bar. click Filled Region. For Offset. 40 On the Options Bar.5mm. enter 6mm. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it.

50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Filled Region. click Finish Sketch. and select the bottom horizontal line. 56 On the Design Bar. and click to select the point. and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. Move the cursor down 305mm. Select Chain. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. 54 On the Tools toolbar.47 Click the reference plane. ■ ■ ■ For Offset. enter 0. enter 10mm. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 267 . 52 On the Options Bar: Click (Draw). and press ENTER. 48 Click Modify. For Offset. and click to select the point. and click to select the point. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. and press ENTER. 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. Move the cursor left 25mm. click (Trim/Extend). Move the cursor right 25mm.

61 Click Modify. and click Open.2mm. For Offset. top. and press ENTER. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side.Add mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. click Load. 62 Select the left detail line. select Medium Lines. 66 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 268 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 58 In the Type Selector. and right edges of the door panel region. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. 65 On the Options Bar.rfa. select the height dimension. click Detail Lines. click Detail Component. 60 Select the left. enter 3mm. enter 76. and press ENTER. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Training Files. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

rfa. click Detail Lines.TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. 69 Select the bolt. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side. 68 Click Modify. 72 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Open. click Load. click Detail Component. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150. 71 On the Options Bar. 74 Select the expansion bolt. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. 76 In the Type Selector. 70 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 269 . use the images as a guide. select Wide Lines. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line.

click Detail Lines. click . 79 In the Type Selector. 80 On the Options Bar. 84 On the Design Bar.78 On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. click . 85 On the Options Bar. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. and on the Edit toolbar. click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. select Thin Lines. 270 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 82 Select the rectangle. (Mirror). 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown.

drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. 90 In the Type Selector. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. select Medium Lines. click Detail Lines.87 Click Modify. as shown. 88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 271 . 89 On the Design Bar.

92 Select the line. and on the Edit toolbar. enter 3mm. 272 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. click . 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line. select the length dimension. and click to place the arc as shown. and press ENTER. click Detail Lines. 94 Select the mirrored line on the right. click (Mirror). 95 On the Design Bar. 97 On the Options Bar.

99 Click Modify. and click Modify. click Dimension. click Detail Component. 105 In the drawing area. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. select M_Break Line. Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. 106 Click to place the dimension. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 273 . 103 Add two break lines as shown. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. 102 In the Type Selector. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. 101 On the Design Bar.

and on the Options Bar.5mm Arial. 114 Enter Gyp. 112 In the Options Bar.107 On the Design Bar. drag the text for the smaller dimension. click Dimension. click to create an arced leader. Add text notes to complete the detail 111 On the Design Bar. 274 | Chapter 6 Detailing . Board. and click to place the text. select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2. using the Drag Text grip. click Text. 115 Select the note. 110 Select the dimension line. and click Modify. and click Modify. select the gypsum board region on the left. click (Add Right Arc Leader). 108 In the Type Selector. 113 In the drawing area. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. 116 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 275 . 119 Save the file.117 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. 118 On the Design Bar. click Modify to end the command.

276 | Chapter 6 Detailing .

you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation.Finishing the Sheets 7 In this tutorial. such as images and text into project sheets ■ ■ ■ 277 . including: ■ ■ Creating a note block containing typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources from other applications.

Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click East. click Training Files. 7 On the Design Bar. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. 8 Drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rfa.rvt. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. 278 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets .Using Note Blocks In this lesson. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project.Finishing-Sheets. for Number of Leaders. click Training Files.Hexagon. click Modify. enter 1. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Symbol. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the notes text. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. 5 On the Options Bar. Creating a Note Block In this exercise.

click (Copy). enter Seal existing doors and insulate. and click above the tag to place a copy. click (Properties). under Identity Data. Creating a Note Block | 279 . and click OK. 13 Select the tag. on the Options Bar. 12 On the Edit toolbar. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. for Text.9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected.

enter B. on the Options Bar. 16 For Tag. 280 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . 17 Click OK. and click. 15 For Text. enter Repair existing door surround. as shown: NOTE To create a vertical mirror image. 20 Select the tag on the left. 19 On the toolbar. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements.14 With the copy selected. click (Properties). and click to create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. 18 Use the same method to make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. clear Copy. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. and on the Options Bar. click (Mirror).

for Note block name. and click OK. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. Remove all existing windows. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. 22 Optionally. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B C D E F G H Text Seal existing doors and insulate. enter Exterior Construction Notes. Clean cut and repair wall as required. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. using the table as a reference.21 On the Design Bar. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Repair existing door surround. Clean exterior brick wall. select Tag. select Tag. under Available fields. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. and moving counter-clockwise. Repair as required. Clean existing concrete loading dock. for Sort by. format. and click Add. Tuckpoint as required. and click Add. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. click Modify. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. Saw cut existing brick wall. Creating a Note Block | 281 . Select Text. Create.

Elevations. click Modify. for Heading. select Center. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. verify Arial in the first field.rvt. and double-click A103 . On the Appearance tab. and select Bold. 33 Click File menu ➤ Save As. select Exterior Construction Notes. 27 In the column header (text). and click Save. enter Mark. 30 Click to place the block in the upper-left corner of the sheet. 32 Zoom in to see the note block. expand Sheets (all). For Header text.■ ■ On the Formatting tab. and drag it to the sheet. 31 On the Design Bar. expand Schedules/Quantities. 34 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 29 In the Project Browser. 26 Click OK. enter 6 mm in the second field. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. 282 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . and for Alignment. 28 In the Project Browser. enter Description.

enter T. 5 In the list title field. ■ 4 Click OK. under Sheets (all). and click Add.Title Sheet. under Sheets (all). under Available fields. enter Sheet Index. 2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. select Sheet Number. and in the third field. select does not equal. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise. double-click T . you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project. and drag it to the sheet. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. Select Sheet Name. in the first field. On the Filter tab. for Sort by. select Sheet Number. 6 In the Project Browser. The drawing list displays. select Sheet Index. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. Using Drawing Lists | 283 . double-click T . On the Sorting/Grouping tab. expand Schedules/Quantities. 1 In the Project Browser. for Filter by. in the second field. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt. you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. and click Add. 7 In the Project Browser. select Sheet Number.Using Drawing Lists In this lesson.Title Sheet.

click New ➤ Legend. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. On construction documents. On construction documents. windows. click Modify. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. 9 On the Design Bar.8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower-right corner. and click OK. and door frames. Finally. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it using a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. 284 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers and door tags that are paired with text that identifies them. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. doors. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. and so on). Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends.rvt. door frame schedule. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. enter Typical Symbol Legend. for Name.

4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. click . you create a text type with the necessary size. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. enter Legend Text. 12 Enter Detail Callout for the text note. 9 For Text Font. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. click Text. and click OK. and click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 10 For Text Size. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ M_Section Head . Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. click Edit/New.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar.Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Arial. 6 On the Options bar.Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote . for Name. and click OK twice. enter 3mm. click Symbol. 13 Working from the top down. enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Creating a Symbol Legend | 285 .Filled Level Head . 8 In the Type Properties dialog.

expand Legends. and click to place it.Unit 18.Site Plan/Floor Plan. double-click A102 . click Typical Symbol Legend. 15 In the Project Browser. 286 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . and double-click A101 . and click to place it. 18 In the Project Browser. 19 In the Project Browser. under Sheets. 16 In the Type Selector. click Typical Symbol Legend.■ Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet. expand Sheets (all). drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet. 17 On the Design Bar. select Viewport : No Titlemark. click Modify. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet.

and press ENTER. 3 For Scale. For View. and click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Family. 21 On the Design Bar. Creating a Component Legend | 287 . 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. select Viewport : No Titlemark.20 In the Type Selector. click New ➤ Legend. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save. 6 On the View Control Bar. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Section. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. enter 900 mm. for Name. click Legend Component. select1 : 50.rvt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. For Host length. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. enter 4th Floor Wall Types. select Medium for Detail Level. 5 On the Options Bar. click Modify. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu.

click Text. 10 Select the second wall. 12 In the Type Selector. 288 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . and on the Options Bar. Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior.9 On the Design Bar. for Family. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. click Modify.

Creating a Component Legend | 289 . 19 Enter the following text. 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. The text note with leader is added to the legend. pressing ENTER between component descriptions.13 On the Options Bar. Add text to the legend 16 On the Options bar. for Leader. 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. and enter Wall Type 1 Patio Divider.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and enter Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. click to add text with a single-segment leader. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. click to add text without a leader. 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point.

select 4th Floor Wall Types. and drag it to the new sheet. 26 On the Design Bar. select Level 4. right-click Sheets (all). under Legends. 29 In the project Browser. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. click OK to accept the default titleblock. 23 In the Project Browser. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. The open drawings are both visible. drag it onto the sheet. click Modify to end the command. under Floor Plans. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. and click New Sheet. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. under Floor Plans. 25 In the Project Browser.Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. 290 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . double-click Level 4. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser.

indicating that it captured the wall type properties. 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. Creating a Component Legend | 291 .Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. click (Match Type). 34 Draw a rectangle around the lower-right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. The view zooms in to the patio divider wall. enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. 33 In the floor plan view. select the Wall Type 2 component.

These changes can be due to owner requests. 36 On the View Control Bar. 292 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . 38 Click File menu ➤ Save.35 Select the patio divider wall. click if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. select Medium for Detail Level. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. You can create a sequence of revisions. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. 37 Optionally. contractor inquiries. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet.

enter Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. 2 On the Settings menu. 7 Under Visible. yet as concise as possible. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review.rvt. click Revisions. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. you use the Revisions command to open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. When you use this option. verify that By Project is selected for Numbering Method. If Visible is not selected. if the active revision is number 1. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. In general. In most instances. For example. Setting Up a Revision Table | 293 . Add a revision to the project 4 For Release Date. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. enter a date. When Issued is selected. Using the table. 3 In the Revisions dialog. 5 For Description. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. double-click Level 4. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared.unanticipated changes in construction conditions. In this exercise. under Floor Plans. If you select By Sheet. or changes in building material availability. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. the revision is locked and issued to the field.

rvt. under Floor Plans. 5 Select the partition. including revision number and revision date. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.8 Click OK. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. click (Move). 294 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Edit toolbar. double-click Level 4. Revision clouds have read-only properties. move the cursor up. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. you make changes to the project floor plan. 3 Select the divider. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall.

click Finish Sketch. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. 8 In the drawing area.6 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Revision Cloud. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. Sketching Revision Clouds | 295 . Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. click near the partition you moved. Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. 11 On the Design Bar.

double-click Level 4. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. 16 Click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 296 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click the Annotation Objects tab. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. click Tag ➤ By Category. select 6. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. for Line Weight. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you load a revision tag into the project.rvt. under Floor Plans.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud.

you prevent further changes to the revision. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. the tag is displayed inside the cloud.rvt.rfa. select Leader. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. you create additional revisions in the revision table. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. you create a sheet view in your project. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. under Sheets. click Tags. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 6 Click Load. You do this by issuing the revision. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. on which you place a revised view. you need to add one. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. Working with Revisions In this exercise. scroll down to Revision Clouds. double-click A107 . and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. 8 In the Tags dialog. Add a revised view to a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. click OK.4 On the Options Bar. 10 In the drawing area. the cloud is tagged as number 1. 11 Click to place the tag. 5 In the Tags dialog. Because you chose to number by project. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. You then issue a revision. Working with Revisions | 297 . and because the revision is the first in the project. In the Tags dialog. 2 Enter ZR and zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.Unnamed. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. click Training Files.

You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. 8 If you want to hide issued revisions in the drawing. Create additional revisions 5 Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. 6 In the Revisions dialog. and click OK. click Revisions. 7 Enter the appropriate information for this revision. 298 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. you can no longer modify it.Issue a revision 3 On the Settings menu. select None for each issued revision. You can continue to add revisions. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. under Add. click New. select Issued. for Visible. NOTE After you issue a revision. On the Settings menu. click Revisions.

1 In the Project Browser. text. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson.JPG. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save.rvt. such as images. Importing Image Files In this exercise. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image.Title Sheet. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. and spreadsheets. Importing from Other Applications | 299 . and place it on a sheet. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. into a project. under Sheets. click Training Files. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. double-click T . you learn to import information from other applications.9 Click OK.

m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 300 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. under Sheets. double-click T .rvt. 3 On the Options Bar. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. for Leader. Importing Text Documents In this exercise.5 On the Design Bar. Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. click to add text without a leader. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet.doc text file in another window.Title Sheet 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. 6 Select the text. click Text.

The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. select the document writer. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and saved as Fixture Schedule. NOTE Some formatting may be required once the text is placed in Revit Architecture. and click Save. 10 On the Design Bar. double-click A102 . click File menu ➤ Print. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. for Name.Unit 18. This exercise demonstrates a common method.rvt. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Click OK. click Desktop.Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. Importing Spreadsheets | 301 . and open Common\Fixture Schedule. 9 On the Design Bar.xls. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image.mdi. 4 Under Printer. under Sheets. 7 In the Revit Architecture window. 6 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. This step has been completed for you. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.JPG. This process may vary from system to system. click Modify. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. with the new text box still selected. 3 In Microsoft Excel. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. click Training Files.JPG. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. for File name. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. 1 In the Project Browser. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. enter Fixture Schedule. click Modify.

302 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets .12 Click File menu ➤ Save.

To effectively document this project. as well as a large lab building. 303 . or footprint.Using Dependent Views 8 In this tutorial. you break up the plan into sections. The large floor plan. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. called dependent views. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan.

Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes. 304 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views .

| 305 .

306 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . 5 Click in the drawing area. select the crop region. for Name. The dependent view opens. right-click Dependent on Level 2. right-click Level 2. 2 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Level 2. enter Level 2 . and open Metric\ m_Dependent_Views. 6 In the drawing area. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 3 In the Project Browser. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. click Training Files. and click Rename.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. and click OK. click Zoom To Fit.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson.Aviary.

confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary).The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 307 . and the model crop is the interior crop region. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region. 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. 8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up.

right-click Level 2. 11 In the Project Browser. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). click Zoom To Fit. right-click Dependent on Level 2. 10 On the Zoom flyout.9 On the View Control Bar. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 15 Select the crop region. and click OK. and on the Zoom flyout. click (Hide Crop Region). 12 In the Project Browser. 14 Click in the drawing area. 13 In the Rename View dialog. for Name.Labs. click Zoom To Fit. and click Rename. 308 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . enter Level 2 .

17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. 20 On the Zoom flyout. click Zoom To Fit. click Matchline. click Modify. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 309 . 19 On the View Control Bar. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. click (Hide Crop Region). under Floor Plans. The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. 18 On the Design Bar. 22 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 2.

310 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . Move the cursor left about 4800 mm.23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. click Finish Sketch. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. Click above the left corner of the lab building. 24 On the Design Bar. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles. and click.) ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building.

Unnamed. 28 For Line Pattern. right-click A101 . 27 Under Matchline. 31 In the Project Browser.Aviary. enter Level 2 Aviary. expand Sheets.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and drag it onto the sheet. select Double Dash. and click OK. under Floor Plans. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. for Name. 33 In the Project Browser. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 311 . select 9. click the Annotation Objects tab. and click OK. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog. click Level 2 . click OK to accept the default titleblock. and click Rename. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. for Line Weight.

Labs dependent view on the sheet. double-click Level 2. 38 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and place the Level 2 . 36 Use the same method to create another sheet.35 On the Design Bar. 39 On the Options Bar. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. click Modify. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . for Target view. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs. under Floor Plans. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views.Aviary is selected. click View Reference. 312 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser.

NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. select Floor Plan: Level 2 . 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. click Zoom To Fit. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 313 .The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. 46 In the Project Browser.Labs. 45 On the Zoom flyout. click (Show Crop Region). for Target view. double-click Level 2 .Aviary. 44 On the Design Bar. 41 On the Options Bar. 47 On the View Control Bar. click Modify. under Floor Plans.

right-click. select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view. click the far right control. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing.48 Select the crop region. 50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). 49 If. 314 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. after modifying the annotation crop region.

click Zoom To Fit.51 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. but are not placed on sheets. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 315 . Apply dependent view settings to other plans 52 In the Project Browser. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. 54 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 2. select all views in the list. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. click (Hide Crop Region). 53 In the Select Views dialog. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. 55 On the Zoom flyout. and click Apply Dependent Views. expand Level 1. and click OK. 57 On the Zoom flyout. click Zoom To Fit. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1.

and click Rename. for Name. 2 In the Project Browser. The dependent view opens. 3 In the Project Browser.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the drawing area. and open Metric\ m_Dependent_Views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 316 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The matchline is already placed in the view. 4 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK.Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). right-click Dependent on South Elevation. click Training Files. enter South Elevation . right-click South Elevation. expand South Elevation. and double-click South Elevation. select the Crop Region.Left.

cropping the view to the lab building. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog. 9 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Project Browser. click (Hide Crop Region). Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 13 On the View Control Bar. enter South Elevation . right-click South Elevation. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 317 . 8 In the Project Browser. for Name. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. enter South Elevation. and drag it toward the center of the view. 10 In the Rename View dialog. cropping the view to the aviary.Right. and click OK. for Name. and click Rename. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. and click OK. click (Hide Crop Region). and click Rename. and drag it toward the center of the drawing. 11 Select the crop region. 7 On the View Control Bar.6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. under Sheets. right-click A103 Unnamed. click OK to accept the default titleblock.

21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet. under Elevations. under Elevations. verify that Elevation: South Elevation .Left. and drag it onto the sheet. click View Reference. click South Elevation . under Elevations. 22 On the Design Bar. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline. click South Elevation . for Target view. 23 In the Project Browser. 318 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views .Left is selected.18 In the Project Browser. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar.Right. double-click South Elevation. 25 On the Options Bar. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. click Modify. 20 In the Project Browser. and drag it onto the sheet.

select Elevation: South Elevation . Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 319 .South Elevation. double-click A103 . for Target view. under Sheets (all). click Modify. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.Right. 31 In the Project Browser.28 On the Options Bar. 30 On the Design Bar.

Right-click the view. and click Activate View. you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Select the crop region.NOTE If the view references are not visible. and use the annotation crop controls to modify it. 320 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views .

Viewing and Rendering 4 321 .

322 | Chapter 9 Viewing and Rendering .

You learn how to access and create building model views and how to change the visibility of building components and annotations within views.Viewing 9 In this tutorial. you learn how to change the visibility of detail components. and how to use plan regions within floor plans and reflected ceiling plans. More specifically. you learn to create and customize views of building information models. how to control fill pattern colors. 323 .

You create elevations. and double-click East. and learn how to control the visibility of building components and annotations within views. TIP If the Project Browser does not display. and three-dimensional (3D) views.rvt. expand Elevations. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Open an elevation view of the building model 1 On the left side of the drawing area. 324 | Chapter 9 Viewing . The current file name is displayed in the Project Browser title bar. sections. on the Standard toolbar. click . Both hidden lines and window tags display in the east elevation view. expand Views (all). you learn how to access different views of the building model.Viewing a Building Model In this lesson. and open Metric\m_Viewing_Exercise. The Project Browser is displayed by default between the Design Bar and the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn to create and customize user-defined views of a building information model. Exploring the Building Model In this exercise. locate the Project Browser. You also learn how to control the visibility of different building components and annotations within building model views. 2 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. including elevation and three-dimensional views. A new view displays a wireframe view of the east elevation view of the building model.

The default name of the view is {3D}. The window tags are no longer displayed in this view. click . This change is applied only in this elevation view. The 3D view is displayed in a new viewing window. and click Hidden Line. click Model Graphics Style. Create a 3D view of the building model 8 On the View toolbar. 6 Under Visibility. The east elevation view displays with hidden lines. Exploring the Building Model | 325 . This hides the lines that show through to the exterior of the elevation view. click Visibility/Graphics. Turn off the display of window tags in the elevation view 4 On the View menu.Display the elevation view with hidden lines 3 On the View Control Bar. 7 Click OK. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides for Elevation: East dialog. This change is applied only to the active view. scroll down and clear Window Tags. Notice that window tags continue to display in the view. the east elevation. click the Annotation Categories tab.

10 Move the cursor to the drawing window and notice that it now displays as a hand This means you are in pan mode. 17 In the upper right corner of the viewing window. 16 In the Rename View dialog. 13 View the Dynamic View dialog in the lower left corner of the screen. expand Views (all). enter My 3D View. 18 In the Project Browser. .9 On the View toolbar. and click Rename. double-click My 3D View. . right-click {3D}. and expand 3D Views. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. and spin the building model by clicking the appropriate button in this dialog. Notice that the view name is updated in the title bar of the viewing window and in the Project Browser. 15 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. and click OK. 326 | Chapter 9 Viewing . click to reorient the view. You can pan. you can enable pan mode by pressing and holding the middle wheel button down. Move the mouse to pan the view. and notice that the cursor displays as a magnifying glass This indicates that you are in zoom mode. The view follows the movement of the cursor. 12 Press and hold CTRL. Save the current 3D view 14 In the Project Browser. click X to close the view. you can enable zoom mode by rolling the middle wheel. zoom. under 3D Views. 11 Pan the view by clicking and dragging the cursor in the drawing area.

expand Views (all). click Camera. and double-click Level 1. you create a perspective view of the building model with a camera.rvt. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera In this exercise. 3 Add the camera to the view by specifying two points: one for the camera position and the other for the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point in the top right corner of the drawing. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. eye height. the new view named 3D View 1 is displayed by default in a perspective view. right-click in the Design Bar. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Create the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. and click View. m_Viewing_Exercise. Cameras define the eye point.Notice that the view continues to display with hidden lines and no window tags. outside of the dimension lines. “Creating a Perspective View with a Camera” on page 327. and distance from the target. After you specify the second point (the view target). 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 327 . as shown in the following illustration. Specify the second point in one of the rooms in the building. expand Floor Plans.

Press and hold the left mouse button. 328 | Chapter 9 Viewing . down. 5 On the View menu. click the Walkthrough tab located at the bottom of the dialog. Move the cursor up. Move the cursor up and down in the view to move the cursor forward and backward. 8 To move the camera eye position higher or lower: ■ ■ ■ Click Dolly and move the cursor into the perspective view. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. Press and hold the left mouse button. 7 In the Dynamic View dialog. and sideways to see how the view changes. 9 To move the camera forward and backward in the view: ■ ■ ■ Click Forward/Back and move the cursor into the perspective view.4 To resize the view to see the entire floor model. select the blue control grips on the sides of the crop region and move them out. click Dynamically Modify View. You can use the walkthrough controls in this dialog to move the camera position and change the view. Change the camera projection settings 6 On the View menu.

Move the cursor side to side in the view to rotate the view. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 329 . Change the camera position. Press and hold the left mouse button.10 To rotate the camera around the target: ■ ■ ■ Click Turn and move the cursor into the perspective view. You may need to reposition the view with the other controls. height. Four views of the model display in the drawing area. 11 Adjust the view as shown in the following illustration. 13 On the View menu. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. click Tile. and target 12 On the Window menu.

The border of the window that contains the Level 1 view highlights. and click Show Camera. right-click 3D View 1. The camera and the view direction of the camera are displayed in the appropriate views. 15 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. under 3D Views. double-click 3D View 1. 16 In the Project Browser. 330 | Chapter 9 Viewing .14 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.

TIP The updated view depends on the location of the camera before you change the elevation values. enter 15000 for Eye Elevation and 1700 for Target Elevation. click to create a new 3D view. In the Element Properties dialog. ■ 3D View 1 immediately updates to show the change.17 In My 3D View. under Camera. 18 Change the target and eye elevation of the camera by modifying its properties: ■ ■ Select the camera in My 3D View. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 331 . 20 On the View Control Bar. and click Shading. click Model Graphics Style. Click OK. and move it to another location. and click Element Properties. Use a section box to clip the model 19 On the View toolbar. select the camera target point (the magenta grip). right-click. 3D View 1 should update immediately after you move the target point of the camera.

23 In the Element Properties dialog. The section box highlights and grips are displayed on its faces. 22 On the View menu.21 Rotate the view as shown in the following illustration. under Extents. 25 Select and move the lower right grip on the section box closer to the model. click View Properties. select Section Box. and click OK. 332 | Chapter 9 Viewing . A rotation tool is also displayed. 24 Click the section box. A section box is displayed around the model. as shown in the following illustration.

“Creating a Section View” on page 333. Sketch a section line in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. double-click Level 1. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Creating a Section View | 333 . and rotate the section box around the model. expand Floor Plans. click Section. m_Viewing_Exercise. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. and maximize this view. you create a section view by sketching a section line in a plan view. Creating a Section View In this exercise.26 Click and hold the rotation tool.

6 In the Project Browser. and click Find Referring Views. Notice a dashed green box with blue grips is displayed on the section line. 7 In the Go To View dialog. select the section view. and drag the section depth grip below the middle horizontal wall as shown in the following illustration. 4 On the Design Bar. and double-click Section 1. or in the Project Browser. and click Open View. The box represents the extents of the section view as well as the viewing direction of the section. 8 Select the section line. NOTE Fill pattern is dependent on the zoom ratio. select Floor Plan: Level 1. You may need to zoom closer to the walls in order to see the fill pattern.3 Click to the left of the left wall of the building model. click Modify. 334 | Chapter 9 Viewing . expand Sections. right-click. View the section 5 To view the section. double-click the section head. and then click to the right of the lower right wall to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration.

under Floor Plans. 14 On the Design Bar. you learn to create an elevation view in a project by adding an elevation symbol to a plan view.9 On the Design Bar. move the cursor around the building model. 12 Select the section line. Add an elevation symbol 1 In the Project Browser. 10 Double-click the section head to display the section view. 15 Double-click the section head to display the section view. Notice the change in the view direction. Change the view direction of the section 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Notice that the elevation symbol arrow points to the nearest wall as you move through the building model. An elevation symbol displays at the end of the cursor. click Modify. double-click Level 1. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Without clicking in the drawing area. and select and move the section depth grip under the lower wall. double-click Level 1. Creating Elevation Views | 335 .rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. “Creating Elevation Views” on page 335. Control arrows are displayed near the section tag. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. You may need to adjust your zoom settings to see the elevation symbol. Creating Elevation Views In this exercise. click Elevation. 13 Click the control arrows to flip the section view. m_Viewing_Exercise. Notice the change in section depth. click Modify.

5 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Project Browser. Do not select the arrow. 7 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. zoom in. place the cursor inside the building facing the lobby entrance. The check mark in the right box indicates the current elevation view.4 To create an elevation view of the building lobby. Elevation 1 . View the elevation 6 To view the new elevation.b. The elevation symbol is displayed with four check boxes. double-click Level 1.a. under Elevations.b. indicating the possible elevation views that you can create. Elevation 1 . 8 Select the center of the elevation symbol. 336 | Chapter 9 Viewing . Make sure the elevation symbol is pointing towards the lobby doors. double-click Elevation 1 . click Modify. 9 Select the box shown in the following illustration to add a new elevation view. and double-click the elevation symbol arrow. The elevation is named Elevation 1 .a by default. and click.

you can set the fill pattern color for the brick to red. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors In this lesson. you can choose the wall fill color for a wall type. a shade of gray. click Save As. This includes walls. such as Brick on CMU.11 If you want to save your changes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you can set the color of the coarse scale fill pattern for wall types. in a compound wall. You can control the fill pattern color of the cut and surface patterns for objects that obtain their fill pattern definition from materials. where each layer is assigned a different material. You change the color of the cut and surface patterns in the brick material assigned to the exterior wall in the building model. This means that in views with a coarse level of detail. such as the one below. you learn to control the fill pattern colors of a material. on the File menu. 12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and the insulation color to pink. floors.rvt. in this case. and applies to phasing override materials as well. For example. and other families. you learn to control the fill pattern color of a material and set the coarse scale fill pattern color of a wall type. and save the exercise file with a unique name. In addition. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Common\c_Showroom. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors | 337 . Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material In this exercise. click Training Files. roofs.

3 In the Materials dialog. select red. expand Sections (Section Head . select Masonry . 5 In the Color dialog. 2 On the Settings menu. expand 3D Views. click Color. expand Views (all). Change the brick surface pattern from black to white 8 On the Settings menu. expand Views (all). and double-click Wall/Floor Join . and double-click 3D. Each layer is designated by the material settings of the layer. View the surface pattern of the exterior brick walls 6 In the Project Browser.Filled). The brick cut pattern on the left is displayed as red. click Materials. A color is assigned to both the Surface Pattern and Cut Pattern options in the dialog.Change the color of the brick cut pattern for the exterior walls 1 In the Project Browser.Level 3. and click OK twice. click Materials. 4 Under Cut Pattern. The surface pattern of the brick is black. 7 Zoom in on the brick pattern of the exterior walls.Brick for Name. 338 | Chapter 9 Viewing .Brick for Name. select Masonry . 9 In the Materials dialog. Notice the different fill patterns assigned to each layer within the floor and wall structure.

The view level of this view is set to display in Coarse detail as indicated by the Detail Level instance parameter value under Graphics. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. The surface pattern of the brick is now white. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. The walls in the floor plan that you work with are displayed with a gray fill pattern when displayed in a view with a coarse level of detail. c_Showroom. 2 On the View menu. View the detail level setting of the view 1 In the Project Browser. you learn to set the coarse scale fill pattern color for a wall type. 11 In the Color dialog. expand Views (all). click View Properties. “Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type” on page 339. and click OK twice.rvt. select white. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 1. You change the coarse scale fill pattern from the default color of black to a shade of gray for a wall type. 3 Click Cancel to exit the dialog without making any changes.10 Under Surface Pattern. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type | 339 . click Color.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Color value field. . and click OK three times. 14 If you want to save your changes.Change coarse scale fill pattern color of the arced wall 4 Select the south arced wall. View the arced wall in fine detail 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. click Save As. and click OK. double-click Level 2. select Solid fill for Name. Notice that the surface pattern and color of the brick wall that display in a coarse detail level are not applied because the detail level is set to Fine. 10 On the Design Bar. the plan regions cannot overlap each other. and click Fine. 12 On the View Control Bar. Creating a View Plan Region In this lesson. click Edit/New. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. select a shade of gray. on the File menu. right-click. the Coarse Scale Fill Color is black and the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern is set to none. Plan regions are closed sketches that you can create in floor plan and reflected ceiling plan (RCP) views only. If you create more than one plan region in a file. although they may have 340 | Chapter 9 Viewing . click in the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern parameter value field and click 9 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. By default. The wall type is displayed as solid gray within any view where the Detail Level is set to Coarse. and click Element Properties. you work with a split-level building model that requires a different view range than the rest of the view. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 In the Color dialog. click Detail Level. 13 Zoom in on the arced wall. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify.

it does not display in the Level 1 floor plan.coincident edges. or pattern. Because the stepped portion of the walls in the building model is above the cut plane height in the Level 1 floor plan view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan | 341 . Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. line type. you can display the stepped portion of the walls in the Level 1 floor plan. If you are not familiar with view ranges in Revit Architecture. refer to the online Help for more information. By creating a plan region in the view with a different cut plane height. and open Metric\m_Plan_Region. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan In this exercise. line color. you create a plan region in the Level 1 floor plan of the following building model. click Training Files. Plan regions do not work with linked Revit Architecture files. and you cannot control their visibility.

view range. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. and double-click Level 1. ■ ■ ■ Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the top left. click Plan Region.View the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. The stepped portion of the project walls and windows are not displayed because the cut plane does not intersect any of the model geometry above this height. sketch the plan region using the blue tick marks for guidance: ■ On the Design Bar. the top and bottom clip planes. which is similar to the view range for plan views. and the view depth plane. right-click in the Design Bar. 342 | Chapter 9 Viewing . click Lines. click . Add a plan region to view the stepped portion of the model 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. In the following illustration. and click View. On the Options Bar. the south elevation is also displayed. Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the bottom right. The cut plane height of the view range for this view is 1200 mm. expand Views (all). so you can view the height of the walls and windows. 3 In the Level 1 view. You use the view range property to control the cut plane. expand Floor Plans. Plan regions have a single property.

click Finish Sketch. and click Element Properties. 7 Because the top clip plane value cannot be set lower than the cut plane. select Parent View’s Level (Level 1) for Cut Plane. The plan region displays as a dashed green line. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan | 343 . and view depth) in the view range is the same as the level used to define the corresponding plane in the parent view. and then click OK twice. right-click. 8 Click Apply. 4 Select the plan region. and enter 2800 for the cut plane Offset. click Modify. you specify that the level used to define each plane (cut plane. When you select the plan region. The Level 1 floor plan should display as shown in the following illustration. enter 4000 for the Top Offset. 6 In the View Range dialog. 9 On the Design Bar. This means that the plan region view is going to cut all geometry at 2800 mm above Level 1. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. Press ESC to end the command. click Edit for View Range. By selecting Parent View’s Level. top and bottom clip planes. under Extents. the line turns red.■ ■ On the Design Bar.

344 | Chapter 9 Viewing . 11 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. on the File menu. 10 If you want to save your changes. click Save As.The following illustration demonstrates how the level 1 floor plan view is being viewed with the plan region. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

and posters. you learn to use the AccuRender® Radiosity and Raytrace features in Revit Architecture 2008 to create rendered interior and exterior views of your building information model. to place and render decals to create signs. billboards. and to create walkthroughs of your building information model.Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 10 In this tutorial. 345 . AccuRender is the rendering engine incorporated into Revit Architecture that is used to produce rendered views.

and create the perspective view that you want to render. you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. and then raytrace the view to produce the final rendered exterior view. and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes. You also learn to create a new material and apply it to a building component. change the material of the front terrace of the building from the default material to asphalt.Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson. you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a building model and render it with the AccuRender Raytrace feature. You work with a building model that already has material applied to it. define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions on the front curtain wall. In this exercise. add realistic three-dimensional trees to the building site. You learn to create and apply materials to a building model. After you create the perspective view. you select a scene that defines the model environment. When you complete these changes. you: ■ ■ ■ change the texture of the brick material applied to the exterior walls of the building. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise. the floor. 346 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you raytrace a region of the building that includes the exterior wall.

click . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 347 . under Construction. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Co-house . click Materials.Brick. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. right-click in the Design Bar.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Wall. Verify that the material defined for the exterior finish layer (Layer 1) of the building model is Masonry . and click the tab in the context menu. click Edit for Structure. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Cohouse.Heavyweight block is displayed for Type. View the finish material of the exterior walls 1 Verify that the 3D view of the townhouse building model is displayed.Cavity Wall . click next to Texture to display the Material Library. Change the brick texture of the exterior wall finish material 7 On the Settings menu. 6 Click Cancel three times to return to the 3D view of the building model without making any changes to the exterior finish at this time. under Name. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. 9 Under AccuRender. and click Edit/New. 8 In the Materials dialog. 4 In the Element Properties dialog.rvt.Brick. select Masonry . 3 On the Options Bar.

. 14 On the Options Bar. click Modify.Running. 26 Click OK twice. click in the Material field that contains Default Floor. 12 Click OK twice. select Polished. You can view the new brick texture when you raytrace a region of the building in a later step.A preview of the brick texture that is currently assigned to the walls is displayed in the right pane of the Material Library. under Name. and click 15 In the Element Properties dialog. Polished and click OK. 348 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . for Layer 2. click Edit/New. and click . 16 In the Type Properties dialog.Asphalt. click Edit for Structure. under Construction.200mm. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog. select Site . 22 In the New Material dialog. and click Aluminum. under Name. enter Aluminum. verify that Floor : Floor 1 displays in the Type Selector. click Duplicate. 25 Under Name. 23 Under AccuRender. expand Metals. Define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions 20 On the Settings menu. click next to Texture to display the Material Library. expand Masonry and click Brick. 27 On the Design Bar. 19 Click OK four times. 24 In the Material Library. 10 In the left pane of the Material Library dialog. click Materials. select Carib. 11 Under Name. Change the material of the terrace from the default material to asphalt 13 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Materials dialog. click Modify and select the terrace in front of the building. under _accurender.Plain. under _accurender. 28 Select one of the curtain wall mullions on the exterior face of the building. 18 In the Materials dialog.

Make sure the region includes the exterior walls. click Edit/New. select Exterior under Type. and click OK. press TAB to cycle your selection through different building model components. This completes the changes in materials and textures that you make for the building model. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. When Curtain Wall Mullions: Rectangular Mullion displays in the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 349 . 37 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. under Materials and Finishes. and curtain wall mullions to which you made material changes. floor. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. 35 Move the cursor over the building model.TIP If you do not select the curtain wall mullion on the first selection. click . Raytrace a region of the building to view the material changes that you made 34 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 36 In the Scene Selection dialog. 29 On the Options Bar. Polished. click Region Raytrace. select the curtain wall mullion again. and then click . 32 In the Materials dialog. and draw the rectangular region shown in the following illustration. under Name. select Aluminum. 33 Click OK three times. verify that New is selected. click in the Material field. click No.

rvt. and double-click 1st Flr. 350 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . “Adding Trees to the Site” on page 350. 38 On the Design Bar. Adding Trees to the Site In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. and curtain wall mullions are rendered (this takes a few moments). when you render an exterior view of the model. the leaves of the trees display as indicated by the season and location specified in the render scene settings.The portion of the building that you selected is raytraced and the materials that you changed and applied to the exterior walls. producing a photorealistic effect. In a later exercise. click Display Model to end the Region Raytrace command and redisplay the building model in hidden line wireframe. floor. Cnst. Add red maple trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). you place two different types of trees on the building site.

click Site Component. click Modify. Create a new type of tree. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. select any of the deciduous trees. and add it to the site 6 On the Design Bar.2 Zoom out so you can easily view the area surrounding the building model. select M_Tree .9 Meters. Available tree types are listed in the Type Selector by their Latin names.Deciduous : Acer Rubrum . 5 Move the cursor to a location on the building site. The tree that you selected in this step is a red maple. Continue to place trees until you have added several red maples to the building site as shown in the following illustration. and click to place a tree. 7 In the Type Selector. 4 In the Type Selector. and click . 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and click Site. right-click in the Design Bar. and click Site Component. Adding Trees to the Site | 351 .

as shown in the following illustration. 13 Under Name. to 17 Press ESC to end tree placement. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. enter 7000mm for Plant Height. and click OK twice. under accurender. under Identity Data. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse. under Other. click Edit/New. enter Black Oak.8 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Deciduous. “Creating a Perspective View” on page 352. click Duplicate. 16 Move the cursor to the building site. 12 In the Plant Library. select Black Oak for Type Comments. select Oak. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. click in the Value field for Plant Name. 15 Under Other. and click OK. and click OK.rvt. 10 In the Name dialog. and place two black oak trees. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. The black oak is shorter than the red maple trees that you added to the site. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. expand Trees and Shrubs. 352 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and then click display the Plant Library. Black. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise.

The new perspective view is displayed. on the View tab of the Design Bar. Specify the second point in front of the building facade to define the target point of the camera. Cnst.Place a camera in the first floor view 1 With the 1st Flr. click Camera. Creating a Perspective View | 353 . 3 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the perspective view displays as in the following illustration. view open. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point on the site facing the building to position the camera.

Cnst. The red triangle represents the FOV (field of vision) angle and the back clipping plane of the view. and click Show Camera. 354 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . right-click 3D View 1 (the default perspective view name). The camera position is displayed in the 1st Flr. expand 3D Views. 6 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. double-click 1st Flr. Cnst. 5 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.Modify the camera position and back clipping plane in the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under Views (all). view.

“Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View” on page 355. and click OK. date. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View | 355 . Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. and click Rename. place. lighting. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. enter Exterior. 8 In the Rename View dialog.7 In the Project Browser. right-click 3D View 1. m_Cohouse. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. you select a scene and specify time. and environment settings that you use to render the view. double-click Exterior. under 3D Views.

356 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and drag the slider to set the time to 2:30 PM. 4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. 8 Under Time. Time. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to adjust the minutes precisely. click the Solar Angles tab. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. enter 10 (October) for Month and 5 for Day. 5 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. 7 Under Date. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. under Scene Settings. 6 Select By Date. click Settings. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog.You must define a scene because this is the first time settings are being applied to this view. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. and click Sun. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. click OK to accept the existing scene (Scene 1).

27 On the Options Bar. MA. 16 In the Environment dialog. click Image Size. 23 Under Raytrace Settings. 26 On the Design Bar. select Grass.) 14 Click OK. click Site. under Scene Settings. click No. USA. 10 Click in the Cities list. 11 Scroll down. verify that Automatic Sky is selected.00 (many clouds. 20 In the Name list. 22 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. 17 Under Advanced. Save the rendered view 29 On the Design Bar. 28 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene.20 for Cloudiness. click . 13 Enter . and click OK. under Background Color. The rendered view is saved in the project and can be accessed from the Project Browser. and enter bo. click Capture Rendering. select Autumn for Plant Season. The rendered exterior perspective view is displayed. This setting produces a level of cloudiness in the sky that ranges from 0 (no clouds) to 1. Rye. 12 Click the Settings Tab. 21 Click OK twice. and select Boston. click Raytrace. click Environment. 18 Click Material. under _accurender.9 Click the Place tab. and click OK. select Ground Plane. 19 In the Material Library. Dark. The Ground Plane tab displays. select Good for Quality. under Scene Settings. Render the perspective view 24 On the Design Bar. 25 Enter 150 for Resolution. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View | 357 . 15 In the Render Scene Settings dialog.

Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. and double-click 2nd Flr. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and double-click Exterior to display the rendered view of the townhouse that you saved. 32 If you want to save this exercise.30 On the Design Bar. click Save As. Redisplay the rendered view 31 In the Project Browser under Views (all). expand Renderings. 358 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . on the File menu. you add two RPC people to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. Open second floor plan to display the interior scene that you will render 1 In the Project Browser under Views (all). Adding RPC People In this exercise. you add ArchVision realpeople (RPC people) to the floor plan of the second floor. “Rendering an Interior View” on page 358. To create the rendered scene. and finally.rvt. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. m_Cohouse. expand Floor Plans. Cnst. you render an interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. and save the exercise file with a unique name. define the view and render scene settings. use both Radiosity and Raytracing to render the view. RPC people are represented by a circle in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. click Display Model to end rendering and redisplay the wireframe perspective view of the building model.

6 to select and place M_RPC Male: Alex to the right of Cathy and facing up and to the left (northwest). 4 In the Type Selector. 6 Click to place Cathy to the right of the sofa and below the table. click Component. select M_RPC Female: Cathy. 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. and then move the cursor to rotate her so she is facing up and to the right (northeast). 5 On the Options Bar. 7 Repeat steps 4 . select Rotate after placement. Adding RPC People | 359 .2 Zoom in on the left side of the living room as shown.

m_Cohouse. “Creating the Interior Perspective View” on page 360. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 360 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ Specify the first point on the floor plan facing the table and RPC people to place the camera. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.8 Proceed to the next exercise. click Camera.

but you must adjust the field of vision and far clipping plane to display more of the view. Cnst.■ Specify the target point of the camera in front of the corner of the table. 3 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. double-click 2nd Flr. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 361 . The interior perspective is displayed.

5 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. enter 178 mm for Height. and click Rename. and click OK. 8 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 7 In the Crop Region Size dialog. right-click 3D View 1. Resize the perspective view 6 On the Options Bar. double-click 3D View 1 to redisplay the interior perspective view. under Size. enter 229 mm for Width. click the dimensions for Size. 362 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .4 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration.

click Modify. 15 Select and move the section box grips until only the room that you added RPC people to and that you want to render is visible. and click OK. under Extents. and select the section box. select Section Box. click to display the 3D view of the building model. and click OK. enter Interior. 12 On the View menu.9 In the Rename View dialog. click Shading to view the effects of the section box when you add it. A section box is displayed around the building model. Grips are displayed on the section box. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 363 . 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 On the View menu. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 10 On the View toolbar. 14 On the Design Bar. click View Properties.

select New. click Environment. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. 8 Under Date. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. “Creating a New Render Scene” on page 364. Time. 11 Click in the Cities list. on the Main tab. 6 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. 4 Under Type. double-click Interior to display the interior perspective view. and enter Interior Scene for Name. under Scene Settings. 5 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. By limiting the geometry. 364 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and enter bo.rvt. MA. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. enter 6 (June) for Month and 6 for Day. m_Cohouse. Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. date. 17 In the Environment dialog. and environment settings used to render the view. select Interior. 12 Scroll down. under 3D Views. 10 Click the Place tab. Display the interior perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. you reduce the rendering time. under Background Color. under Scene Settings. and click Save. you create a render scene to specify the time. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. specify a file location and name for the scene settings. click Settings.This process allows you to limit the geometry that will be rendered when you create a rendering of your interior view. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to precisely adjust the minutes. 15 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. 14 Click Save. click OK. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog. 16 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. 13 Click the Settings tab. 9 Under Time. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click Sun. and drag the slider to set the time to 8:30 PM. place. Creating a New Render Scene In this exercise. 7 Select By Date. click the Solar Angles tab. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. USA. and select Boston.

2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View In this exercise. such as windows and doors. Dark. Render the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. “Defining Daylights and Rendering the View” on page 365. click Daylights. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. 23 In the Render Scene Settings dialog.18 Under Advanced. under Use View’s Section Box. you define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall and render the view. click Site. 22 Click OK twice. You can select families with transparent materials. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall 1 In the Project Browser. The Ground Plane tab displays. Curtain Wall 1). and click OK. under accurender. click Radiate. click OK. select {3D}. 24 Under Scene Settings. Rye. as daylight sources. you allow sunlight to pass through the panels when you render the view. select Grass. The 3D view of the building model with the section box is displayed. When you define daylights for the curtain wall panels. select Summer for Plant Season. m_Cohouse. 19 Click Material. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View | 365 . 21 In the Name list. 20 In the Material Library. select Ground Plane. double-click Interior. 6 In the Radiosity Information dialog. double-click {3D}. under 3D Views. 5 On the Design Bar. 3 Select the curtain wall on the second floor (Walls: Curtain Wall.

8 On the Options Bar. on the File menu. which can take several minutes. begins.The radiosity process. The RPC people do not display in the view until you raytrace them in the next steps. . 366 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you rendered an exterior and an interior view. the following rendered view is displayed. When radiate completes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. 10 Close the exercise file. 9 If you want to save your changes. You learned to use both the Radiosity and Raytracing features included in the AccuRender render engine. select Medium (150 dpi) for Resolution. 7 On the Design Bar. and click The raytraced perspective view is displayed and now includes the RPC people. Light bounce is calculated for each individual light. click Save As. click Raytrace.

you must select or define a scene. click Training Files. Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. or section view. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE Some Imperial values are used by default in this exercise. but you can also define it in a 3D. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shaded or Shaded with Edges AccuRender (Raytrace) IMPORTANT If you record your walkthrough AVI with the AccuRender display option. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. Usually you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. proceeds through the dining room. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. The walkthrough path is a spline. In a plan view. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. If you prefer to use Metric values. click Settings ➤ Project Units. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 367 . but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. you can record the walkthrough by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player independent of your Revit Architecture software.rvt. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path.Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. and ends in the far corner of the living room. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2008. and change unit formats as desired. which is the path that a camera will follow through your building model. and open Common\c_Townhouse. elevation. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path.

click Walkthrough. expand Walkthroughs. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser under Views (all). on the Options Bar. click . 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. 368 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . The floor plan of the first floor of the townhouse is displayed. expand Floor Plans. or the first key frame. 5 Specify four additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown in the following illustration. and double-click 1st Floor. of the walkthrough. expand Views (all). 6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. verify that Perspective is selected to create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. 3 On the Options Bar. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click to specify the start point.Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Walkthrough 1. right-click in the Design Bar. and click the tab in the context menu.

The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of 300 frames in the walkthrough. select the crop boundary. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. verify Field of view is selected. 9 On the Options Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). click the dimensions for Size to change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. 13 On the Options Bar. click Edit Walkthrough. 12 On the View menu. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown in the following illustration. and click OK. Creating a Walkthrough | 369 .The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. 8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. 11 Under Change. If it is not. 14 Click . and select the crop boundary. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. enter 16" for Width and 9" for Height. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar.

Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. “Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position” on page 370. 16 On the Options Bar. c_Townhouse. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. press ESC. and click OK. 2 On the Options Bar. 17 Click . 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. click Edit Walkthrough. under Extents. enter 1 for Frame. clear Far Clip Active. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). 370 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. The walkthrough plays. click . proceed to the next exercise.15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. double-click 1st Floor. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. and click OK.rvt.

Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 371 . Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. 5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown in the following illustration. 6 On the Options Bar. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. You can move any camera target or key frame position.The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. select Path for Controls.

rvt. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. and then click to play the walkthrough. When you export the walkthrough. 372 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system for Compressor. Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. and click Save. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. under Walkthroughs. click Edit Walkthrough. specify 15 for Frames per Second. The AVI is recorded. hidden line. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. If you are unsure of what option to use. or with AccuRender raytracing. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walk-through from the location that you specified in step 3. select <Shading> for Display mode. and click OK. double-click Walkthrough 1. 4 Under Format. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. 9 On the Options Bar. 1 On the File menu. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. shaded with edges. without opening Revit Architecture 2008. 3 Under Output Length.7 Click the third key frame position. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. shaded. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. “Recording the Walkthrough” on page 372. c_Townhouse. click Export ➤ Walkthrough. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. and drag it to the location shown in the following illustration. 2 In the Save As dialog. 5 In the Video Compression dialog.

and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. perhaps to 6” wide x 4” height. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Save As.7 Try creating other walkthroughs. 8 If you want to save this exercise. specifying the number of frames. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Recording the Walkthrough | 373 . on the File menu. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. reducing the size of the image.

374 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

In this tutorial.Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define. 375 . More specifically. You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings.

and double-click 01 Entry. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (all). 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. expand Floor Plans. you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Solar Study . and open Common\c_Solar_Study. click Camera. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building.rvt.Courtyard View In this exercise. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. A 3D view is created. click Training Files. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. as shown. 376 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .

if necessary. 8 In the Project Browser. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. 7 Click the view boundary to select it. as shown. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. click Spin and move the cursor in the drawing area to adjust the view. 9 In the Rename View dialog. expand 3D Views. 10 On the File menu.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. “Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View” on page 377. 5 In the Dynamic View dialog. you create a section cutaway view. and click Rename. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. click Modify. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. click to reorient the view. double-click 01 Entry. right-click 3D View 1. enter Solar Study . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 377 .Courtyard View. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. under Floor Plans. click Save As.4 On the View toolbar. and click OK. 6 On the Design Bar. and save the exercise file with a unique name. as shown. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.

right-click Section 1. click 10 On the View toolbar. double-click the section head. click . click Section. to reorient the view. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. and click OK. expand Sections. click Modify. 8 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. 378 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .3 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Design Bar. 6 To view the section.

so no shadows will be cast from these elements. In some cases. under Floor Plans. as shown. click Modify. and click Rename. you create a plan cutaway view. 18 On the File menu. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 379 . right-click {3D}. click Section for Solar Study Cutaway. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. and under Orient to a View.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. select Section: 12 In the Dynamic View dialog. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. “Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View” on page 379. On the Annotation Categories tab. under 3D Views. then select Medium. do not display many elements in 3D. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry. click Callout.11 In the Dynamic View dialog. then Fine. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. including the house. as shown. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. 17 To hide the section box. 14 In the Project Browser. Typical plan views. to expand the dialog. clear Section Boxes. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. 13 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view down and to the right. 15 In the Rename View dialog. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. click Save. and click OK. 16 On the View Control Bar. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

click . as shown. and click OK. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. 10 In the Dynamic View dialog. 380 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click 8 On the View toolbar. and under Orient to a View. click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. and click Rename. select Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. 9 In the Dynamic View dialog click to expand the dialog. 5 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Rename View dialog. 11 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. to reorient the view. as shown. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model.4 In the Project Browser.

21 On the File menu.15 Select the Roof. and click OK. under 3D Views. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. right-click {3D}. 19 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. under 3D Views. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. 18 In the Project Browser. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. so you can see into the building from the top. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 381 . 17 On the View Control Bar. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . 16 On the View Control Bar. 20 On the View Control Bar. click Save.

11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog.rvt dataset you used in the previous lesson. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. select Los Angeles. 382 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . MA. and click OK. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. . and time. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. and preview the effects of each study as an animation. For the Single-Day solar study. leave the slider at 50. single-day. and click OK. click . you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. you specify the location. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. Click the Single-Day tab. and double-click Solar Study .Boston.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. For the Multi-Day solar study. click Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. 4 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. you specify the location. and click Duplicate. for City. Dataset Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. CA. You can create a still.Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. date. or multi-day solar study. 2 On the View Control Bar. 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. date range. 3 Select Cast Shadows. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. Los Angeles. and time range. expand Views (all). Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Name dialog. Creating Solar Studies . 10 Under Place. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. click .Courtyard View. USA. For this study. enter Summer Solstice. USA is selected. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. expand 3D Views.

You can select the level to be used for shadow display. Los Angeles. click . click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. under Sun and Shadows Settings. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. ■ ■ To display the previous sequential frame. 6 On the View Control Bar. select December 22. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 16 In the Name dialog. click OK. click To display the next key frame. click Save.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. and click OK. click . enter 20 and press ENTER. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 383 . 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 19 On the File menu. enter Winter Solstice. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Under Frame.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. Los Angeles is selected. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. under Frame. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. confirm that Summer Solstice. For Time Range. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. enter 10 and press ENTER. . 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. Los Angeles. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. click . 7 On the Options Bar. 14 In this case. for Date. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 2006. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. select June 22. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. and click OK. and click Duplicate. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. 2006. select Winter Solstice. 2 On the View Control Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. “Previewing Solar Study Animation” on page 383. Clear Ground Plane at Level. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. ■ For Time Interval. on the Single-Day tab. click OK.Courtyard View is currently displayed. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected.

AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. click To play the animation from start to finish. Los Angeles. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. under Sun and Shadows Settings. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. under Floor Plans. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. Click and enter Dining. approximately as shown. 384 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click . on the Single-Day tab. . click OK. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. and click OK. select Summer Solstice. click . 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog.rvt dataset you saved in the previous lesson. click Text. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. The solar study animation plays. Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. double-click 01 Entry. 14 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click . PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail.■ To display the next sequential frame. Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 13 On the View Control Bar. Click outside of the text box to end the command. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. approximately as shown. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file.

click OK. and click OK. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.4 Sketch rooms: ■ On the Design Bar. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Los Angeles. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. select Section Boxes. Exporting the Study as AVI | 385 . click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. expand 3D Views. 5 In the Project Browser. as shown. as shown. 6 On the View Control Bar. 11 To display the section box. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Summer Solstice. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. click Lines. On the Annotation Categories tab. 8 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. click . ■ ■ ■ Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. and click OK. On the Options Bar. click . Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. on the Single-Day tab.

enter 450 in the first field (width). 386 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . For File name. For Frames per second. 17 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. verify that the value is set to 15. For Dimensions. and enter 5 to 50. Under Format. as shown.12 In the drawing area. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. for Model Graphics Style. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. 14 Click outside of the section box. 15 To hide the section box. For Save as type. select the section box. and click OK. select AVI Files. On the Annotation Categories tab. Under Output Length. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway .Los Angeles. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. clear Section Boxes. if necessary. To maintain the proportions of the frame. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. verify that Hidden Line is selected. select Frame range.

select PNG. for Compressor. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. verify that the value is set to 15.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. enter 450 in the first field (width). and enter 5 to 10. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. Under Output Length. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. For Save as type. or GIF. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. such as JPEG. Los Angeles. for Model Graphics Style. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. 18 In the Save As dialog. click Save. “Exporting a Study as PNG” on page 387. or any single-frame format. 3 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. select Winter Solstice. of the animation separately. and click OK. click . NOTE When you export to PNG. TIFF. click Save. 8 In the Save As dialog. Under Format. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. To view the animation. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. 7 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Desktop icon. For File name. click OK. BMP. 20 On the File menu. or frame. on the Single-Day tab. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. and click OK. verify that Hidden Line is selected. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. you open each image. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . as shown: Exporting a Study as PNG | 387 . the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. For Dimensions. In this example. depending on the Frame Range. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson.Los Angeles. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. For Frames per second. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. select Frame range. click Save. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected.NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. 2 On the View Control Bar. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size.

under 3D Views. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.9 On the File menu.rvt dataset you saved in the previous lesson. 388 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. 2 Select the section box in the drawing area. click Save.

NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen. 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts. 5 Select the roof. Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 389 . as shown. and on the View Control Bar. 4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top.

for Compressor.Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. and click OK. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain.Boston. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. Click the Desktop icon.Week Interval. and click Save. select Full Frames (Uncompressed). 17 On the View Control Bar. 390 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . In the Save As dialog. 15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. For Time. select One week. MA. 18 On the File menu. you compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North. under Sun and Shadows Settings. clear Section Boxes. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. and click OK. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. specify 2:00 pm. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . click Save. On the Annotation Categories tab. click the Multi-Day tab. 16 In the Video Compression dialog. 8 On the View Control Bar. click OK. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. 12 In the Name dialog.Los Angeles . USA. Orienting to True North for Solar Studies In this lesson. and click Duplicate. 9 On the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. and click OK. for name enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. for File name enter 2pm . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. For Time Interval.

change the time back to 12:00 PM. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. In this exercise. 10 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click Apply. 11 Under Date and Time. select Summer Solstice. For example. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. View still solar studies 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Plan Cutaway is displayed in the drawing area. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. click the Still tab. and click OK. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and select Winter Solstice. click . specify 11:00 AM for time. and click OK. 2 On the View Control Bar.Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that project north is the top of the view. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. click . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. on the Still tab. 4 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 9 Under Date and Time. 7 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. and click OK. click . Orienting to True North | 391 . Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Then. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Cast Shadows.

click OK. Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. and select View Properties. 13 On the View Control Bar. in the Angle from Project to True North field. for Orientation. under Graphics. 18 Orient the project to True North: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the drawing area. NOTE You must go to a plan view to set True North and you must change the view graphics to True North before you can change the angle value. 16 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Rotate project to True North 17 In the Project Browser. click the Still tab. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. and select Winter Solstice. select True North. enter 45 and press ENTER to set the angle of rotation. 14 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. and click OK. On the Options Bar. and click OK.12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. In the Element Properties dialog. click . under Floor Plans. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. double-click 01 Entry. Notice that the project rotates in the view. click OK. 392 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .

select Summer Solstice. under 3D Views. click the Still tab. and click Apply. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. click the Single-Day tab. and click OK. 19 In the Project Browser. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 20 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. click .NOTE Settings for the location and orientation. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. verify that AVI Files is selected. Los Angeles. including the angle from True North. 21 On the View Control Bar. 24 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click OK. Export animated solar study 26 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. Orienting to True North | 393 . are saved with the project. 25 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 23 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. For Save as type. In the Save As dialog. 22 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. for File name. click Summer Solstice.

4 Render the scene: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. for Compressor. select Winter solstice 2pm in LA. Refer to “Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs” on page 345 for additional information on rendering.■ Under Format. Right-click in the drawing area. Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. under Graphics. under 3D Views. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. capturing it. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. In this exercise. and exporting it as a JPEG image. under Floor Plans. Rendered views do not have this limitation. click Save. 2 In the Project Browser. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. you also capture the image and export it as a JPEG file for future use. enter 600 in the first field. On the Options Bar. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. for Resolution. for Dimensions. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. and click OK. 394 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . The scene is rendered in full color at draft resolution. On the Options Bar. 29 On the File menu. and select View Properties. click GO. ■ 27 In the Video Compression dialog. and click OK. 1 In the Project Browser. select Draft (75 dpi). for Orientation. click Raytrace. 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. double-click 01 Entry. it is a best practice to change the view graphics setting back to Project North for documentation and annotation purposes: ■ ■ ■ In the Project Browser. Since a rendered image is temporary. select Project North. for Scene. In the Element Properties dialog. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. under 3D Views. 28 Once you are finished with the study. and click Save. Click the Desktop icon.

In the Save As dialog. 7 Review some captured images of the building. Notice that you can clearly see where light enters the windows and how the shadows fall on the floor. click Export Image. Rendering an Interior View | 395 . On the Options Bar. The scene is rendered in high resolution. double-click each of the following images: ■ ■ ■ living area summer living area winter to house and studio summer solstice 8 On the File menu. so use the Capture Rendering option to save the view in the project.■ ■ On the Options Bar. NOTE Rendered views are temporary. In the Project Browser. click Capture Rendering. under Renderings. and click Save. for Resolution. click Save. 6 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ on the Design Bar. click GO. for Save as Type. 5 On the Design Bar. select JPEG. select Presentation (300 dpi).

396 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .

type. There are two directions you can choose when organizing presentation graphics: realism and stylistics. elevations." In Revit Architecture. The architect's primary goal in documentation is to communicate the intent of the design. there are several options for expressing the architecture. In this series of exercises. For the realistic approach. and other quantifiable elements within the context of contract documents." The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. you learn several graphic techniques using these above mentioned tools to create an "analytique. or the client.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. and line quality without the measurement of its thickness is to transcend "building" and to recognize the "architecture. A majority of tools in Revit Architecture 2008 are intended to describe number. To express texture beyond material specifics. you explore the stylistic approach. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular 397 . you learn various methods of effectively communicating your design intent to your audience by creating presentation views. In this tutorial. an outside reviewer. There remain many options in the software that do not quantify specific dimensions so much as they explain the subjective complexity of the work. and Section Boxes. tutorials on the Accurender features of Revit Architecture can be found under “Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs” on page 345. and details. Advanced Model Graphics. sections. They include the Accurender® Plug-in for Rendering. a consultant. Whether the audience is the general contractor. length. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. the Linework Tool.

Co-house. 398 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views.building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. Using the pre-built building model.

change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. In order for the floor plan to fit into the analytique. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. you create a presentation floor plan. expand Views (all). Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. Cnst. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. right-click 2nd Flr. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. you create a copy of the plan.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. expand Floor Plans. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 399 .

and clear DOWN Text. click in the drawing area. 7 Under Visibility. Modify view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. click Visibility/Graphics. Up Arrow. click the Scale control and select 1:100. click the Annotation Categories tab. 400 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. UP Text. click Save As. expand the Stairs category. This turns off the visibility of all tags. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. 5 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. 10 On the File menu. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. exit the menu. under Floor Plans. dimensions. Cnst. 8 Click OK. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. and click OK. Modify visibility/graphics 4 On the View menu. Down Arrow. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. Notice that no annotations display in this view.2 In the Project Browser. and so on in this view. this represents the view getting smaller. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. sections. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. elevations.

modify. 5 Under Settings. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. MA. navigate to the folder of your choice. click for Place. Time and Place. and click Save. you can create. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view.11 In the Save As directory. on the Still tab. 2 On the View Control Bar. click the Place tab.rvt. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 8 Select Boston. select By Date. Within a Project.rvt. and click OK. “Using Advanced Model Graphics” on page 401. and delete multiple locations in order to analyze a single prototype. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. click . the darker the shadows. The higher the number. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. Under Shadows Properties. double-click it in the Project Browser. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. The Shadow intensity dictates the darkness of the shadow display. 6 Under Settings. NOTE Shadows can be cast in all view styles except Wireframe. At that place. The Sun and Shadows Settings are shared with Accurender and can also be used when rendering. specify the following: ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. you can specify one place where the project resides within the world. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. ■ Under Intensity. select Sun and Shadow Settings. specify 35 for Shadow. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 401 . and click Advanced Model Graphics. 7 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. USA for City. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view. select Cast Shadows.

10 Select Ground Plane at Level. 17 On the File menu. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click OK. Cnst. Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. be aware that if you enter a different city. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. specify 10/27/2006 for Date and 1:00 PM for Time. Turn off the ground plane shadows 13 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen depending on the settings that you choose. click . 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 18 Proceed with the next exercise. and select 1st Flr. 402 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. click Save. click OK.NOTE For this step. “Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet” on page 403. however. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. you can enter any city you wish. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. under Sun and Shadows Settings. 11 Click OK. 16 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. clear Ground Plane at Level. and click Advanced Model Graphics. under Settings.

4 In the Views dialog. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click View. click Modify. click Add View. 6 On the Design Bar. and notice a view title displays. The viewport displays at the tip of the cursor. Notice the blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. right-click the Design Bar. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click OK. select Arch Portrait. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. click Sheet.Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. and click to place it. TIP If the View tab is not available. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 403 . select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. and click Add View to Sheet.

click Duplicate.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. click . and click Activate View. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. For this analytique. This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. click OK. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. To accomplish this. and click OK. 12 In the Name dialog. 9 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. Notice the viewport no longer displays a view title. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. 404 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. click Edit/New. select No for Show Title. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. under Graphics. enter Presentation.

When you are finished drawing the chain. under Graphics. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 405 . 26 In the Type Properties dialog. 24 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. click Region Properties. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. click . 17 In the Type Selector. click Filled Region. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. 18 On the Options Bar. click . fill properties. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. If necessary. and select Chain. 25 In the Name dialog. 22 On the Design Bar. select Invisible Lines. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. TIP If you have difficulty sketching using invisible lines. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. click Edit/New. click Duplicate. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. for Fill Pattern. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. enter Solid Black. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. 20 On the Options Bar. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. click . draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model.16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and the boundary of the region. select the entire chain (use TAB) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector.

“Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique” on page 406. 34 On the File menu. click Save. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. under Name. 30 On the Design Bar. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. click Finish Sketch. and click OK. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. scroll down. and click OK. 406 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. click OK. enter Presentation for Sheet Name. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. and click Deactivate View. select Solid Fill. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. under Identity Data. and click View Properties.27 In the Fill Patterns dialog.

and click Rename. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. under Visibility. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. on the Model Categories tab. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 2 In the Project Browser. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. expand Elevations. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. and clear Elevation Swing. and click OK. and click OK. enter Presentation South Elevation. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 407 . under Elevations. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. under Views (all). right-click Copy of South. exit the menu. 9 Click OK. click Override. expand the Doors category. scroll up. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. right-click South. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls.rvt. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 On the View menu. click in the drawing area. under Visibility. click in the Walls row. under Pattern Overrides. clear Visible.

click OK.Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. By changing the angle of the sun. 16 In the Name dialog. click Save. 12 Under Shadow Properties. “Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet” on page 408. 18 Specify 2:30 PM for Time. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. verify that Hidden Line is the selected Style. select Cast Shadows. 11 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Time and Place. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 408 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Duplicate. 20 On the File menu. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. 13 Under Intensity. under Settings. specify 35 for Shadow. 14 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. select By Date. click . and click OK. and click OK. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view.

Notice the viewport displays a view title. and double-click A105 . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand Sheets (all). Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 409 . Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. 3 In the Views dialog.rvt. and click Add View to Sheet. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation.Presentation.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. click Add View. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. under Views (all).

6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan.5 In the Type Selector. click Modify. select Viewport: Presentation. 7 On the Design Bar. Notice the view title no longer displays. 410 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

8 On the File menu. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. click Save. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. “Adding Section Views to the Analytique” on page 411. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 411 .

Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. To fit correctly in the analytique. under Floor Plans. and double-click Section 2. select 1: 100 for Scale. 3 On the Options Bar.rvt. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. this view needs to be rotated 180 degrees. expand Sections (Callout 1). m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Section. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). you will create a callout around the building model components within the section view. Cnst. double-click 1st Flr. Section 2 is added to the building model. To accomplish this.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 412 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and use the flip arrows if necessary. 4 Add the section shown below.

and click OK. right-click Callout of Section 2. click Visibility/Graphics. enter Presentation Section 2. click Modify. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 413 . under Sections (Callout 1).6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Pattern Overrides. click in the Walls row. select 1 : 100 for Scale. 7 On the Options Bar. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. clear Visible. 11 In the Rename View dialog. click the Model Categories tab. Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. double-click Presentation Section 2. and click Rename. TIP You can also open the callout in the Project Browser by double-clicking Callout of Section 2 under Sections (Callout 1). 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so it is readily identifiable. click Callout. 12 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 15 Under Visibility. and click OK. 10 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Callout 1). 8 Draw a callout around all the building model components within the section view as shown. Modify Visibility/Graphic Overrides 13 On the View menu. click Override.

20 Click OK. scroll up. The inner crop boundary shows the crop region for model elements. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. When you select the crop boundary. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. and clear Elevation Swing. 22 On the Options Bar. 414 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .17 Under Visibility. The outer crop boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. under Extents. Hide the crop boundary 21 Select the crop boundary. and click OK. click . Notice that the crop regions no longer display. clear Crop Region Visible. expand the Doors category. clear Annotation Crop. Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries.

rvt. “Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View” on page 415. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. under Sections (Callout 1). Click Apply. In addition. 25 Proceed with the next exercise. TIP You may need to move the dialog off to the side in order to see the view. specify 35 for Shadow. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. double-click Presentation Section 2. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Under Shadows Properties.24 On the File menu. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 415 . click the Advanced Model Graphics control. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. Under Intensity. open the Project Browser and. click Save. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 2 On the View Control Bar. select Cast Shadows. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. Notice that the shadows displayed do not offer much contrast.

In the steps that follow. 416 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . “Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique” on page 417. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. TIP You can also use the linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. and click OK. NOTE The line style. click Save. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. under Settings. click Duplicate. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. you create a new Sun and Shadow setting in order to make a presentation view with more contrast. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. and click OK. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Notice the shadows on the view provide more contrast and a sense of depth. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click . specify an Altitude of 70 degrees. You can modify this line style by selecting Line Styles from the Settings menu. Notice application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. 5 In the Name dialog. under Silhouette Edges. select Override Silhouettes. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. 11 On the File menu. was added to this dataset for training purposes. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. click OK. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Relative to View. Silhouette Edges. 10 Under Silhouette Edges. select Directly. Apply silhouette edges 8 On the View Control Bar. and click OK.

m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 417 . Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify.rvt. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180 degrees. under Sheets (all). 6 On the Design Bar. and click to place the selected view. The view title no longer displays. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 5 In the Type Selector. double-click A105 . select Section: Presentation Section 2. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. select Viewport: Presentation. click Add View. 3 In the Views dialog. and click Add View to Sheet.Presentation.

418 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and enter 180 to specify the number of degrees of rotation. To rotate an object. you click to specify the start radius. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. under Sections (Callout 1). 8 Select the callout that you added previously. In the steps that follow. click . Using a clock as a reference. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation.Notice the section needs to be rotated 180 degrees. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. and either enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. Rotate the callout view 7 In the Project Browser. double-click Section 2. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. and press ENTER. you accomplish this by rotating the callout within the section view. 9 On the Edit toolbar.

After you enter the rotation value and press Enter. double-click A105 . Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. the callout rotates 180 degrees.Presentation. Notice the extents need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model. 12 Drag the callout extents until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. under Sheets (all). Notice that the Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180 degrees and now needs to be repositioned. and drag it up and to the left as shown. 14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 419 .

m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt. click Create View Template from View. enter Presentation. you create a view template for presentation views in order to reduce repetitive work while creating subsequent views. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. 16 On the File menu. 4 In the View Templates dialog. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser.15 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 3 In the New View Template dialog. “Working with a Presentation View Template” on page 420. After applying the view template to a new section view. and click OK. click OK. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. under Sections (Callout 1). 420 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 17 Proceed with the next exercise. 2 On the View menu. click Save. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. double-click Presentation Section 2.

and click Activate View. Working with a Presentation View Template | 421 . Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. click View Properties. Now. and elevation swings no longer display. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. right-click Section 1. and click OK. and click Rename. 12 In the Views dialog. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. enter Presentation Section 1. rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique.Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. select Viewport: Presentation.Presentation. you can simply apply the presentation view template. under Sheets (all). right-click Copy of Section 1. under Sections (Type 1). 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Notice the furniture. select Section: Presentation Section 1. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. 7 In the Rename View dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 14 In the Type Selector. 6 In the Project Browser. 15 Right-click the viewport. lighting fixtures. and click Add View to Sheet. 9 In the Select View Template dialog. annotations. under Sections (Type 1). Apply presentation view template 8 On the View menu. click Add View. 16 On the View menu. click Apply View Template. select Presentation. and click OK. double-click A105 .

select 90 degrees Counterclockwise for Rotation on Sheet. and click OK. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. under Graphics. such as a tracery window or column capital. 20 On the File menu. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. 422 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. 18 Right-click the viewport. In this exercise.17 In the Element Properties dialog. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. click Save. “Working in a Callout Analytique” on page 422. traditional analytiques contain a detail. and click Deactivate View.

and click OK. and modify the extents and the callout head location as shown. double-click Section 1. enter Presentation Callout. and click Rename. click Modify. After you add the callout. 6 In the Project Browser. select the callout. right-click Callout of Section 1. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. double-click Presentation Callout. Working in a Callout Analytique | 423 . under Sections (Callout 1).rvt. 5 In the Rename View dialog. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 4 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Callout 1).Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click Callout. under Sections (Type 1).

9 In the Element Properties dialog. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. 424 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .7 Select the crop boundary and adjust the bottom so that there is a small gap as shown. and click View Properties. clear Annotation Crop. clear Crop Region Visible. 8 Right-click. and click OK. under Extents.

click View Properties. and click OK. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 In the Views dialog. 14 In the Type Selector. 15 On the Design Bar. under Sheets (all). 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. click Modify. select Custom for View Scale. select Section: Presentation Callout. click Add View. select Viewport: Presentation. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. and click Add View to Sheet. Working in a Callout Analytique | 425 . Modify presentation callout on sheet 16 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. and click Activate View. and move it into the position shown below.Add callout to presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 19 Right-click the callout presentation view. 17 On the View menu. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Presentation. and click Deactivate View. double-click A105 . specify a value of 22 for Scale Value 1.

turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as it is a stylized representation of the architectural forms. and make adjustments as necessary. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. 426 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. activate the viewport. 25 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. 23 On the Design Bar. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. double-click Presentation Callout. Apply filled regions to presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. In the steps that follow. click Region Properties. Click Finish Sketch on the Design Bar when you are finished. under Sections (Callout 1). 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. You can sketch all of them at once or one filled region at a time. Although there are several methods you could use to create these areas of contrast. click Filled Region. When finished. select Solid Black for Type. and click OK.

click Filled Region. double-click A105 . 29 On the Options Bar. and click Activate View. under Sheets (all).26 On the Project Browser. Add poche region 27 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. 28 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Presentation. and sketch the rectangle shown below. Working in a Callout Analytique | 427 . click .

select Crop Region Visible. 428 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Notice the entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. under Extents. click View Properties. and drag the left and bottom extent until the entire poche region displays. 31 On the View menu. and click OK.30 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 33 Select the crop region.

37 On the File menu. and click OK. 36 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. click Save. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. and apply shadows to the views. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. under Extents. clear Crop Region Visible. 38 Proceed with the next lesson. click View Properties. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 429 . you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. and click Deactivate View. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. “Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes” on page 429. You then add each view to the presentation sheet.34 On the View menu. you create three similar isometric views with different cutaways.

under 3D Views. 7 In the Name dialog. specify 35 for Shadow. click Orient ➤ Southwest. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Create southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. select Cast Shadows. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. 2 On the View menu. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Under Sun and Shadows Settings. and click OK. Under Intensity.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. double-click Isometric. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. 430 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Duplicate. click the Scale control. and click 1 : 200. 3 On the View Control Bar. click . Under Shadows Properties. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog.

Cnst. and click Rename. 13 In the Rename View dialog. 14 In the Project Browser. click View Properties. and click OK. Notice the section box that displays around the building model. under 3D Views. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. Add a section box to Isometric 2 17 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Rename View dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Isometric 2. enter Isometric 2. and click OK. select Override Silhouettes. right-click Isometric. Rename and duplicate isometric views 12 In the Project Browser. 9 Click OK. Select Ground Plane at Level. enter Isometric 1. Specify an Altitude of 45 degrees. Select 1st Flr. right-click Isometric 1. Select Relative to View. and click OK. Specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. under Extents. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Directly. in the list. under 3D Views. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. under Silhouette Edges. 11 Under Silhouette Edges. 15 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 431 .8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 18 On the View menu. under 3D Views. select Section Box. under 3D Views. under Settings.

432 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Notice the grips that display on each face of the section box. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.20 Select the section box. 22 In the Project Browser. 21 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. When you are finished. You can use this to rotate the section box. under 3D Views. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. click Modify on the Design Bar. TIP Notice there is also a rotation symbol. and click Rename. under 3D Views. These allow you to modify the extents of the section box. right-click Isometric 2. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the second floor as shown. 23 In the Project Browser. make a duplicate of the view. Before turning off the visibility of the section box.

you stack the three isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. 27 On the Annotation Categories tab. 32 On the Annotation Categories tab. under 3D Views. 25 In the Project Browser. and click OK. double-click Isometric 3. under 3D Views. 31 To hide the section box. in the Type Selector. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 28 In the Project Browser. the stairs and railings may display. under Sheets (all). double-click A105 . Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 33 In the Project Browser. 30 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. Notice the section box no longer displays. Next. and click OK. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. double-click Isometric 2. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select Viewport: Presentation. In such a case. clear Section Boxes. and click OK. click Modify on the Design Bar. 26 To hide the section box. 29 Select the section box. When you are finished. either adjust the plane location.24 In the Rename View dialog. clear Section Boxes. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 34 In the Project Browser. drag Isometric 3 underneath the left section view as shown and. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.Presentation. enter Isometric 3. under 3D Views. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 433 .

drag Isometric 1 underneath Isometric 2 as shown and. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. 36 In the Project Browser. 434 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . in the Type Selector. drag Isometric 2 underneath Isometric 3 as shown and. Notice the filled region partially covers the view.35 In the Project Browser. in the Type Selector. select Viewport: Presentation. under 3D Views. select Viewport: Presentation. under 3D Views.

This will make it easier to draw lines. and click Deactivate View. 47 On the Design Bar. 38 Select the poche filled region. select Concrete for Type. click Finish Sketch. select Solid Black for Type. and click OK. click Region Properties. click Lines. 44 Using the drawing tools. select Transparent for Background. and on the Options Bar. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. The image below shows the lines redrawn. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. click Region Properties. and click Activate View. click Edit. under Graphics. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 435 . and then click Edit/New. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. You may need to use the split tools and trim tools to modify lines along the way. 39 On the Design Bar. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout view. 42 Click OK twice. 43 On the Design Bar. 41 In the Type Properties dialog.Modify filled region boundaries 37 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. You change this back to solid fill when you are done. 45 On the Design Bar.

double-click 1st Flr.49 On the File menu. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. click Camera.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. Adding a camera is a two-click process: first you specify the eye location. 436 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . “Creating Cutaway Perspective Views” on page 436. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. Cnst. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. you add it to the presentation sheet. under Floor Plans. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. you create the final view for the analytique. click Save. then you specify the eye direction and range. a cutaway perspective view.

6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. specify 35 for Shadow. select Cast Shadows. click . Under Intensity. Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. Under Shadows Properties.The view opens immediately. and click Advanced Model Graphics. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 437 . 4 Adjust the crop boundary so the entire building model fits within it.

and click OK. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Add a section box 10 On the View menu. 9 Under Silhouette Edges. and click OK. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric for Name. A section box now cuts through the building model. 13 Use the section controls to modify the location of each respective plane until your view resembles the following image. under Silhouette Edges. 438 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Extents. You may need to adjust the location of the crop boundary as well. 12 Select the section box.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click View Properties. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. select Override Silhouettes. and click OK. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. select Section Box. Notice the controls that display on each plane.

double-click A105 . Because scale does not apply to perspective views. under 3D Views. under Sheets (all).Presentation. and click OK. After placing it. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 On the Project Browser. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click View menu ➤ View Properties. 15 On the Options Bar. go to the Type Selector and select Viewport : Presentation. under Change. On the Annotation Categories tab. click Size. clear Section Boxes. 17 Under Model Crop Size. enter 165 mm for Width. select Scale (locked proportions). 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. and click OK. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 439 . Clear Crop Region Visible. you must specify the actual size of the image. and click OK. 21 In the Project Browser. drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet.14 Select the crop boundary. 18 To hide the crop region. 19 To hide the section box.

m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. enter Title. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. 440 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Text. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. click Duplicate. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. select the same font as the title. Create new text types 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Text : Title. specify a text size of 40 mm. and click OK. 13 Add a title to the analytique as shown. click Text.22 On the File menu. and click OK. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 2 On the Options Bar. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise.rvt. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. click Edit/New. 5 In the Name dialog. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. Add a title and description 12 In the Type Selector. under Text. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Description. click . 23 Proceed with the next exercise. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. “Annotating the Analytique” on page 440. specify a text size of 6 mm. click Save. click OK. 9 In the Name dialog. select a font. click Edit/New. and click OK.

click Modify. Annotating the Analytique | 441 . 16 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. 15 In the Type Selector. 18 On the File menu. select Text : Description. click Save.14 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. 17 On the Design Bar.

442 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

Importing and Exporting 5 443 .

444 | Chapter 13 Importing and Exporting

Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

13

In this tutorial, you learn how to export a Revit Architecture building model to Autodesk®3ds Max® or Autodesk®VIZ, where you render it and create a daylight analysis. Autodesk 3ds Max is a professional three-dimensional animation package that provides robust animation, modelling, and workflow functionality for the most complex problems in design visualization and visual effects. Autodesk VIZ is a 3D modelling, rendering, and presentation software application that provides state-of-the-art image creation technologies for communicating and sharing your design intent. For simplicity, this tutorial uses 3ds Max, but the same workflow applies in VIZ. NOTE To complete this tutorial, you must have Autodesk 3ds Max 9 installed on your system. If you do not have 3ds Max installed on your system, or if you have an earlier version of the software, you can download a free trial from the Autodesk website.

445

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max
In this exercise, you export a Revit Architecture building model to Autodesk 3ds Max and render it. To export the building model to 3ds Max, you select a 3D view of the building in Revit Architecture and export its geometry and data to a DWG file. You then link the DWG file to a new 3ds Max scene. NOTE You can also import the DWG file into 3ds Max, but linking allows you to easily update the 3ds Max scene with any changes that you make to the Revit Architecture model after you initially import it. After you link the DWG file in 3ds Max, you quickly render a view of the building model. The AccuRender materials that are applied to elements in the Revit Architecture building model can be rendered in 3ds Max. After you make some minor adjustments to the materials, you add a daylight system and a sky to produce a more polished rendering.

Dataset
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Export to 3DS.rvt.

Export a Revit Architecture building model to a DWG file
1 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click To Building. The view of the building that you want to render in 3ds Max displays.

446 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

There are a few steps you can take to reduce the geometry and data in the model to make the export process more efficient. You can change the detail level of the view, use a section box to limit the view geometry, and turn off visibility of building elements. Because this building model is small, it is not necessary to use any of these options at this time.

2 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats. 3 In the Export dialog:

For Save in, browse to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Common. Under File Naming, verify that Automatic and Long are selected. If these options are selected, a file name that consists of the dataset name appended with the view name automatically displays for the File Name.

Click Options.

4 In the Export Options dialog, under Solids (3D views only), select Export as ACIS solids, and click OK. The 3D elements in the building model will be exported as ACIS solids, or as 3D objects with multiple sides. If you select to export as polymesh, each element would be exported as an object made up of multiple polygons that are joined, or ''meshed'' together. When exporting to a DWG for use in Max, it is recommended that you export building models to DWG as ACIS solids. 5 In the Export dialog, click Save. 6 In the alert dialog, click OK to ignore the view crop boundary. The building model is exported to a DWG file in the Training location that you specified. 7 Minimize Revit Architecture but keep it open, as you modify the building model and reload it later in the tutorial. Next, link the file to a 3ds Max scene and render it. Link a DWG file to 3ds Max if you anticipate making changes to the building model that you want to reexport to 3ds Max. Import files when you want to export only one iteration of a design for use in 3ds Max.

Create a 3ds Max scene
8 Open 3ds Max, and if the Welcome screen displays, click Close. 9 Click File menu ➤ New. 10 In the New Scene dialog, select New All, and click OK. 11 Click Customize menu ➤ Units Setup.

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max | 447

12 In the Units Setup dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Display Unit Scale, select US Standard. Verify Feet w/Fractional Inches is displayed. Under Lighting Units, select American. Click OK.

13 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the file as RAC Building.max.

Link the Revit Architecture building model to 3ds Max
14 Click File menu ➤ File Link Manager. 15 In the File Link Manager dialog, click the Presets tab. 16 Under Named Presets, select Revit, and click Modify. This preset contains the desired settings for linking Revit Architecture building models. 17 In the File Link Settings: DWG Files dialog, click the Advanced tab. 18 Verify Use scene material assignments on Reload is selected. This setting ensures that material changes that you make in 3ds Max will be preserved if you reload the DWG file. 19 Click Cancel. 20 In the File Link Manager, click the Attach tab, and click File. 21 In the Open dialog:

For Look in, browse to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Common. Select c_Export_to_3DS.rvt-3DView-ToBuiliding.dwg, and click Open.

22 In the File Link Manager dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Preset, select Revit. Click the Attach tab. Click Select Layers to include. A dialog listing all the layers that were created when you exported the Revit Architecture building model to the DWG displays.

23 In the Select Layers dialog:
■ ■

Select Select from list. Scroll to view the layers, and verify that a check mark displays to the left of each layer name to indicate it is selected. In this tutorial, you want all the layers visible, but you can use this dialog control the layers that display in your 3ds Max scene.

Click OK.

24 In the File Link Manager, click Attach this file. 25 In the Proxy Object dialog, click Yes.

448 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

The file opens in the 3ds Max, and 4 different views of the building model display. Only the single camera position that created the 3d To Building view was exported with the Revit Architecture building model.

26 Close the File Link Manager.

Adjust a scene for rendering
27 On the bottom right of the screen, click in the Perspective viewport to set it current. The edges of the viewport are highlighted in yellow when the viewport is current. 28 In the top left corner of the viewport, right-click the Perspective viewport label, and click Views ➤ Camera: To Building.

29 Adjust the view:

■ ■

In the lower-right corner of the screen, click Click in the Camera: To Building viewport.

(Dolly Camera).

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max | 449

Press and hold the mouse button, and drag the cursor toward you until the view is adjusted as shown.

Render the scene

30 On the Main toolbar, click

(Quick Render).

The scene renders and the rendering displays in the Render window. There are a couple of adjustments that you want to make to the rendering, including the quality of the glass and stone materials. Because this is an exterior view, you also want to add a daylight system (a sun) and a sky in the background.

31 Close the render window. NOTE If you want to save any of your renderings as you progress through this tutorial, at the top of the render window, click .

450 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

Improve the quality of the glass and stone materials in 3ds Max

32 On the Main toolbar, click

(Material Editor). (Get Material).

33 In the Material Editor, under the bottom left side of the material slots, click 34 On the left side of the Material/Map Browser, under Browse From, select Scene.

All of the materials applied to the Revit Architecture elements that were exported to the DWG file with the elements display in the right pane of the browser. 35 In the list of materials, select and drag Glass to one of the material slots at the top of the Material Editor.

36 In the Instance (Copy) Material dialog, verify Instance is selected, and click OK. 37 In the Material Editor, change the color of the glass:
■ ■ ■

Under Templates, select Glass - Clear. Under Physical Qualities, for Diffuse Color, click the color swatch. In the Color Selector, specify a golden brown color, and click Close.

38 Change the quality of the stone material on the retaining wall:

■ ■

In the Material Editor, select another slot, and click

(Pick Material from Object).

In the Camera: To Building viewport, move the cursor over the retaining wall and click to select it.

■ ■

In the Material Editor, under Templates, select Stone. Close the Material Editor and the Material Map Browser.

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max | 451

Add a sun and sky
39 Click in the Top viewport and zoom out until you can see the entire building and the camera. 40 Click Create menu ➤ Lights ➤ Daylight System. 41 In the Daylight Object Creation dialog, click Yes.

42 In the Top viewport, to the right of the building, click and drag to place and size the compass rose. 43 Move the cursor down and to the right to place the sun.

44 On the right side of the screen, locate the Command panel and click 45 Under Daylight Parameters, under Position, click Setup. 46 Under Location, click Get Location. 47 In the Geographic Location list, select Boston, MA, and click OK. 48 Under Site, for North Direction, enter 250. 49 Under Time:
■ ■ ■

(Modify).

For Hours, enter 12. For Month, enter 7. For Day, enter 21.

452 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

For Year, enter 2007.

50 Click Rendering menu ➤ Environment, and verify that the Environment tab is displayed. 51 Under Common Parameters, and under Background, click the color swatch, and set the background color to a sky blue color.

Render the scene

52 On the Main toolbar, click

(Render Scene Dialog).

53 At the bottom of the panel, for Viewport, select Camera: To Building, and click the lock that displays next to the selector. The lock lets you adjust the scene in other viewports (which become active as you use them), and then click Render to render the viewport you originally chose. When off, Render always renders the active viewport. 54 Under Output size, click 640 x 480. 55 Click the Advanced Lighting tab, and under Select Advanced Lighting, select <no lighting plug-in>. 56 Click Render. The scene is rendered and displays the adjustments you made to the glass and stone materials, as well as the addition of the daylight system and sky.

57 Click File menu ➤ Save. 58 Proceed to the next exercise, “Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max” on page 453.

Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max
In this exercise, you create and render 2 similar cutaway views of the building model. You use 2 different techniques to create the cutaway views. You create the first view in Revit Architecture using a section box to limit or ''cut away'' geometry from the building in the front of the To Building 3D view. You then export the geometry to the DWG file you created in a previous exercise, and reload it in the Autodesk 3ds Max scene. You learn how to use a section box to limit the building model geometry that you export, a technique that is useful and time-saving when exporting large building models.

Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max | 453

A cutaway view created by a section box in Revit Architecture and rendered in 3ds Max

After you create the first cutaway view, you create a similar view in 3ds Max by adjusting the visibility of the curtain wall elements so they are not visible to the camera, and then rendering the scene in the To Building viewport. Dataset

Continue to use the datasets you used in the previous exercise, c_Export to 3DS.rvt and RAC Building.max.

Create a Revit Architecture cutaway view
1 Maximize Revit Architecture. 2 In the 3D To Building view, right-click, and click View Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, select Section Box, and click OK. 4 Click View menu ➤ Zoom Out.

454 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

A section box displays around the view.

5 Select the section box so that grips display. 6 Select and move the grips until a cutaway view displays as shown.

7 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Reload the cutaway view in 3ds Max and render it
8 Export the building model to the DWG file again, and reload the DWG in 3ds Max. 9 When the file is reloaded, render it again.

Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max | 455

Create a cutaway view in 3ds Max
10 Open Revit Architecture. 11 In the To Building view, right-click, and click View Properties. 12 To restore the view, in the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, clear Section Box, and click OK. 13 Export the building model to the DWG file again, and reload the DWG in 3ds Max.

14 In 3ds Max, on the Main toolbar, click

(Select Objects by Name).

15 At the top of the Select Objects dialog, enter curtain to select all the Curtain Wall Panel and Curtain Wall Mullion objects that display in the left side of the dialog. 16 At the bottom right of the dialog, click Select. The components of the curtains wall are selected. You will create a named selected set to control the camera’s visibility of these objects.

17 On the Main toolbar, click

(Edit Named Selection Sets).

18 In the Named Selection Sets dialog, click set name. 19 Close the Named Selection Sets dialog.

(Create New Set), and enter Curtain Wall for the selection

20 Right-click in the view, and click Object Properties. 21 In the Object Properties dialog, click the General tab. 22 Under Rendering Control, clear Visible to Camera, and click OK.

23 On the Main toolbar, click

.

A cutaway view, similar to the one that you created with the Revit Architecture section box displays. 24 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Daylight Analysis” on page 457.

456 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

Creating a Daylight Analysis
In this exercise, you create a daylight analysis of the Revit Architecture building model in 3ds Max. The analysis will uses daylight levels in a specific location to display a spectrum of colors on the building model. The colors indicate the different levels of light incident on each building surface. The blue and green colors indicate low light levels, while the red, yellow, and orange colors indicate high levels of light. A daylight analysis can be a useful tool in determining the sustainability of your Revit Architecture building models.

Dataset

Continue to use the datasets you used in the previous exercise, c_Export to 3DS.rvt, and RAC Building.max. 1 In 3ds Max, click Rendering menu ➤ Environment. 2 In the Environment and Effects dialog, under Exposure Control, select Pseudo Color Exposure Control. Pseudo Color Exposure Control is a lighting analysis tool that provides you with an intuitive way of visualizing and evaluating the lighting levels in your scenes. It maps luminance or illuminance values to pseudo colors that show the brightness of the values being converted. 3 Under Pseudo Color Exposure Control:

Under Display Type, for Quantity, select Illuminance. Illuminance displays values of light incident on surfaces.

■ ■ ■ ■

For Style, select Colored. For Scale, select Logarithmic. Under Display Range, for Min., enter 100. For Max, enter 8000. The display range sets the lowest and highest values to represent in the rendering. Although this tutorial provides display range values, when you create your own daylight analysis you will probably want to test different display ranges to get the results that you want.

4 On the Main toolbar, click

(Render Scene).

Creating a Daylight Analysis | 457

The scene renders and displays a true color rendering in the Render window. The 256 color daylight analysis is then created.

5 If desired, in the Render window, click 6 Save and close the 3ds Max scene. 7 Maximize Revit Architecture.

, and save the file.

8 Save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the file without saving it.

458 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

Importing SketchUp Files

14

The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. Once the model has been imported, you can easily add detail with Revit components. In this tutorial, you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family.

After you import the SketchUp model, you create a small building from the front mass form. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements, such as walls, curtain walls, and roofs, that compose the building.

459

460 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files

Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass
In this exercise, you create a Revit Architecture project, and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project, and not in the library.

Create a Revit project
1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 2 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric.rte. 4 In the New Project dialog, click OK. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 6 In the Save As dialog, for File name, enter Import SketchUp, and click Save.

Import a SketchUp model
7 On the Design Bar, click the Massing tab. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Massing on the context menu that displays. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar, click Create Mass. 9 In the informational dialog, click OK. 10 In the Name dialog, enter SketchUp Model, and click OK. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 12 In the Import/Link dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Click the Training Files icon. Double-click the Common folder. For Files of type, select SketchUp Files. Click the Sketchup file, buildings.skp. Under Import or Link, for Layers, select All. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements, visible elements, or select from a list.

■ ■ ■

Under Layer/Level Colors, select Preserve colors. Under Positioning, select Manually place, and select Cursor at center. For Place at level, select Level 1. In a new project, Level 1 is the only choice. An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from, depending on the complexity of the project.

Under Scaling, for Import units, select Auto-Detect.

Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 461

You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information.

Click Open.

The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan. 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers.

14 On the View toolbar, click

.

15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. 16 On the Design Bar, click Finish Mass. NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements, such as walls, curtain walls, and roofs. 17 In the warning dialog, click the Close button.

18 Proceed to the next exercise, “ Creating a Building from Mass Faces” on page 462.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces
In this exercise, you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements, such as walls, curtain walls, and roofs, that compose the building. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project. You turn their visibility off to view only the building.

462 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files

After you create the building from the mass faces, you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design.

Create roofs from mass faces
1 Zoom in to the front mass form, and on the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar, click Roof by Face. 3 In the Type Selector, verify Basic Roof: Generic - 400mm displays. 4 On the Options Bar, for Level, verify Level 2 is selected. 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass, and when the cursor displays a plus sign, select the face so that it highlights in red. The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign, indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection.

6 On the Options Bar, click Create Roof. A roof is created from the mass face. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. To see the new roof, on the View toolbar, click to turn off mass visibility in the view. Click again to display masses.)

7 With the Roof by Face command still active, on the Options Bar, verify that Select Multiple is selected. This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 463

9 On the Options Bar, click Create Roof. 10 Adjust the view:

■ ■

On the View toolbar, click

.

In the Dynamic View dialog, click Spin, and move the cursor in the drawing area until you can see the middle mass.

11 Right-click, and click Cancel to end the Spin command. 12 On the Design Bar, click Roof by Face. 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass.

14 On the Options Bar, click Create Roof.

464 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files

click you created. click .15 On the Design Bar. This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass. 21 On the Options Bar. and adjust the view so you can see the front of the mass form. click Wall by Face. verify Basic Wall: Generic . 16 On the View toolbar. for Loc Line. 22 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. to turn off the mass visibility in the view. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 465 . 20 In the Type Selector. 19 On the Design Bar. select Core Face: Exterior. click Modify to end the command.200mm displays. and display only the roofs that 17 Click again to redisplay the masses.

26 In the Type Selector. 27 Select the left face of the left mass. 24 Click to redisplay the masses. click Create System. 29 Using the same technique. 28 On the Options Bar. Create curtain systems from mass faces 25 On the Design Bar. verify Curtain System: 1500 x 3000mm displays. click to view only the walls and roofs. create the 2 curtain systems shown below. 466 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files .23 On the View toolbar. click Curtain System.

and select it. Create walls from mass faces 31 On the Design Bar. and adjust the view so you can see the back of the mass forms. click Create Roof. click Wall by Face. click . press TAB until the desired wall highlights. select the other wall. Create a roof from a mass face 33 On the Design Bar. TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall.30 On the View toolbar. click Roof by Face. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 467 . 32 Select the 5 walls highlighted below. 34 Select the mass face shown below. and on the Options Bar.

38 On the View toolbar. click Wall by Face. click to view the building that you have created. Create the final wall 37 On the Design Bar. 468 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files .Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 35 On the Design Bar. click Curtain System. click Create System. and select the mass face shown below. 39 Click to redisplay the masses. and on the Options Bar. 36 Select the 4 mass faces shown below.

as shown. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. click in the view. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips.Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 40 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and curtain systems that make up your building Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 469 . The perspective view created by the camera displays. double-click Level 1. specify a point to place the camera. 44 On the View toolbar. In the far left corner of the building that you created. 42 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Camera. roofs. 41 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. 43 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building. specify a point for the camera target. to view only the walls. Below the right corner of the view.

Click the frame to display its grips. Under Grid 2 Pattern. click . select Center. Click OK. for Justification. Change the justification of the curtain systems 45 On the Design Bar. for Justification.You may need to resize the view again. and select the left curtain system in the view. select Center. Under Grid 1 Pattern. 470 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files . click 47 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . click Modify. Modify the roofs 49 On the Views toolbar. 46 On the Options Bar. 48 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view.

58 Add doors to the building as shown below. double-click 3D View 1. 57 In the Type Selector. 51 Right-click. verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays. and adjust the view so you can see the front of the building. click . 55 On the View toolbar. Add doors to the building 54 In the Project Browser. click Door. under 3D Views. 53 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 56 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 471 . 52 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. double-click {3D}. and click Cancel to end the command. and move the roof edges as shown below.50 Select each roof to display its grips.

472 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files .59 Save and close the drawing.

Creating Families 6 473 .

474 | Chapter 15 Creating Families .

each with a different size. In this tutorial. you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor.” The term family describes a powerful concept used throughout Revit Architecture to help you manage your data and make changes easily. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date. Each family element can have multiple types defined within it. they are still related and come from a single source.About Families and the Family Editor 15 All elements in Revit Architecture 2008 are “family based. 475 . material set. shape. Even though various types within a family can look completely different. or other parameter variables as designed by the family creator. thus the term family. Changes to a family type definition ripple through the project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family or type within the project.

Standard Component Families Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates. you create a family within predefined templates that contain the intelligent objects needed to create the particular family type. and save them from a project file to your library if needed. Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an . there is another type of family that allows you to create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit Architecture recognize it as a particular component type. and roofs. Family templates are either host-based or standalone. You can duplicate and modify existing system families. You also learn about the Family Editor. Host-based families have components that require hosts. exterior. Standalone families include columns. because there is only one file to track. Family templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families. You can load them into projects. For example. and roofs are examples of these types of families. generic. This makes file management much easier. transfer them from one project to another. the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project. In this lesson. In addition. however. and partition wall styles. You provide the information necessary to uniquely describe the family geometry. 476 | Chapter 15 About Families and the Family Editor . has wall types that define interior. The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family. floors. You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components. All different types that you create are stored with the master family file. There are. You can either duplicate and modify an existing component family or create a new component family based on a variety of family templates. floors. but you cannot create new system families. NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another.rfa extension. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit Architecture and cannot be created or modified outside of the project environment. while many more are stored in component libraries. if you create a family called "double-hung window" that includes types with several sizes.Using Families and the Family Editor One of the many advantages of using Revit Architecture is the ability to create your own families of components without having to learn a complex programming language. The basic walls system family. Walls. you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are created. and when and how to use it. for example. Introduction to Families Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an . foundation. An example is a door family hosted by a wall family.rfa extension. Revit Architecture has three types of families: ■ ■ ■ System Standard Component In-place System Families System families are pre-defined within Revit Architecture and comprise principle building components such as walls. Using the Family Editor. exceptions to this rule. such as a dome roof. trees. and furniture.

You do not have to carry the original family file along with the project. In the final exercise. you need to reload the family in the project to see the updated family. and also a standalone furniture family component. it is saved with the project. and when to use it. as well as the level of detail associated with that view. or 3D. Load Family command on the File menu. you learned about the different types of Revit Architecture families and when to use them. However. Families store all of the necessary geometry to display the two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) versions of particular objects. 2 On the File menu. You create in-place families only within the current project. In-place Families In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project. for example. you can drag it into the document window. or you can load it using the Load From Library. such as plan. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 4 Select the family file name and click Open. and the category that you use determines the component’s appearance and display control within the project. After the family has been loaded in the project. custom wall treatments. You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families. To add a family to your project. 3 Navigate to the library or location of the family. In this section. you learn about the Family Editor.The following illustration shows host-based window and door family components in a wall. if you change the original family. Introduction to the Family Editor You can use the Family Editor to create both real-life building components and graphical/annotation components. The following illustration shows a building model of the Pantheon without a roof and with an in-place roof family. Family element visibility can be dependent of your viewing direction. Introduction to the Family Editor | 477 . so they are useful for objects unique to that project. Adding a family to a project 1 Open or start a project. elevation. how to access it. Families are listed in the Project Browser under their respective component category.

and click Open. and then load it into the project. You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously.In this exercise. you can search the component library loaded on your local hard drive. consider checking the web library and other web resources. How to use the Family Editor You can access the Family Editor in several ways. you should create a new component family using one of the family templates as a starting point. When the family opens. how to access it. it should be available within the Type Selector. With Revit Architecture open. 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. you learn when to use the Family Editor. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with sub-category and entity visibility settings. it opens within the Family Editor. click File ➤ New ➤ Family. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch. There is a logical thought process that you should follow: 1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so. modify it as needed. 2 Define sub-categories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. 2 If there isn’t a component family loaded in the project. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. and the general procedure for creating a standard component family. To start a new family. and click Open. In this case. you should then try to find the component that most closely resembles it. If you find a close match. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry. you can click File ➤ Open. This will be apparent because the only Design Bar tab available is Family. 5 Finally. When to use the Family Editor During the design process. you will inevitably come to a point where you need a specific component for your design. you can double-click any file with an . 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. Within the Windows® environment. select the appropriate template. presume it is a bay window that you require. 4 If you can’t find the component you require. such as newsgroups. 478 | Chapter 15 About Families and the Family Editor . navigate to a family file.rfa extension and it will open Revit Architecture in the Family Editor. 3 Next. 9 Save the newly-defined family. Also consider any internal family libraries that may exist on the network. General procedure for creating a standard component family 1 Select the appropriate family template. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. if you have exhausted your external resources. open it in the Family Editor.

You create a furniture family. In addition.Creating Components in the Family Editor 16 In this tutorial. you create an in-place family. This allows you to create the family in the context of the current project. not within the Family Editor. you create it within the project file. In each lesson. you start with a simple door family and then move onto a window family. a lighting fixture. Using the installed templates. you learn how to create specific Revit Architecture 2008 families. 479 . and several annotation families. you learn how to create a different type of component. When you create an in-place family.

Step 4: Create the skeleton of the family by adding reference planes in all required views. Step 6: If the selected family template is a host-based template. tests at this point ensure that the skeleton of the family works correctly. Step 5: Dimension the reference planes and create parameters. There are four different methods to create Solid geometry and/or Void geometry in the Family Design Bar: Extrusion. Step 9: Create a single level of 2D and 3D geometry and lock it to the selected reference planes. Sweep: A sweep contains two sketches: a 2D Path that can be a closed or open. Revolve. Step 7: Add 2 or more types in the Family Types dialog with different values for the parameters. fill patterns. both of which must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. When you are in sketch mode. Step 3: Use the Element Properties dialog to define the reference planes that represent the origin of the family. Step 11: Test the family in a project environment. Subcategories are used to define visibility settings. The sketches must not touch or intersect each other. switch between the different host types. ■ ■ ■ When a void is placed on a solid. and pin those reference planes. Step 2: Define additional subcategories.Creating 3D Geometry All tools for creating 3D geometry can be accessed in the Family Design Bar. and test after each step. Note that no geometry is created. To quit the sketch mode. if required. ■ Extrusion: The sketch for an extrusion must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. There can be more than one closed loop in the sketch but they must not touch or intersect each other. The start and end angles of the revolution can be defined in the Revolution properties. line colors. You can unjoin solids or cancel the cutting of a void on a solid using commands available on the Tools toolbar: ■ ■ ■ ■ Join Geometry Unjoin Geometry Cut Geometry Don’t Cut Process Overview: Creating a Family Follow this best practice process for creating a family: Step 1: Select a family template. materials. Base and Top. if the family includes a host. 480 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Blend: A blend contains two sketches. Step 8: Test (flex) the family: switch between the types. Each sketch is set to a different height. click Finish Sketch on the Design bar. build geometry. you can no longer select or modify an element that is not in the sketch. and a Profile that must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. You can also join the geometry of different solids with the Join Geometry tool. it automatically cuts the solid. create different host types for testing purposes. The first line of the path defines the work plane for the profile. If you place the void before you add the solid. Blend. The sample below shows a start angle of 0° and an end angle of 180°. line patterns. Step 10: Repeat the flex procedure until reasonably complete. and Sweep. use the Cut Geometry tool to create the cut. Revolve: The sketch for a revolved object must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. lineweight settings. and export settings for selected geometry. continue to incrementally add reference planes. Solids and Voids are sketch based.

therefore new reference planes are required in plan and elevation views. click 7 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. NOTE The direction of the reference planes is not important. select both reference planes. 4 Navigate to Metric ➤ Templates. verify that Defines Origin is selected for the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. you define the skeleton of the family with reference planes in plan and elevation views before you create geometry. You should name reference planes to easily identify them in all views. 8 Using the same method. click to pin the reference planes. 2 Create a horizontal reference plane above the existing horizontal reference plane. click Ref Plane.rft. 5 While pressing CTRL. 1 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. The floor plan Ref. on the Edit toolbar. and click OK. 3 Create a vertical reference plane to the left of the existing vertical reference plane. and create one to the right. click Training Files. and click Open. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. . and create one below. The furniture family in this lesson has the shape of two boxes. and on the Options Bar. 6 Select the horizontal reference plane named Center (Front/Back). The intersection of these reference planes now defines the origin and the insertion point of the family in plan view. Select a family template 1 Close all open projects or families. You can control which reference planes are used as origin in the Element Properties dialog. Defining the Origin of a Family | 481 . You have created a new furniture family. verify that Other ➤ Defines Origin is selected. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog.Defining the Origin of a Family The intersection of 2 reference planes in a view defines the origin and the insertion point of a family in a project. and the family contains 2 reference planes in this floor plan. Level is open. Adding Reference Planes Next. select Metric Furniture.

482 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 6 In the Element Properties dialog.4 Click Modify. for Identity Data ➤ Name. on the Options Bar. click . You name reference planes so that you can identify them in different views. and click OK. enter Left. Name reference planes 5 Select the left reference plane and.

7 Using the same method. define the priorities of the reference planes you have created. Weak Reference Strong Reference Directional References According to these rules. If a reference plane defines the left edge of a family. The reference allows minor strength snapping. the strong reference is always captured first. The reference does not snap and shows no shape handles. 2 In the Element Properties dialog. and Back. Defining Priorities for Reference Planes Revit Architecture includes several predefined priorities that you can apply to a reference plane. for Other ➤ Is Reference. and click OK. name the other reference planes Right. Shape handles display if the reference plane is dimensioned with an instance parameter. Is Reference Value Not a Reference Definition The reference plane can be used in a family. click . select Left. Front. 1 Select the Left reference plane. The reference plane can be accessed in a project for alignment or dimensioning. The reference plane allows minor strength snapping. The reference plane can be accessed in a project for alignment or dimensioning. top). left. right. The priority is specified as the Is Reference value in the Element Properties dialog for the reference plane. Defining Priorities for Reference Planes | 483 . as shown. These behave the same as strong references. These are predefined system priorities that define a direction (for example. When you dimension a family and a strong and a weak reference are close together. use Left for the Is Reference value. but cannot be accessed in a project for alignment or dimensioning. and on the Options Bar. Shape handles display if the reference plane is dimensioned with an instance parameter.

Repeat for the other reference plane. For Group parameter under. enter Length. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. 6 Select the dimension line. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Click OK. and press ENTER. We want drive Length. for Name. enter 300mm. The dimension can have a fixed value or can be driven by a parameter.3 Using the same method. and press ENTER. 7 On the Options Bar. Front. Repeat for the other reference plane. click Dimension. 5 Click Modify. 1 Dimension the horizontal reference planes: ■ ■ ■ Select one of the new reference planes. select Add Parameter. and click above the planes to place the dimension. Dimensioning Reference Planes The dimension controls the behavior of the location of reference planes. Click the temporary dimension. 484 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . for Label. Width. Note that the Length parameter has been added to the dimension string. 2 Dimension the vertical reference planes: ■ ■ ■ Select one of the new reference planes. Click the temporary dimension. and Back). enter 750mm. 4 Select the Left reference plane and the Right reference plane. select Dimensions. and Height as parameters of the furniture family. specify the Is Reference value to correspond to the name of each reference plane (Right.

11 Click each of the vertical reference planes. and click the EQ symbol above the dimension. click Dimension. Add a multi-segment dimension 10 On the Design Bar.9 Using the same method. dimension the outer horizontal reference planes with the Width parameter. Dimensioning Reference Planes | 485 . 12 Using the same method. dimension the horizontal reference planes. click to place the dimension.

16 While pressing CTRL. Because the base planes should not be used as a reference for dimensions or alignments. 486 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and Base Back.Add base reference planes 13 On the Design Bar. for Other ➤ Is Reference. click the base reference planes. 18 Click the Base Left reference plane. and press ENTER. Base Right. click Ref Plane. but do not appear in the project. Now the reference planes can be used in the family. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. you need to specify the Is Reference values. 14 Create 2 horizontal reference planes and 2 vertical reference planes within the existing outer reference planes. enter 50mm for the left temporary dimension. Base Front. and click OK. 15 Using the Element Properties dialog. select Not a Reference. Position and dimension the 4 new reference planes with a fixed distance from the outer reference planes. name them Base Left. and click .

click Dimension. 20 On the Design Bar.19 Using the same method. position the remaining new reference planes. Dimensioning Reference Planes | 487 . and lock the dimension. 21 Select the Left and Base Left reference planes.

enter Base Bottom. and click 27 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . 488 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 25 Create 2 horizontal reference planes above the existing horizontal reference plane. click Ref Plane. Click OK. and lock the dimensions. 24 On the Design Bar. Make sure that you use consistent views to add dimensions. 26 Select the middle reference plane. double-click Front. Next. 28 Change the lower temporary dimension to 150mm. 23 In the Project Browser. By default. the family contains a level and a reference plane that defines the origin of the family in the elevation view. you add a reference plane and the Height parameter of the family in the Front view. You can dimension reference planes in plan. elevation. under Elevations. dimension all other reference planes for the base with the outer reference planes. Under Is Reference. The front view displays. select Not a Reference.22 Using the same method. For Identity Data ➤ Name. and section views.

29 Select the top reference plane and change the temporary dimension to 1450mm. 34 Lock the dimension. click Dimension. select Top. select Dimensions. For Identity Data ➤ Name. Dimensioning Reference Planes | 489 . 30 With the top reference plane still selected. 32 On the Design Bar.rfa. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save. Click OK. enter Height. The basic skeleton of the furniture family is completed. Under Group parameter under. and click to place the dimension. you create 2 types of the family in the Family Types dialog. 38 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. 37 Select the last dimension added. and save the file as Cabinet. on the Options Bar. for Label. for Name. Under Is Reference. select Add Parameter. Click OK. navigate to Training/Metric/Families. click 31 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . In the next exercise. 33 Select the lower reference plane and the Base Bottom reference plane. enter Top. 36 Click Modify. 35 Dimension the lower reference plane and the Top reference plane.

create a new type named 1000 x 2000 x 2800. double-click Ref. Family types allow you to predefine variations of a family. Best practice is to perform the first tests when the reference planes. clicking Apply adjusts the geometry without closing the dialog. NOTE In the Family Types dialog. 10 Click Apply. enter 1000. under Floor plans. For Length. 7 Click Apply. under Family Types. for Width. for Name. 6 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. for Height. the types defined in the family editor appear in the project. for Width. Note that the reference planes and the dimensions adjust according to the entered values. clicking OK adjusts the geometry and closes the dialog. enter 1800. When a family is loaded in a project. 11 Click OK. click in the titlebar of the Family Types dialog and drag it so that both the dialog and the drawing area are visible. enter 600 x 1500 x 1600. enter 1000. 3 In the Family Types dialog. click New. 5 Using the same method. but no geometry has been added. 4 In the Name dialog. enter 2000. enter 800. and click OK. 9 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Family Types. 2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Note that the name of the type you have created is displayed in the Name selection box at the top of the dialog. Family types are also a good way to test your family for correct behavior. create a new type named 800 x 1000 x 1800. NOTE In order to see changes applied to the reference planes. check the family as often as possible by switching between different types. Level. parameters. each type is represented with selected parameters. For Length. 490 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Managing Family Parameters and Family Types Parameters and their values can be managed in the Family Types dialog. 8 Using the same method. 1 In the Project Browser. and dimensions are specified. enter 2800. for Height.

The Family Editor offers multiple tools to set a work plane current: Define a work plane before adding geometry: Using the Work Plane dialog.Lock geometry to reference planes Locking sketch lines: Lines of a sketch can be locked to a reference plane in plan view to ensure that the edge of the solid is maintained if the dimension of the reference plane changes. Defining Work Planes Any solid/void form is created on a work plane. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. A work plane is a planar surface on which you can add sketch lines or others components. Lock geometry to reference planes | 491 . Level. edges of a solid form can also be locked to reference planes. You constrain the extrusions to the reference planes you created in previous exercises. In such an instance. Reference planes have the ability to define a work plane if they are named. Change a work plane for existing geometry: You can also use the Work Plane dialog to change the work plane for existing geometry in a drawing. you access the Work Plane dialog by clicking (Plane) on the Tools toolbar. Sketch an extrusion 1 In the Project Browser. This option will display the Work Plane dialog. and click Edit Work Plane on the Options bar. select the geometry. you use extrusions to model the solid geometry of a cabinet family. where you can define the plane. Creating Geometry In this lesson. there is an option on the Sketch tab of the Design Bar to Set Work Plane. double-click Ref. you only need to lock the top and bottom edges of the solid geometry. 2 On the Design Bar. Because you lock the planar edges in plan view. you can select a named reference plane or define a work plane by picking a plane or a line in the drawing area before you sketch geometry. Locking edges of solid/void forms: In elevation view. under Floor Plans. Make sure that you have set an appropriate work plane when you create 2D or 3D geometry in your family. In that case. Creating Solid Forms Use the simplest form to create solid geometry for a furniture family. create an extrusion from the plan view. Define a work plane in sketch mode: While in sketch mode.

4 Sketch the rectangle directly on the outer reference planes. the extrusion is changed accordingly in plan view. click . NOTE Only sketch directly on the desired reference planes when the situation is clearly arranged.3 On the Options Bar. An example of sketch lines drawn off of reference planes An example of sketch lines aligned on the desired reference plane 492 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 5 Lock each line of the sketch with the reference plane. with multiple reference planes or when you need to sketch with the Line tool. 6 On the Sketch tab. The sketch of the extrusion is now locked to the outer reference planes in plan view. When the setup is more complex. When the parameters Length and Width change. do not sketch directly on the reference planes. You can use the Align tool to align the sketch lines with the desired reference planes. click Finish Sketch.

10 Lock the dimension. and click the top edge of the extrusion to align to this reference plane. double-click Front. NOTE You can also drag the top edge of the solid geometry with the extrusion shape handle to the top reference plane and lock it. click (Align). under Elevations. Creating Solid Forms | 493 . 9 Select the Top reference plane as the alignment reference. 8 On the Options Bar.Adjust extrusion height 7 In the Project Browser.

20 Click Modify. 14 On the Options Bar. 15 Sketch the rectangle directly on the reference planes for the base (the inner reference planes). 494 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under Floor Plans. Level. click Finish Sketch. 18 On the Tools toolbar. The base should display only in elevation and 3D views. and lock all the sketch lines with the reference planes. under View Specific Display. 13 On the Design Bar. and click the top edge of the extrusion to align to this reference plane. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. click Visibility. double-click Ref. 21 Click the base geometry and on the Options Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click . 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 17 In the Project Browser. 19 Select the Base Bottom reference plane as the alignment reference. 23 Save the file. under Elevations. Create the base geometry 12 In the Project Browser. click . clear Plan/RCP. double-click Front. and click OK.11 Align the bottom of the extrusion to the Base Bottom reference plane and lock the dimension.

under Floor plans. Creating 2D Geometry | 495 . For the furniture family. and click OK. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. verify that the Line tool is active. click Family Types. but not in coarse. and click the locks to create the constraint. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. The lines are greyed out. the lines need to appear in medium and fine detail levels. select a different family type. and lock the geometry. 12 In the Family Types dialog. 9 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. clear Coarse. lines need to be added as symbolic illustration in plan views. select the base geometry and the furniture geometry. Click Modify. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. Test the family 11 On the Design Bar. They are view direction specific. For example. 13 Click OK. and lock the geometry. 14 On the View Control Bar. NOTE You have to exit Symbolic Line mode to lock the geometry. elevation. under Detail Levels. The lines display again. Symbolic lines: these can be added in plan. double-click Ref. 3 On the View Control Bar. select both lines and. 4 On the Design Bar. the software automatically creates the correct plan. 10 On the View Control Bar. they show only in views that are parallel to their creation view. Hiding the existing solid geometry before you create the symbolic lines helps you create the lines on the intersections of the reference planes. on the Options Bar.Creating 2D Geometry You can create families using 3D and 2D geometry. 6 Draw a line from the top left corner of the reference planes to the lower right corner. click Symbolic Lines. use model lines to display additional lines in the 3D view of the family. select the symbolic line. click Visibility. By design. 7 Draw a symbolic line from the lower left corner to the top right corner. 8 While pressing CTRL. and section views of the family. as the current displayed detail level is Coarse. 5 On the Options Bar. The family geometry should change each time you apply a different type. and click Apply. and section views. Model lines and symbolic lines can also be constrained to reference planes. elevation. 2 While pressing CTRL. There are 2 methods for adding 2D geometry available from the Family tab of the Design Bar: Model lines: these can be added in all views. When you use 3D geometry. 1 In the Project Browser. Level.

Before you save the family. 2 On the View Control Bar. 4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Save View. 496 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Loading a Family into a Project Families can be loaded directly from the family editor into selected open projects. 5 Save the file. 3 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. under 3D views. set a 3D view of the family current. This opens a predefined 3D view.The geometry of the furniture family is complete. The last view creates the thumbnail view of the family. Save a 3D view 1 In the Project Browser. double-click View 1.

Creating a Door Family In this lesson. you can create additional types with different dimensions in a project. and click to place them. drag each of the types into the drawing area. 11 Click Modify. The family is loaded into the new project. Create a project 6 On the Standard toolbar. Creating a Door Family | 497 . 8 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click (3D). You can press SPACE to change the orientation of the type.rfa 3D View: View 1 to switch to the family. All the family types you created are listed as options. 10 In the Project Browser. 13 Close all open projects or families. 7 Click Window menu ➤ Cabinet. If required. 12 On the Views toolbar. you create a custom door family based on the definition of a flush exterior door. expand Families ➤ Furniture ➤ Cabinet. you create new door types based on size and assign parameters respectively. this view is maintained when the family is opened again. After you create the door leaf as an extrusion.NOTE If you save the family in a 3D view different than the default {3D} view and if you have saved the orientation of your view. 9 In the Project Browser. click Load into Projects. click . under Cabinet.

2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family.You also learn how to constrain the door design by adding labelled dimensions to specify values for the door width.rft. Drawing the Door Plan View Components In this exercise. Create a new family based on the default door template 1 Close any open projects or families. and thickness. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Door. height. you draw the plan view components for the new door family. The door type has a variable height and width. click Training Files. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. 498 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

and represent the door opening profile. 5 On the Window menu. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. Labelled dimensions. The reference planes that display are part of the default door template. 10 On the Options Bar. Notice the four tiled views. click Symbolic Lines. Draw the door panel plan view representation 8 On the Design Bar. sketch a 1000 mm x 50 mm rectangle for the door leaf as shown. Drawing the Door Plan View Components | 499 . Level. 11 Starting at the door hinge point on the lower left corner of the door opening. 6 Maximize the window. click Tile. 9 In the Type Selector. are also displayed. click .4 On the View menu. part of the door properties. The door opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. Floor Plan: Ref. select Doors [projection]. 7 Enter ZF.

500 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 14 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the door panel to the bottom edge as shown.Dimension the door panel 12 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 13 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the door panel as shown.

a user can change the value of the Width parameter and all dimensions labelled with it change accordingly. select Width for Label. Because labelled dimensions are parameters. 17 On the Options Bar. 16 Select the vertical dimension that controls the door width. click Modify. NOTE This same label is applied to the dimension referencing the door opening.Add dimension labels to the door leaf 15 On the Design Bar. select Thickness for Label. Drawing the Door Plan View Components | 501 . 18 Select the horizontal dimension that references the door thickness. 19 On the Options Bar.

select Plan Swing [cut]. so it doesn’t visually interfere with the door swing location. click the down arrow button. When drawing an arc from center and end points. click Symbolic Lines. then you specify each end point. along with the witness line controls. 26 Select the upper left corner of the door leaf for the arc endpoint. TIP If the Arc from Center and End Points command is not visible on the Options Bar. and select the command from the menu. click . the arc is selected so you can see the arc center and each end point. 25 Select the upper right corner of the door opening for the arc start point. 23 On the Options Bar. 24 Enter SI. and select the intersection at the upper left corner of the door opening for the arc center point. In the image below. 22 In the Type selector. 21 On the Design Bar.Draw the door opening plan view arc 20 Select the dimension with the two EQ symbols and move it. as shown. 502 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you first specify the arc center.

click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.Add a reference plane for the exterior face of the door 27 Proceed to the next exercise. under Elevations. 6 On the Options Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Work Plane dialog. enter 50 mm for Depth. and click OK. click Lines. 7 Select the upper left corner of the door opening for the first corner of the rectangle. double-click Exterior. 1 In the Project Browser. “Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry” on page 503. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. and then select the lower right corner of the door opening for the second corner of the rectangle. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry In this exercise. select Reference Plane: Exterior for Name. you create the solid geometry of the door leaf with an extrusion. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry | 503 . 2 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. and click . under Specify a new Work Plane. 3 On the Design Bar.

TIP When you add the witness line to the exterior face of the extrusion. 10 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Project Browser under Elevations. then click to specify the dimension witness line. 11 Add a horizontal dimension from the exterior face of the door extrusion to the interior face of the door extrusion. click Finish Sketch.8 On the Design Bar. use the TAB key to toggle to the extrusion reference. click Dimension. 504 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . double-click Left.

and When cut in Plan/RCP. 17 On the Options Bar. 19 Under Detail Levels. click Modify. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry | 505 . and Fine are selected. verify that Coarse. click Visibility. Left/Right. 16 Select the door leaf extrusion. Specify the visibility of the door leaf in plan view 15 On the Design Bar. Medium.12 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. Level. select Thickness for Label. double-click Ref. select Front/Back. click Modify and select the dimension. 14 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and click OK. 13 On the Options Bar. under View Specific Display. and clear Plan/RCP.

The door leaf is assigned the new Oak Door material. Assign the Oak Door material to the door frame 14 Select the interior door frame extrusion. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click Materials. The solid geometry of the door is now complete. 6 Click OK. 4 In the Materials dialog. and click OK. Assigning Materials to the Door Components In this exercise. click OK. 19 Repeat the previous five steps for the exterior frame extrusion. 3 In the New Material dialog. 5 In the Material Library dialog. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Oak.Red/Stained.20 On the Options Bar. click Duplicate. select Panel for Subcategory. 9 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. select Oak Door for Name. under AccuRender. click OK. click for Texture. 2 In the Materials dialog. 506 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .No Gloss. and click OK. 7 In the Materials dialog. for Material. and click OK. click Modify. click 11 In the Materials dialog. Create a new material based on the existing red oak material 1 On the Settings menu. click OK. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Oak Door for Name. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. click 17 In the Materials dialog. It also defines its appearance when rendered. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. for Material. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. “Assigning Materials to the Door Components” on page 506. under Materials and Finishes. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. you assign a material to the door leaf. This material designation controls how it displays in shaded and hidden line views. select Oak Door. Assign the Oak Door material to the door leaf 8 Select the door leaf extrusion. click . under Name.Dark. click . and click OK. 13 On the Design Bar. click . 22 Proceed to the next exercise.

22 Zoom in on a door corner. 21 On the View Control Bar. Assigning Materials to the Door Components | 507 .The door frame is assigned the new Oak Door material. and select Shading with Edges. View the new door 20 In the Project Browser. Flex the door model 23 Zoom out to view the entire door. under Views (all). double-click View 1. under 3D Views. click the Model Graphics Style control. The Oak Door material is now assigned to the door leaf and door frame.

Enter 1000 mm for Width. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. you define new door types based on the door model that you have created. 508 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click New. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Family Types. under Family Types. 24 On the Design Bar. Enter 1500 mm for Width. Under Other. and click OK. 2 In the Family Types dialog. Try to move the dialog off to the side so you can still see the door family next to it. Click Apply. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 In the Name dialog. Click Apply. enter 75 mm for Frame Width. This allows you to apply changes made in the dialog and see how the new door reacts. 26 Return the door parameters to their original values. enter 2000 mm for Height. “Defining New Door Types” on page 508 Defining New Door Types In this exercise. 27 Click OK. Under Other. Define new door types with various heights and widths 1 On the Design Bar. enter 125 mm for Frame Width. enter 2500 mm for Height. enter 925 x 2000mm for Name. click Family Types. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. In the Family Types dialog. 25 In the Family Types dialog. you ensure it adjusts to the changes it may encounter once loaded into a project. Notice the door geometry adapts to the new dimension values.Flexing the new family is an important part of the design process. By flexing the new component.

11 Click OK. enter 2134 mm for Height. enter 2100 mm for Height. Enter 750 mm for Width. Use the default wall selection in the Type Selector. select it. 17 Under Create new.rte. click Save. Enter 1220 mm for Width. You now have three new door types defined within your door family. 13 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new door family with the name. 6 In the Name dialog. click Training Files. enter 2000 mm for Height.rfa. Enter 925 mm for Width.4 In the Family Types dialog. Click Apply. Define the second new door type. 15 In the New Project dialog. 7 In the Family Types dialog. enter 1220 x 2134mm for Name. Training Door. 20 In the Open dialog. Define the third new door type. 22 Draw a wall segment 8000mm long. under Template file. 19 On the Options Bar. click New.rfa. click Wall. click New ➤ Project. and click OK. Load the new door family into a new project 14 On the File menu. Training Door. click Door. Place new door types in the project 21 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Name dialog. navigate to the location where you saved the door family. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click OK. click New. 8 Under Family Types. and click Open. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Browse. and click OK. 16 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Defining New Door Types | 509 . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 12 On the File menu. enter 750 x 2100mm for Name. Click Apply. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. select Project. click Load. 10 In the Family Types dialog. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Click Apply. 5 Under Family Types.

510 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . 29 Add this door to the center of the wall as shown.23 On the View toolbar. 25 On the Design Bar. 26 In the Type Selector. click the Model Graphics Style control. 24 On the View Control Bar. select Training Door : 750 x 2100mm. and select Shading with Edges. 27 Add the door to the left side of the wall as shown. click Door. 28 In the Type Selector. select Training Door : 925 x 2000mm.

you assign new dimension values to the window to create new types within the window family. You create the window frame. Finally. Creating a Door Family. default sill height. 32 You can close all files without saving. select Training Door : 1220 x 2134mm. Creating a Window Family | 511 . This completes the lesson.30 In the Type Selector. and specify values for the window width. and mullion offset. You now have three new flush exterior doors based on the new door family prototype. height. you create a custom window family based on the definition of a fixed rectangular window with nine lights. Creating a Window Family In this lesson. and create the window sash as a sweep. You then assign parameters to the window family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the nine-light prototype. glazing and mullions as extrusions. 31 Add the third door type to the right side of the wall as shown.

this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Window. and the height of the top and bottom row of lights is adjustable. you specify the parameters for the new window family. When you add labels to dimensions. The label name. Height and Default Sill Height. these specific type parameters are adjustable once the window is part of a project. click New ➤ Family. also one of the window properties. 6 Two dimension strings display with their labels. 2 On the File menu. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog.Specifying the New Window Parameters In this exercise. equally spaced vertical mullions. The window type has a variable height and width. 5 Enter ZF. 512 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Training Files. 4 Maximize the Elevation: Exterior view. is one of the type parameters.rft. Create a new family based on the default window template 1 Close any open projects or families.

and click Apply. This is the starting point for the new window. 8 In the Family Types dialog. click . The profile is swept along the path to create the solid geometry. Move the dialog off to the side so you can see the window opening. and click Apply. “Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry” on page 513. Creating sweep geometry requires first sketching the sweep path.” and it is done to avoid conflicts and to ensure that all model geometry adjusts to changes as designed. Create a sweep path for the window frame solid geometry 1 On the Design Bar.Modify the new window type height and width parameters 7 On the Design Bar. 10 Click OK. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry In this exercise. you create the solid geometry of the window frame with a sweep. Enter 1800 mm for Width. Change the height and width values again. Snap the cursor to each corner. 4 On the Options Bar. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 513 . 3 On the Design Bar. Click Apply. 5 Sketch a rectangle to represent the sweep path starting at the upper left corner of the opening and ending at the lower right corner. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. 9 Enter 1000 mm for Height and 2000 mm for Width. click Family Types. click Lines. then sketching the sweep profile. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Notice how the window opening adapts to the changing dimension values. click Sketch 2D Path. enter 1300 mm for Height. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. This process is called “flexing the model. 2 On the Design Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.

7 On the Design Bar. and click Open View. Add a reference plane for the sweep profile 8 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. click Ref Plane. click . 14 Pick the exterior wall face so that a reference line is offset 50 mm to the left of the exterior wall face as shown. The red dot indicates the intersection of the sweep path and the profile plane. and select 1:10.6 Click the locks so the sweep is locked to the opening size. select Elevation: Right. click Finish Path. 10 On the View Control Bar. and specify an offset of 50 mm. click the Scale control. 514 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 11 Zoom in on the red dot in the middle of the wall. click Sketch Profile. 9 In the Go To View dialog. 12 On the Design Bar.

21 On the Options Bar. 25 Below the red dot. 24 On the Options Bar. click Dimension. 19 Drag the value control off to the side as shown. and select the dimension. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. click Modify. 16 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 17 Add a dimension between the exterior wall face and the new reference plane. Sketch the window frame profile 23 On the Design Bar. click . select Prefer: Wall faces. sketch the frame profile approximately as shown. enter Sash for the Name. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 515 . select Chain and click . 18 On the Design Bar.15 On the Design Bar. and select the reference plane. 20 On the Design Bar. click Lines. click Modify.

click it to constrain the left edge of the frame to the interior face. 26 On the Design Bar. the frame profile should extend beyond the edges of the wall. 516 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . However. 28 Select the left edge of the frame section. click it to constrain the frame to the exterior wall face.NOTE When you sketch the frame profile. 27 Select the right edge of the frame section. Precise dimensions are assigned to the frame profile in subsequent steps. When the lock displays. click Modify. and drag it to the interior face of the wall. the exact dimensions are not critical. and drag it to the exterior face of the wall. When the lock displays.

Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 517 . as shown. click it to lock the line to the reference plane. 31 Add a vertical dimension of 40 mm to the left side of the frame and another vertical dimension of 20 mm to the right side of the frame. TIP After adding the dimension. 30 On the Design Bar. and specify the dimension value. select the line you want to move. click Modify.29 Select the short line parallel and to the right of the Sash reference plane. click Dimension. Drag it to the left and align it with the Sash reference plane. When the lock displays.

Modify each dimension if necessary. 34 On the Tools toolbar. click the lock to constrain the present value. 33 Select the 20 mm dimension. 37 On the Design Bar. click Finish Profile. When the lock displays. TIP If you don’t see the lock icon. click Finish Sweep. Lock the alignment when the lock icon displays. Align the new profile to the window opening edge 32 Select the 40 mm dimension. this is the top of the window opening. 518 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . When the lock displays. zoom out until it displays. 36 On the Design Bar. click the lock to constrain the present value. 35 Select the horizontal reference plane that intersects the red dot. click . Next. select the top horizontal line of the frame profile.

Pick the sash profile lines 6 Place the cursor over the left side of the frame. Chain of walls or lines. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 39 In the Project Browser.45 mm for Depth. and click OK. 4 On the Design Bar. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry In this exercise. If necessary. expand 3D Views. under Elevations. 40 Proceed to the next exercise.The window frame profile is swept around the window opening. under Specify a new Work Plane. 2 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. press TAB to cycle through the selection options. and select Lock. click Lines. and enter . select Reference Plane: Sash for Name. Specify the window sash extrusion parameters 1 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry | 519 . double-click Exterior. and select the option. click . 5 On the Options Bar. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. 38 In the Project Browser. spin the model so you can see the interior of the frame. under Views (all). “Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry” on page 519. and double-click View 1. you create the solid geometry of the window sash with an extrusion.

You specify a negative offset value to indicate an extrusion direction inside of the window frame. click Finish Sketch.50 mm for Offset. 520 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 8 Specify the upper left inside corner of the window frame for the first corner of the rectangle.The entire sash outline is selected. Draw offset extrusion lines 7 On the Options Bar. ■ ■ Enter . 9 On the Design Bar. and then specify the lower right inside corner for the second corner of the rectangle. ■ Click . set the following options: Click . and lock icons display on each line.

you create the solid geometry of the window glass with an extrusion. The window sash extrusion is now complete. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. “Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry” on page 521. under Elevations. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry In this exercise. under 3D Views. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 521 . double-click Right. double-click View 1. Notice the sash is aligned with the Sash reference plane. 11 In the Project Browser. 12 Proceed to the next exercise.10 In the Project Browser.

double-click Right. click Ref Plane. 2 On the Design Bar.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. and enter 30 mm for Offset. Add a reference plane to specify the glass work plane 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Select the left edge of the sash so that a vertical reference plane is added 30 mm to the right. 3 On the Options Bar. under Elevations. click . as shown. 522 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

under Elevations. click Modify. double-click Exterior. 17 Select each of the sash extrusion lines to create the glass boundary. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 523 . 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and select Lock. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. 14 In the Work Plane dialog. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. enter -12 mm for Depth. click Lines. click . click Set Work Plane. click Dimension. 13 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Project Browser. enter Glazing for the Name instance parameter.5 On the Design Bar. under Identity Data. 15 On the Design Bar. and click OK. Pick lines to define the glass extrusion 12 On the Design Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. click . and click OK. 7 On the Design Bar. 16 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. 8 Select the reference plane. 6 Add a horizontal dimension of 30 mm between the left edge of the sash and the reference plane.

under Identity Data. specify Glass for the Subcategory instance parameter.18 On the Design Bar. After the family is loaded into a project. NOTE Assigning subcategories to model elements is important. and glass 19 In the Project Browser. click Modify. you can control subcategory visual style using the Objects Styles dialog. 21 On the Options Bar. sash. 23 On the Design Bar. double-click Right. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. 524 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 20 Select the glass extrusion. click . 22 In the Element Properties dialog. View the window model with frame. under Elevations.

Move the Family Types dialog off to the side so you can see the window model. enter 1500 mm for Height. Flex the window model 25 On the Design Bar. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early.24 In the Project Browser. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 525 . For example. make sure the window frame stretched with the opening and that the glass extrusion remains attached to the interior edge of the sash. click Family Types. under 3D Views. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. 26 In the Family Types dialog. Click Apply. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. double-click View 1. Enter 1500 mm for Width. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. NOTE After flexing the model. Under Other.

28 On the Edit toolbar. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. under Elevations. Add reference planes to specify the location of the new window mullion centerlines 1 In the Project Browser. click Dimension. NOTE When you draw each reference plane. “Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry” on page 526. the exact location is not critical. 4 On the Design Bar. 526 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry In this exercise.27 Click Cancel. 3 Add two horizontal and two vertical reference planes inside of the window opening to approximate the mullion centerline locations as shown. you create the solid geometry of the window mullions based on reference planes and extrusions. click to return the window to its original dimensions. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. double-click Exterior. 2 On the Design Bar. click Ref Plane.

8 Select the dimension on the upper-right that references the top two horizontal reference planes. Do not be concerned with dimension values. as shown. 6 Add a dimension between the bottom of the window opening (bottom reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane above it. 5 Add a dimension between the top of the window opening (top reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane below it. as shown.Add a multi-segmented dimension referencing all of the vertical reference planes except the center (Left/Right) as shown. click the EQ symbol to make the dimension segments equal. click Modify. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 527 . Add a mullion offset family parameter 7 On the Design Bar. Do not be concerned with dimension values. After adding the dimension.

Under Parameter Data. click Family Types. and click OK. 12 In the Family Types dialog. you may want to drag the dimension value as shown. select <Add parameter. enter 350 mm for Mullion Offset.. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. select Dimensions. TIP Due to the length of the dimension label. select Family parameter. Notice the dimension value becomes editable. Select Instance. 528 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog.. 11 On the Design Bar. Under Group parameter under.> for Label. Click OK. under Dimensions. enter Mullion Offset for Name.9 On the Options Bar. 13 Select the horizontal reference plane second from the bottom.

Create the vertical mullion extrusions 19 On the Design Bar. Watch the Status Bar to be sure that the lines are snapping to the sash. click Modify. 16 Select the dimension on the lower-right. move the dimension value as shown. 20 On the Design Bar. and enter 350 mm as the new value. under Specify a new Work Plane. select Mullion Offset for Label. As you did before. 15 On the Design Bar. 24 Sketch a rectangle centered on the left vertical mullion reference plane approximately as shown. and click . select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. Do not be concerned with precise dimensions.14 Click the dimension value. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 21 In the Work Plane dialog. enter 14 mm for Depth. and click OK. 23 On the Options Bar. click Lines. 17 On the Options Bar. click Set Work Plane. it is critical that the short horizontal lines align with the horizontal edges of the sash. However. 18 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 529 . 22 On the Design Bar.

Click the EQ symbol to make both horizontal dimensions equal. Move the dimension values as shown.After you complete the sketch. and to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. 25 Click both of the locks so the mullion adapts to changes in window height. click Dimension. 27 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane centered between the vertical mullion extrusion sketch lines. 26 On the Design Bar. notice lock icons display on the interior horizontal edges of the sash. 530 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 531 . select Dimensions. enter Mullion Width for Name. Move the Mullion Width value to the left as shown. click Modify. 29 On the Design Bar. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. Under Parameter Data. Click OK. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. select <Add parameter> for Label. Select Type. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select Family parameter.28 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. and place it above the dimension you placed in the previous steps. Under Group parameter under. 30 On the Options Bar.

Select the dimension. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion on the left. 532 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Remember. 35 In the Family Types dialog. This is changed in later steps. select Mullion Width for Label. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. and on the Options Bar. Specify the mullion width parameter 34 On the Design Bar. and click Apply. ■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint.32 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the right vertical reference plane as shown. 33 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. Add a dimension between the left and right mullion edges. ■ ■ Do not be concerned with the value of the mullion width. Move the dialog off to the side so you can see the window in the drawing area. enter 40 mm for Mullion Width. click Family Types.

Under Other. NOTE After flexing the model. and the mullions stretch with the new window height. Flex the window model 36 In the Family Types dialog. In this case. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. 37 Click Cancel. 41 In the Work Plane dialog. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. you should pay close attention to the new mullions and make sure they remain centered. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and aligned with the sash edge. click to return the window to its original dimensions. Enter 1500 mm for Width. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. Click Apply. click Set Work Plane. and click OK. 40 On the Design Bar. evenly spaced. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. 38 On the Edit toolbar. enter 1500 mm for Height. or undoing the same. under Specify a new Work Plane. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 533 . Sketch the horizontal mullion extrusions 39 On the Design Bar.Notice the mullions remain centered and equally spaced on the reference planes. select Reference Plane : Glazing for Name.

click Dimension. 46 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane at the center of the mullion. click Modify. as shown. 534 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 48 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. and then click the lock icons to lock the left and right edges to the edge of the sash. 47 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. click Lines. click . and move the EQ values off to each side as shown. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. 44 Sketch a rectangle centered on the upper horizontal mullion reference plane approximately as shown. 45 On the Design Bar. Notice the Depth value on the Options Bar remains at the previously specified value. 49 On the Design Bar. Do not be concerned with the dimension value. 43 On the Options Bar.42 On the Design Bar. and then to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. Click the EQ symbol to make both vertical dimensions equal.

Remember. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion you just completed. and on the Options Bar.50 On the Options Bar. select Mullion Width for Label. select Mullion Width for Label. ■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. Move the dimension value as shown. Add a dimension between the upper and lower mullion edges. 51 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the lower horizontal reference plane as shown. click Finish Sketch. Select the dimension. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 535 . NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. ■ ■ 52 On the Design Bar.

The horizontal mullion extrusions are now complete. click Join Geometry. double-click View 1. under 3D Views. spin the model to get a good view of the mullions. 54 Select the horizontal mullions. 55 In the Project Browser. 536 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and select the vertical mullions. If necessary. Join the mullion geometry 53 On the Tools menu.

Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 537 . Enter 1500 mm for Width. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. 59 Click Cancel. Under Other. 57 On the Design Bar. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters and the mullions stretch with the new window height. 58 In the Family Types dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 1500 mm for Height. you can still see the window. Click Apply.Notice the mullion extrusions are joined. so when you open the Family Types dialog. click Family Types. Flex the window model 56 Adjust the location of the window model within the drawing area.

61 Proceed to the next exercise. you assign materials to the frame. click Duplicate. and click OK. 8 On the View Control Bar. Assign the Pine Frame material to the frame. TIP Hold the CTRL key down as you select the sweep and various extrusions. and select Shading with Edges. click to return the window to its original dimensions. 2 In the Materials dialog.60 On the Edit toolbar. 4 In the Materials dialog. click the Model Graphics Style control. No Gloss. Create a new material based on the existing yellow pine material 1 On the Settings menu. 538 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . sash. and mullions 7 In the Project Browser. Assigning Materials to the Window Components In this exercise. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. select Stained. 3 In the New Material dialog. click for Texture. and mullions that you want to display in renderings of the new window. the sash. double-click Exterior. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Pine. under Elevations. under AccuRender. and click OK. sash. click Materials. and the mullions. “Assigning Materials to the Window Components” on page 538. Dark. Yellow/. 6 In the Materials dialog. click OK. 5 In the Material Library dialog. enter Pine Frame for Name. 9 Select the window frame sweep.

Medium. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). select Frame/Mullion for Subcategory.10 On the Options Bar. 12 Under Materials and Finishes. Modify the glass visibility 19 In the Project Browser under Elevations. clear the other view options. click Visibility. and click OK. select Pine Frame for Name. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click View 1. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click for Material. under View Specific Display. click . 13 In the Materials dialog. under View Specific Display. verify that Coarse. 20 Select the glass extrusion. Medium. 24 In the Project Browser. 15 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. Assigning Materials to the Window Components | 539 . double-click Right. The window frame is assigned the new Pine Frame material. click Modify. and Fine are selected. 23 Under Detail Levels. verify that Coarse. under Graphics. and Fine are selected. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. under Identity Data. 16 Under Detail Levels. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. and click OK. under 3D Views. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). 21 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 18 On the Design Bar. select Edit for Visibility.

26 Proceed to the next exercise. You then create multiple window types that will be available to the user after the family is loaded into a project. 540 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . “Defining New Window Types” on page 540. mullions. and glass display their assigned materials. sash.25 Zoom in on a window corner. You begin by adding a formula to the mullion offset parameter to specify horizontal divisions of one third the overall height of the window. you define new window types based on the window model that you just created. The window frame. Defining New Window Types In this exercise.

3 In the Family Types dialog. Add a mullion offset formula to the family type 1 Zoom to fit and move the window model off the side of the drawing area so it will be visible after you open the Family Types dialog. 2 On the Design Bar.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click Family Types. it is also a good idea to flex the model after a new formula is applied. and click Apply. verify that 2000 mm is specified for Height. The horizontal mullions are now spaced apart at one third the height of the window. Defining New Window Types | 541 . Flex the window model 4 In addition to flexing the model after the addition or modification of model geometry. enter Height/3 in the Formula column for Mullion Offset. and click Apply. In the Family Types dialog.

under Family Types. and click Apply.The window height is doubled. Enter 1250 mm for Height. Click Apply. 542 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click OK. click New. 5 In the Family Types dialog. enter 2500 w x 1250mm h for Name. verify that the following parameter values are specified: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2500 mm for Width. Define new window types with various heights and widths 6 In the Family Types dialog. 8 In the Family Types dialog. 7 In the Name dialog. but the one third height spacing is maintained in the horizontal mullions. enter 1000 mm for Height.

click Window. 14 In the Family Types dialog. Click Apply. click New. enter 2600 w x 1300mm h for Name. 10 In the Name dialog. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 1800 mm for Width. and click OK. Training Window. Enter 1300 mm for Height. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2600 mm for Width. 15 On the File menu. click to start a new project based on your default template.rfa. click New. Defining New Window Types | 543 .9 Under Family Types. Click OK. Enter 1500 mm for Height. Click Apply. Load the new window family into a new project 17 On the Standard toolbar. You now have three new window types defined within your window family. 11 In the Family Types dialog. 13 In the Name dialog. click Load. 16 Navigate to the location of your choice and save the new window family with the name. enter 1800 w x 1500mm h for Name and click OK. Define the final window type 12 Under Family Types. 19 On the Options Bar. click Save. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

and click Open. 22 Draw a generic wall segment 12000 mm long. clear Tag on Placement.rfa file. 34 On the View toolbar. 27 In the Type Selector. 29 In the Type Selector. navigate to the location of your Training Window. 35 On the View Control Bar. and select Shading with Edges. click Thin Lines. 33 Zoom in on the center window. select Training Window :2600 w x 1300mm h. This is because you set the visibility values to display when cut in plan/RCP. click Modify. click . select Training Window : 2500 w x 1250mm h. click Window.20 In the Open dialog. 26 Add the window to the left side of the wall. click the Model Graphics Style control. 544 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 23 On the Design Bar. Place new window types in the project 21 On the Design Bar. select Training Window : 1800 w x 1500mm h. 31 On the Design Bar. select it. 32 On the View menu. Notice the detail that displays. 28 Add this window to the center of the wall. click Wall. 25 In the Type Selector. 30 Add the third window to the right side of the wall. 24 On the Options Bar.

This allows you to drive lineweights. Creating solid geometry: Based on the 4 ways to create solid geometry in Revit Architecture (Solid Extrusion. Planning a Complex Model Family Before you start to create a complex model family. Creating a Complex Model Family In the following exercises.You have three new fixed nine-light windows based on a new window family prototype. Linework: You can create model lines and symbolic lines in a family. Instance parameter means. where symbolic lines are view direction specific: they show only in views that are parallel to the view where they have been created. This completes the Creating a Window Family lesson. you plan. ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a Complex Model Family | 545 . The window family includes nested families for the outer sill and uses shared parameters for evaluation purposes. Solid Sweep) you can decide in which view you start to create your solid geometry. Parameters: You should carefully define the parameters in a family. where type parameters drive the geometry for each family type. Model lines are displayed in every view. sketch. line patterns. a parameter drives geometry in a family. elevation. Basically. You can also switch on/off selected subcategories in a project. and symbolic lines are usually assigned to selected Subcategories. and materials of the subcategories. you should sketch the design of the family and make notes of the desired behavior: ■ Subcategories: Solid geometry. line colors. Solid Revolve. model lines. and create a complex window family with a complex opening. Solid geometry: Use solid geometry as often as possible to represent a family because it automatically gives you the correct plan. Formulas between parameters drive the behavior of parts of the family. the easiest way to create a window frame is to create an extrusion including two rectangles for the frame edges in an elevation view of the family. and section views of a family. that each family in a project can have a different value for an instance parameter. Solid Blend. For example. Revit Architecture allows you to specify a parameter as instance or type parameter. A large number of parameters reduce the performance of the family.

546 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . A Family parameter does only appear in the family itself. and should account for instances when either of the casements is toggled off.■ Scheduling/exporting parameters: Revit Architecture differs between different parameter types. Section. ■ Visibility settings: If specific visibility settings are required for selected geometry or linework. Level of detail: Revit Architecture allows you specify the visibility of each solid form and line geometry for the Detail Levels Coarse. By category: The solid material gets its material from the selected category or subcategory in a project. Various parameters drive the behavior of the family. where a Shared parameter can appear in schedule and tags and can be exported to ODBC. Medium and Fine. you should define different widths for each of the casements. Assigning material: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Directly: The solid geometry in the family has material explicitly assigned. Detail Level View Plan Coarse Medium Fine Section Elevation Additionally. By family type: Each type of the family can have different material assignments for selected solids in the family. Sketching the requirements The window family should be modelled with different detail levels in Plan. and Elevation views. By instance: Each single instance of the family can have different material assignments for selected solids in the family. you can use a parameter with the Parameter Data Type Yes / No.

The family editor is opened with a new window family. One test scenario consists in switching between the wall types with different thicknesses to check whether the constraints work correctly. The family template uses a wall as host. navigate to Metric ➤ Templates.rft. select Metric Window. create a second wall type with a different wall thickness so that you can test the family. Selecting a Family Template | 547 . and click Open. you open a template that you use as the basis for the complex window family.The window contains the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A: Insertion depth B: Frame depth C: Frame width D: Sash width E: Center post width F: Wall offset G: Left width H: Right width I: Width J: Wall offset top K: Top frame height L: Bottom frame height M: Height Outer sill: ■ ■ ■ Fixed front height: 30mm Fixed back height: 50mm Fixed offset: 30mm ■ Glass fixed width: 20mm Selecting a Family Template In this exercise. 1 Close all open projects or families. You should test your family often as you incrementally build geometry in the next steps. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. click Training Files.

7 In the Name dialog.4 Select the wall. This requires that the standard rectangular opening be deleted and replaced with voids cut out from the default wall. for Is Reference. 10 Click OK 3 times. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. Verify that Defines Origin is selected. enter Insertion Edge. select Wall Closure. under Other. click Duplicate. select Basic Wall : Wall 1. 7 Create a vertical reference plane to the right of the Left reference plane. so you model the new opening first. select Defines Origin. Prepare the centered reference planes 1 Select the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. click Edit. click . . 5 Select the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. 8 Create a vertical reference plane to the left of the Right reference plane. Create reference planes for the opening 6 On the Design Bar. Under Other. accept the default name. click Edit/New. for Construction ➤ Structure. ■ ■ ■ ■ For Identity Data ➤ Name. 548 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . This means that the exterior wall layers that have wraps assigned will end at this reference plane. In the Type Selector. 3 Select the horizontal reference plane. 11 Switch back to the previous wall settings: ■ ■ Select the wall. enter 400. . click 5 In the Element Properties dialog. for Name. select Weak Reference. for Structure ➤ Thickness. TIP Press TAB until the reference plane is highlighted. refer to the command line to verify what is selected. Click OK. in the Edit toolbar. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ Under Construction. and click OK. 9 Click Modify. and on the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. click Ref Plane. Creating the Skeleton for a Complex Wall Opening The window contains a more complex wall opening than a standard rectangular opening. 9 In the Edit Assembly dialog. and click OK. click 2 In the Element Properties dialog. and click .

16 Dimension the Exterior and Insertion Edge horizontal reference planes. refer to the status bar to verify what is selected. Creating the Skeleton for a Complex Wall Opening | 549 . Next. This parameter is defined as an instance parameter. enter Insertion Depth. select Add Parameter. Click OK. dimension the vertical reference planes. 20 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. For Group parameter under.10 Select the first reference plane you created. because each inserted value should have a different insertion depth. enter Wall Offset Left. name the other new reference plane Wall Offset Right. 23 Click Modify. By extending the reference pane. 12 Using the same method. click Dimension. 19 Select the dimension. click Dimension. for Identity Data ➤ Name. Dimension vertical reference planes 21 On the Design Bar. for Name. for the temporary dimension. The horizontal reference plane defines the inner edge and the new vertical reference planes define the left and right edges of the wall offset for the opening. 14 Using the same method. enter 75. select Constraints. and click OK. 22 Dimension the Left and Wall Offset Left vertical reference planes. 18 Select the Exterior reference plane. drag the Interior horizontal reference plane to the left side. and select Instance. and click . 17 Click Modify. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. TIP Press TAB until the reference plane is highlighted. use the blue circle grip to drag the left edge of the reference plane to line up with the left side of the Insertion Edge reference plane. Dimension horizontal reference planes 15 On the Design Bar. 13 Select the Exterior horizontal reference plane on the top wall edge. on the Options Bar. for Label. you can more easily select it because it doesn’t overlap with other elements in the drawing.

for Name. 36 Dimension the Head and Wall Offset Top reference planes. and click . enter 100. for the temporary dimension. For Group parameter under. for Label. The skeleton for the opening is complete. 35 On the Design Bar. select Construction. select Construction. for Identity Data ➤ Name. for Label. enter Wall Offset Top. enter Wall Offset Top. select Add Parameter. for Label. 39 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. enter 100. and click OK. dimension the Right and Wall Offset Right reference planes. on the Options Bar. 37 Select the Wall Offset Top reference plane. you apply the same method to reference planes in an elevation view. for Name. on the Options Bar. 26 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. Next. Click OK. 30 On the Design Bar. select Wall Offset. 550 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 27 Using the same method. click Ref Plane. Dimension reference planes in elevation 29 In the Project Browser. 33 Select the new reference plane. for the temporary dimension. select Add Parameter. 28 Select the dimension. The reference planes and parameters for the plan view are defined.24 Select the Wall Offset Left reference plane. 32 Click Modify. Click OK. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. 38 Select the dimension. and press ENTER. double-click Exterior. enter Wall Offset. on the Options Bar. under Elevations. 25 Select the dimension. click Dimension. 31 Create a horizontal reference plane below the Head reference plane. For Group parameter under.

and Wall Offset Right reference planes. double-click Ref. NOTE Zoom in as necessary so that the rectangle does not snap to reference planes. Modelling a Complex Wall Opening | 551 . 4 On the Design Bar.40 Save the file as Casement Window. under Floor Plans. and sketch the extrusion as shown. under Specify a new Work Plane. 8 Using the same method. click . 3 In the Work Plane dialog. and click OK. Modelling a Complex Wall Opening You model the opening with voids that are cut from the wall geometry. click (Plane). lock the other sketch lines to the Insertion Edge. Level. 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Options Bar. select the top edge of the sketch. Wall Offset Left. and lock the alignment. 6 On the Tools toolbar. 2 On the Tools toolbar.rfa. click (Align). click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. for Name. select Reference Plane : Sill. 7 Select the Exterior reference plane.

and lock the alignment. Also. click (3D). and press DELETE. the voids need to be cut from the wall geometry. under Elevations. double-click Exterior. align and constrain the top and bottom edges of the other void to the Head and Sill reference planes. and lock the alignment.9 On the Design Bar. click (Align). In order to use the voids as a new opening. NOTE Create the void extrusion directly below the one you just created. 552 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Finish Sketch. 16 On the Views toolbar. 13 Align the top edge of the smaller void to the Wall Offset Top reference plane. 10 Using the same method. 11 In the Project Browser. Right. 12 On the Tools toolbar. and Left reference planes. Lock the sketch lines to the Insertion Edge. you need to delete the standard rectangular opening cut. create and constrain a void extrusion for the inner part of the opening as shown. 17 Select the left vertical edge of the default opening (Opening Cut). 14 Align the bottom edge of the smaller void to the Sill reference plane. 15 Using the same method. Interior.

20 Using the same method. you control correct behavior of the new wall opening by changing the wall offset parameters. 18 On the Tools toolbar. Next. click (Cut Geometry). and then select the wall geometry. cut the second void from the wall. 19 Select the void.The opening in the wall is deleted. Modelling a Complex Wall Opening | 553 . The first void is cut from the wall.

6 Dimension the Left and Frame Left vertical reference planes. 554 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 22 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Construction ➤ Wall Offset Top.Change wall offset parameters 21 On the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Design Bar. For Other ➤ Is Reference. For Wall Offset. 3 Select the reference plane. enter 50mm. double-click Ref. enter 50mm. 7 Select the Frame Left reference plane. under Floor Plans. enter Frame Left. 2 Create a vertical reference plane to the right of the Wall Offset Left reference plane. enter 100mm. click Dimension. You can also test the opening by flexing the wall types and thicknesses. Creating Window Frame Geometry The reference planes and parameters for the window frame are defined in the plan and exterior elevation views. Click OK. click Family Types. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . 8 Create a vertical reference plane to the left of the Wall Offset Right reference plane. for the temporary dimension. Note that the opening has changed correctly. Level. and click . 9 Select the reference plane. select Not a Reference. For Identity Data ➤ Name. Click OK.

Creating Window Frame Geometry | 555 . 14 Select the right dimension. on the Options Bar. for Label. 12 Dimension the Right and Frame Right vertical reference planes. 11 On the Design Bar. 16 Select the left dimension. select Add Parameter. enter 100mm. 13 Select the Frame Right reference plane. for the temporary dimension. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. select Construction. enter Frame Width. For Other ➤ Is Reference. Click OK. for Label. create a horizontal reference plane below the Insertion Edge reference plane. 17 Using the same method. on the Options Bar. enter Frame Right. and create a Frame Depth type parameter dimension as shown. select Frame Width. name it Frame Interior. select Not a Reference.10 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Identity Data ➤ Name. for Name. Click OK. For Group parameter under. click Dimension.

The exact vertical position of the reference planes is not important.18 Create 2 more vertical reference planes to the left of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. dimension the planes at 120mm. name the reference planes Center Post Left and Center Post Right. NOTE The positioning of the center post will be specified later in the exercise. 19 Using the same method used previously. 556 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and create a Center Post Width type parameter dimension.

For Group parameter under. 27 Using the same method. on the Options Bar. enter 150mm. 26 Select the Frame Bottom reference plane. under Elevations. Click OK. enter Frame Height Top. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. select Add Parameter. For Identity Data ➤ Name. click Dimension. For Group parameter under. select Not a Reference. create a horizontal reference plane below the Wall Offset Top reference plane. select Construction. for Label. For Other ➤ Is Reference. enter Frame Height Bottom. enter Frame Bottom. for the temporary dimension. 25 Dimension the Sill and Frame Bottom horizontal reference planes. Click OK. 24 On the Design Bar. double-click Exterior. for Label. 21 Create a horizontal reference plane above the Sill reference plane. Creating Window Frame Geometry | 557 . 28 Select the lower dimension.Create parameters in elevation 20 In the Project Browser. 22 Select the reference plane. 30 Select the other dimension. select Construction. and click 23 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . select Add Parameter. name it Frame Top. Click OK. and dimension the Head and Frame Top reference planes at 150mm. 29 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. on the Options Bar.

Under Dimensions. for Frame Depth. click New. For Frame Width. 558 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . For Frame Width. enter 50mm. 33 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. enter 1500mm. for Wall Offset Top. for Insertion Depth. Family types allow you to set different values for parameters and to save this state as a specific type of the window family. enter 100mm. For Center Post Width. for Insertion Depth. enter 100mm. 34 Under Family Types. enter 80mm. For Wall Offset. A family type manages type parameters only. enter 80mm. Under Construction. enter 80mm. add 2 window types with different parameters to check whether the parameters work correctly. enter 100mm. For Frame Height Bottom. 36 Under Family Types. 37 In the Name dialog. click New. instance parameters can be changed on an instance level for each inserted window instance. Under Construction. 38 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. enter 2000mm. click Family Types. 35 In the Name dialog. enter 100mm. Create family types 32 On the Design Bar. enter 70mm. enter 60mm. for Height. enter 50mm. enter 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. For Width. For Frame Height Top. for Wall Offset Top. For Wall Offset. enter 50mm. enter 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400 and Click OK. Additional values for new parameters will be set continuously after each reasonable step of completeness.The skeleton of the window frame is complete. Before you model the frame geometry. Under Other. You create 2 family types for the Casement Window family. and click OK.

Under Dimensions. 46 Align all sketched edges to the reference planes. Frame Left. under Specify a new Work Plane. Note that the reference planes adjust to the new dimensions. Rectangle position in view Left Right Outside (larger rectangle) Lock to reference planes Frame Top. enter 1400mm. for Name. Under Other. enter 1500mm. and lock the alignments to create a constraint for all edges as shown. for Frame Depth. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 44 On the Options Bar. select Reference Plane : Frame Interior. 45 On the Tools toolbar. enter 120mm. For Width. and a third rectangle outside the intersection of the reference planes. Center Post Left. enter 120mm. Center Post Right. NOTE Create 3 rectangles: One on the left. 39 Click Apply. and sketch the extrusion with 3 rectangles as shown. click (Plane). 40 Under Name. Frame Bottom. 42 In the Work Plane dialog. and click OK. Head. Frame Right. select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. Frame Top. and click OK. enter 80mm. For Frame Height Bottom. Sill. enter 70mm. one on the right. Model frame geometry 41 On the Tools toolbar.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Frame Height Top. Frame Bottom. click (Align). 43 On the Design Bar. for Height. For Center Post Width. Right. click . NOTE Refer to the following table for information on the alignment reference planes. Left Creating Window Frame Geometry | 559 .

55 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. Align the bottom edge of the extrusion to the Frame Interior reference plane. 56 Click OK twice. 48 In the Project Browser. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. and lock the alignment. clear Coarse. Level. click Edit. and click 54 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. click Finish Sketch. under Floor Plans. 57 On the View Control Bar. click (3D). Align the top edge of the extrusion to the Insertion Edge reference plane. 53 Select the extrusion solid geometry. . click 50 Align edges: ■ ■ (Align). clear Plan/RCP. The window frame is complete. Frame material will be assigned later in the tutorial.47 On the Design Bar. double-click Ref. Under Detail Levels. 52 On the Views toolbar. 560 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and lock the alignment. 49 On the Tools toolbar. For Graphics ➤ Visibility/Graphics Overrides. select Frame/Mullion. 51 Click Modify.

Level. 2 On the View Control Bar. click (Thin Lines) to work with heavier lineweights. select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. 5 Select the leftmost reference plane you just created. Defining the Window Sash Parameters | 561 . under Floor Plans. and click Apply. Changing the scale makes it easier to work in detail. double-click Ref. enter Sash Left Left. Defining the Window Sash Parameters You use known modelling procedures to create the geometry for the window sash. 3 On the Views toolbar. you model each sash separately. click Family Types. For Identity Data ➤ Name. 60 Select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. under Name.Test the family again 58 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 59 In the Family Types dialog. click Scale ➤ 1:10. 4 Create 4 vertical reference planes as shown. and click 6 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ . However. because the visibility settings are different for the left and right sashes. Define parameters in plan view 1 In the Project Browser.

18 On the Design Bar. select Not a Reference. 9 Select the left dimension. 15 Click Modify. specify the properties for the remaining new reference planes. add parameters to the remaining dimensions. on the Options Bar.■ ■ For Other ➤ Is Reference. Click OK. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. specify each dimension as 50mm. Click OK. for Label. select Sash Width. and click 17 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . on the Options Bar. under Elevations. enter Sash Bottom. for Label. enter Sash Width. For Identity Data ➤ Name. 7 Using the same method. click Dimension. select Add Parameter. 12 Using the same method. Define parameters in elevation view 13 In the Project Browser. select Not a Reference. 11 Select the next dimension. For Group parameter under. select Construction. 16 Select the reference plane. 562 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . working from left to right: Reference Plane 2 3 4 Properties Name: Sash Left Right Is Reference value: Not a Reference Name: Sash Right Left Is Reference value: Not a Reference Name: Sash Right Right Is Reference value: Not a Reference 8 Dimension the reference planes with adjacent reference planes for the window frame as shown. Click OK. For Other ➤ Is Reference. double-click Exterior. You can drag dimension text to the left or right side using the Drag Text grip. 14 Create a horizontal reference plane above the Frame Bottom reference plane.

select both dimensions. 26 Under Construction. 28 For Name. for the temporary dimension. and sketch 2 rectangles to form the right sash extrusion as shown. 23 While pressing CTRL. select Sash Width. and lock the alignment to create a constraint for all edges as shown. Note that the reference planes adjust to the new dimension. Specify it as Not a Reference. click Family Types. on the Options Bar. create a horizontal reference plane below the Frame Top reference plane: ■ ■ ■ Name it Sash Top. Create solid extrusions 29 On the Design Bar. Defining the Window Sash Parameters | 563 . The skeleton of the window sash is complete. 20 Select the Sash Bottom reference plane. for Label. 24 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. extend the 2 window types with different values for the new parameter to check whether the parameter work correctly. enter 70mm.19 Dimension the Frame Bottom and Sash Bottom reference planes. 21 Using the same method. 32 Align all sketched edges to the reference planes. and click OK. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click (Align). for Sash Width. enter 50mm. 25 For Name. enter 50mm. 27 Click Apply. select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. 30 On the Options Bar. Dimension the Frame Top and Sash Top reference planes. select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. 31 On the Tools toolbar. for the temporary dimension. 22 Select the Sash Top reference plane. click . Before you model the sash geometry.

Rectangle position in view Outside Inside Lock to reference planes Frame Top. Sash Right Right. Sash Right Left. enter 1500. and lock the alignment. for Extents ➤ View Range. Sash Bottom. Align the top edge of the extrusion to the Insertion Edge reference plane. 37 In the View Range dialog. Level. Level floor plan view to align the edges as you did for the right sash. 42 Switch back to the Ref. click Finish Sketch. double-click Ref. 34 In the Project Browser. Frame Bottom. NOTE Modifying the cut plane offset value allows you to see the sash extrusion in the view. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. Sash Top. Frame Right. Align the bottom edge of the extrusion to the Frame Interior reference plane. click 39 Align edges: ■ ■ (Align). for Cut plane ➤ Offset. 40 Click Modify. 35 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. and click OK twice. 33 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 564 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 41 Using the same method.NOTE Refer to the following table for information on the alignment reference planes. and lock the alignment. switch to the Exterior Elevation view and create the solid extrusion for the left sash. 43 On the Views toolbar. Center Post Right. click Edit. 38 On the Tools toolbar. under Floor Plans. click (3D).

select Construction. select the 2 extrusions. click Add parameter. click Family Types.44 While pressing CTRL. 2 In the Element Properties dialog. 46 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. click the rectangular button on the right side. and click . For Group Parameter under. clear Coarse. select Frame/Mullion. enter Sash Right. Under Detail Levels. For Graphics ➤ Visibility. and click 45 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ . click Edit. 6 Using the same method. Defining Visibility Parameters You add visibility parameters so that you can display the left and right sashes separately. 47 Click OK twice. clear Plan/RCP. 7 On the Design Bar. create a visibility parameter for the left sash named Sash Left. 1 Select the right solid geometry of the window sash. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. note the parameters you have just created with checkboxes in the Value column. Defining Visibility Parameters | 565 . for Graphics ➤ Visible. 5 Click OK 3 times. For Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. 3 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog.

For Other ➤ Is Reference. 3 Select the reference plane. and Glass Axis Horizontal. enter Glass Axis. Click OK. 566 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . clear Sash Left. select Not a Reference. 5 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 7 Click EQ to center the reference plane for the glass axis between the reference planes for the window frame. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . and name them Glass Axis Right. 9 Create 3 more reference planes as shown. and click OK. the geometry is only greyed out if the visibility parameter is not assigned. Glass Axis. For Identity Data ➤ Name. not aligned to reference planes. 10 Under Construction. The glass is located in the center of the frame / sash with a fixed thickness of 20mm. This is because the glass width and height will be extended to the window frame if the sash is switched off. double-click Ref. double-click Exterior. under Elevations. NOTE Any 3D geometry assigned to a Yes/No parameter is still visible in the family editor. Level. 1 In the Project Browser. and click Apply. 8 In the Project Browser. Creating Reference Planes for the Glass Geometry The glass geometry will be dimensioned directly in the sketch. select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. dimension the Insertion Edge. Glass Axis Left. 2 Create a horizontal reference plane between the Insertion Edge and Frame Interior reference planes. under Floor Plans. 9 Select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. and Frame Interior reference planes. 6 Using one dimension string.Test the family 8 For Name.

Sketch the right glass extrusion 1 On the Tools toolbar. under Specify a new Work Plane. 4 On the Options Bar. You create parameters that define the dimensions of the glass geometry. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click . Creating the Glass Geometry | 567 . This centers the glass reference planes between the window sashes. you use extrusions to create the glass for the complex window family. 2 In the Work Plane dialog. click (Plane). Creating the Glass Geometry In this exercise. select Reference Plane : Glass Axis. and sketch the right glass extrusion as shown.10 For each of the new reference planes. create EQ dimensions with the adjacent sash reference planes. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. for Name. and click OK.

dimension the top and the bottom of the sketch.Dimension the sketch 5 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. For Group Parameter under. select Other. Click OK. on the Options Bar. 13 Using the same method. 10 Dimension the left edge and right edge of the sketch. 12 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. click Dimension. click Dimension. for Label. 7 Click EQ. enter Glass Length Right. 6 Using one dimension string. select Add Parameter. 568 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 11 Select the dimension line and. the Glass Axis Right reference plane. and the right edge of the sketch. dimension the left edge of the sketch. 8 Using the same method. dimension the top and bottom edge of the sketch. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and create a Glass Height Right parameter.

create the glass geometry for the left sash with the new parameters Glass Height Left and Glass Length Left. 18 Click OK twice.0. 17 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. clear Plan/RCP. For Extrusion Start. Under Detail Levels. enter -10. click (3D). clear Coarse. 21 On the Views toolbar.0. Assign properties 15 Select the glass geometry. For Identity Data ➤ Subcategory.14 On the Design Bar. Create the left glass extrusion 19 Using the same method. For Graphics ➤ Visibility. click Edit. and click 16 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ . click Finish Sketch. Creating the Glass Geometry | 569 . select Glass. For Constraints ➤ Extrusion End. 20 Assign the same Element properties to the left extrusion that you assigned to the right. enter 10.

used to control families in many ways. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading With Edges. They can also be used to control Yes/No parameters. Formulas are typed directly into the Family Types dialog box. Formulas can use logic such as IF statements (IF the width is 1000. However. x raised to the power of y log sqrt(Value) sin cos tan asin acos atan exp abs 570 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . if you can build your family without using formulas. The formulas in the following chapters of this tutorial should give you mainly an impression of how complex formulas can be set. where all of the parameters for a family are listed. set the height to 2000) as well as mathematical expressions. you should do it. as it will minimize performance hits. Creating Formulas to Define Width Formulas are one of the many powerful aspects of Revit Architecture Families .22 On the View Control Bar. Expressions for formulas Mathematical Function Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Exponentiation Logarithm Square Root Sine Cosine Tangent Arcsine Arccosine Arctangent e raised to an x power Absolute Value Expression + * / x^y.

OR IF ( OR ( A = 1 . 2'-6". Click OK. NOTE Do not dimension the right sash using the same method. 3 ) Simple IF .11 Samples for formulas Standard Width . B = 3 ) . 3 Dimension the Frame Left and Center Post Left reference planes. for Label. 9 In the Family Types dialog. For Group parameter under. enter Width Sash Left. Level."A" is less than or equal to "B": IF ( NOT ( A > B ) . 5 Select the Center Post Left reference plane.6. 2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. The width of the right sash will be determined using formulas. double-click Ref. 6 Select the dimension. y = 2). 3' . enter Width Sash Right. enter 1000. on the Options Bar. Creating Formulas to Define Width | 571 . IF ( Length < 55' . 3'-0" ) Simple IF . For Type of Parameter. under Floor Plans. 5' . 3 ) Yes/No Controlling the state of a Yes/No parameters A with a next Yes/No parameter B: Not (B) Position the center post 1 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Design Bar. <result-if-false>) IF ( Length < 35' . 8 . select Add Parameter. 8' ) ) ) IF . 3 ) Multiple IF IF ( Length< 35' . click Add. IF ( Length < 45' . <result-if-true>.AND IF ( AND (x = 1 . select Dimensions. for the temporary dimension. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. 2' 6" . 8 . select Length.(2*30) Simple IF IF ( <condition>. 4 Click Modify. under Parameters. 8 . click Family Types. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. click Dimension. This would overconstrain the family.

14 Adjust the parameters: ■ For Width Sash Left.Frame Height Bottom). and click OK. Click OK. Width Sash Right). click Family Types.2 * Sash Width). Width Sash Left). In the Formula row for Glass Height Left. ■ Click Apply. (Width Sash Left . and press ENTER.2 * Sash Width). enter if(Sash Left. 19 In the Family Types dialog. 11 In the Family Types dialog. enter the formula to get the calculated width: (Width . select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. Frame Width. The value for Width Sash Right is updated by the formula entered previously. select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200.Center Post Width 12 Press ENTER. The value for Width Sash Right is updated by the formula entered previously. enter 400. enter formulas: ■ Under Other. You can test the formulas by switching between the different window types in the Family Types dialog. ■ ■ ■ 20 Click OK. enter if(Sash Right. 15 For Name.Frame Height Bottom . for Dimensions ➤ Width Sash Right ➤ Formula. and Center Post Width. Test the family 13 Under Name.Frame Height Top . select Dimensions. select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. and cannot be changed in the Family Types dialog.(Frame Width * 2) .Frame Height Top Frame Height Bottom .Width Sash Left) . enter if(Sash Left. Define glass width and length 18 On the Design Bar. (Height . (Height . The value for Width Sash Right is now calculated dependent on the values for Width. 572 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Frame Height Top . 16 Adjust the parameters: ■ For Width Sash Left. and press ENTER. Width Sash Left.2 * Sash Width). ■ Click Apply. enter 1200.2 * Sash Width). The glass dimensions are now dependent on the visibility settings for the window sashes. In the Formula row for Glass Length Left. In the Formula row for Glass Height Right. enter if(Sash Right.Frame Height Top . Height . (Width Sash Right .Frame Height Bottom). 17 For Name. the new value is 560. Height . the new value is 880.■ ■ For Group Parameter under. in the Formula row for Glass Length Right. The value is greyed out.

select Reference Plane : Insertion Edge. select Elevation Swing [projection]. double-click Exterior. 2 In the Object Styles dialog. 7 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. clear Chain. 5 On the Tools toolbar. note the Elevation Swing subcategory. 3 Click OK. 6 In the Work Plane dialog. under Category. under Elevations. expand Windows. for Name. and click OK. click (Plane). 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. Creating Elevation Lines | 573 . 4 In the Project Browser. click Symbolic Lines. 8 In the Type Selector. They should be placed on a selected subcategory. and lock all alignment constraints. 10 Create single symbolic lines as shown. 9 On the Options Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane.Creating Elevation Lines The best method to create the elevation lines for the sashes is to create them in the exterior elevation view.

and glass. you create material parameters for the frame. select the rectangular button on the right side. while pressing CTRL. and click OK three times. 13 While pressing CTRL. click . and click OK. 15 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. and click the button on the right side of the column.11 In the drawing area. expand accurender ➤ Solid Colors. 18 Save the file. under Detail Levels. Next. click in the Material column. 2 In the Object Styles dialog. for Visible. under Graphics. and select Whites. sash. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and click . and on the Options Bar. 4 In the New Material dialog. When you assign default materials in a family. When the family is added to a project and the subcategory does not exist in the project. for Name. 6 In the Material Library dialog. select the 2 symbolic lines on the left side. under AccuRender. for Windows ➤ Frame/Mullion. The default material is assigned to the Frame/Mullion category. 17 Using the same method. Material parameters override the material assignment of the subcategories in the Object Styles dialog.Matte. Assigning Default Materials You can assign a default material for each subcategory. click Visibility. 3 In the Materials dialog. for Name. enter Window Frame. check whether the solid geometry has the correct subcategory assigned. select Sash Right. 12 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. Assign a default material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. the object styles settings of the project define the default material. select Default. and click Duplicate. under Category. 5 In the Materials dialog. If the subcategory already exists in the project. this subcategory is added to the project and has the material assignment from the family. Creating Material Parameters Material parameters for selected solid geometry make the family more flexible in terms of materials assignments for different window types. associate the symbolic lines on the right side with the Sash Left family parameter. 16 Click OK twice. 7 Select Cool. select all symbolic lines. unless the default value is < By Category >. and click OK. 574 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . clear Coarse.

When the family is loaded into a project. Note the new Material parameters under Material and Finishes. for Materials and Finishes ➤ Material. The Back and Center (Left/Right) reference planes define the origin of the family. navigate to Metric/Families/Windows/m_Concrete Sill. 4 In the Project Browser. . 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click 3 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. Level. You can then model parts of the family separately from the main family model. Creating Nested Families | 575 . double-click Ref. select Materials and Finishes. If this parameter is defined as shared. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. In this lesson. You can override it on a type level. a Width type parameter. and a fixed dimension for the sill overhang. 9 Click OK. For Group parameter under. click the rectangular button on the right side. Creating Sill Families There are 2 window sill families available in the training folders. enter Frame. you learn how to import window sill families into the window family and associate parameters of the nested families to the main family. Concrete sill family 1 Close all open projects or families. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open.1 On the Views toolbar. a Depth instance parameter. parameters of nested families can be associated with parameters of the main family. click Training Files. create 2 material parameters named Sash and Glass. 6 Click OK three times. and click Open. 4 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. Using family type parameters in the main family. Creating Nested Families Families can be imported into families. The default value is By Category. 10 Save the file. which nests them. 2 Select the solid geometry of the window frame.rfa. click Family Types. click Add parameter. click (3D). the solid geometry has the material that is assigned to its subcategory in the Object Styles dialog. 8 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. you can switch between imported families of the same category. The concrete sill family consists of a solid extrusion. 7 Using the same method. Open the families and explore the design of them. and associate the sash and glass solid geometry with the respective parameter.

has a fixed material Window Sill Concrete assigned. navigate to Metric/Families/Windows/m_Metal Sill. double-click Left. Metal sill family 9 Close all open projects or families. 10 Click File menu ➤ Open. and click . 8 Click OK.5 In the Project Browser.rfa. The sill is placed on a subcategory Window Sill. and is visible only in detail level Fine. 576 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under Elevations. click Training Files. 6 In the Project Browser. The Bottom reference plane defines the origin of the family. under 3D views. The elevation view shows reference planes with fixed dimensions. and click . and click Open. 12 Select the solid geometry. The sketch lines of the extrusion are locked to all exterior reference planes. 11 In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click View 1. 7 Select the solid geometry.

Reference Planes.The sill is placed on a subcategory Window Sill.rfa. You open the main family first. navigate to Casement Window. The concrete sill family is now loaded into the Window family. 10 Click OK. 6 Click OK. 11 Click Window menu ➤ Tile.rfa. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog.rfa is cleared.rfa. 8 On the Design Bar. and Origins are as in the concrete sill family.rfa. Loading Sill Families into the Window Family Families opened in the family editor can be loaded directly into other families. The category of a family can be changed under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. select Casement Window. and click Open. has a fixed material Window Sill Metal assigned. 13 Click OK. and then load families into the casement window family you have created.rfa is cleared. and is visible only in detail level Fine. 3 Using the same method. 2 In the Open dialog. The metal sill family is now loaded into the Window family. and verify that m_Metal Sill.rfa -3D View: View1. and verify thatm_Concrete Sill. select Casement Window. Load the concrete sill 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 9 In the Load into Projects dialog. Parameters. 4 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Load into Projects. open m_Concrete Sill. Load the metal sill 7 Click Window menu ➤ Metal Sill. click Load into Projects. Both sill families were created with the Generic Model family template and changed to a window family. Loading Sill Families into the Window Family | 577 .

select Construction. 578 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Length. click Add. double-click Concrete Sill.rfa.rfa and m_Concrete Sill. under Parameters. 2 In the Family Types dialog. Associate the parameter to nested families 6 In the Project Browser. click Family Types. enter Sill Length. Click OK. For Type of Parameter. Creating a Length Parameter The sill length needs to be equivalent to the exterior width of the window family. For Group parameter under. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog. As both sill families have been defined as Window families. they appear in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Windows. 13 Maximize Casement Window. Create the parameter 1 On the Design Bar. enter Width . 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. 5 Click OK. under Families ➤ Windows ➤ Concrete Sill. in the Formula column.12 Close and save m_Metal Sill.rfa. for Construction ➤ Sill Length. you create a parameter that determines the true sill length in the window family.2* Wall Offset.

you place the concrete sill in the project. Place the family 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. 9 Click OK twice. 2 On the View Control Bar. and click to place it. aligning it to reference planes in both plan and elevation views. and click . associate the Length parameter of the Metal Sill family. Level. click the rectangular button on the right side. 11 Select the Center (Left/Right) reference plane of the window family. click (Align). 9 Click OK twice. select Sill Length. Align the sill 10 On the Tools toolbar. double-click Ref. and lock the alignment. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. select the hidden Center (Left/Right) reference plan of the Sill family. Placing the Sill Family In this exercise. 8 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. 5 Click Modify. The sill family needs to be positioned and aligned in plan and elevation views. Associate an instance parameter 6 Select the solid geometry of the concrete sill. for Dimensions ➤ Length. The Width instance parameter of the nested families now has the same value as the Insertion Depth parameter of the window family. under Floor Plans. expand Families ➤ Windows ➤ Concrete Sill.7 In the Type Properties dialog. for Dimensions ➤ Width. 4 Drag Concrete Sill into the drawing area. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. click the rectangular button on the right side. 10 Using the same method. The Length type parameter of the nested families now has the same value as the calculated value of the Sill Length parameter of the window family. select Insertion Depth. Placing the Sill Family | 579 .

18 On the View Control Bar. 13 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. click (Align). and lock the alignment. 16 Select the Sill reference plane of the window family. 580 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . align the lower horizontal edge of the sill to the Insertion Edge reference plane of the Window family. and lock the alignment.12 Using the same method. click and spin the wall. 15 On the Tools toolbar. 17 In the Project Browser. 14 On the View Control Bar. The sill is placed in the desired position. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. Creating a Shared Parameter In order to switch the sill from concrete to metal on an instance level. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. double-click View 1. you add a Sill Type parameter. align the bottom edge of the sill family. double-click Left. TIP If the sill does not display. under Elevations.

select Constraints. for Constraints ➤ Sill Type (default). 3 In the Save As dialog. and click Select. 3 Click Apply. 2 In the Family Types dialog. under Parameter Type. for Name. you must define the parameter as a shared parameter. Testing Nested Families You can test the correct behavior of the nested families directly in the window family. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. enter Sill Type. If the family is then loaded into a project. navigate to Training. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click Family Types. 4 Under File name. and click OK. 13 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select Sill Type. 10 Click OK 3 times. for Label. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Name. 12 In the Family Types dialog. click Shared parameter. the parameter appears on the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog in the available fields list. click New. click Add. click Create.To display the custom parameter in a schedule. Testing Nested Families | 581 . and click Save. Associate the parameter to geometry 17 In the drawing area. Add the parameter to a family 11 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. The metal sill replaces the concrete sill. Create the shared parameter 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. select <Family Type>. enter Windows. under Parameters. select Windows. click New. Note that the last created Shared Parameter file has been automatically opened. 2 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. under Groups. 1 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 16 Click OK twice. click OK. under Parameters. 9 In the Select Category dialog. Under Type of Parameter. select the Concrete Sill family. 18 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. select Metal Sill. and select Instance. click Family Types. for Group parameter under. enter Training Shared Parameter.

6 In the Type Selector. click . This creates a new project with the default template. check all views at all levels of detail. Test windows and sills 1 On the Standard toolbar. Testing the Family in a Project Environment Finally.rfa -3D View: View 1. click and spin the wall. 5 On the Design Bar. 3 On the Design Bar.4 Click OK. and create a horizontal wall. click the Window tool. 7 Using the same method. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Load into Projects. use best practice to test the window in multiple wall thicknesses in the project environment. click the Wall tool. select Casement Window : 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200 and place the window in the wall. 8 On the Views toolbar. 2 Click Window menu ➤ Casement Window. 582 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click (3D). click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 9 In the View Control Bar. insert a Casement Window : 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400 in the wall. TIP If the sill does not display.

Height. add the fields Mark. you create a custom furniture family based on the definition of a rolltop desk. You begin by creating the desktop. You then assign parameters to the furniture family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the prototype. Create a window schedule 12 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. select Metal Sill. drawer base. for Constraints ➤ Sill Type. and click OK. Creating a Furniture Family In this lesson. 14 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and Sill Type to the Scheduled fields list. enter Window Schedule with Sills. and click OK. Note that the window sill has changed. select Windows. Sill Type is now displayed in the schedule table. Click OK. Creating a Furniture Family | 583 . rolltop. and drawers as extrusions. 13 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Under Name. Width. and click .10 Select the smaller window.

rft. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. 5 On the View menu. click Ref Plane. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters In this exercise. The reference planes that display are part of the default furniture template. click New ➤ Family. 2 On the File menu. Floor Plan: Ref. one above and one below the existing horizontal centerline reference plane as shown. 584 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . their exact location is not critical. you add reference planes and specify the parameters for the new rolltop desk furniture family. 7 Draw two horizontal reference planes. and specify values for the furniture length and depth. Draw additional horizontal and vertical reference planes 6 On the Design Bar.Finally. 4 Maximize the view. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. they represent the furniture centerline axes. you assign new dimension values to the furniture to create new types within the furniture family. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Furniture. Create a new family based on the default furniture template 1 Close all open projects or families. NOTE When you draw the reference planes. Level. click Training Files.

add a horizontal dimension string beginning at the left reference plane. 10 Near the bottom of the drawing area. as shown. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 585 . one to the left and one to the right of the existing vertical centerline reference plane as shown. proceeding to the centerline reference plane. click Dimension.8 Draw two vertical reference planes. and ending at the right reference plane. Dimension the reference planes 9 On the Design Bar.

It should reference the left reference plane and the right reference plane as shown. 14 Change the horizontal dimension to 2000 mm. 13 Select the left reference plane. 586 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Click the EQ symbol to make the segments equal. click Modify. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 Add an overall horizontal dimension underneath the dimension you just added.

Click the EQ symbol to make both segments equal. as shown. proceeding to the centerline reference plane.15 On the Design Bar. 16 On the right side of the drawing area. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 587 . 17 To the right of the dimension you just created. as shown. add a vertical dimension string beginning at the upper reference plane. add an overall vertical dimension from the upper reference plane to the lower reference plane. click Dimension. and ending at the lower reference plane.

horizontal reference plane. click Modify. select each reference plane and drag the extents to the new position. 19 Select the upper. 21 On the Design Bar. 22 Clean up the extents of the reference planes and the dimension witness lines as shown. 20 Change the vertical dimension to 1000 mm. TIP To do this.18 On the Design Bar. Afterwards. 588 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Modify. select each dimension and drag the witness line controls as needed.

Select Type.. 27 On the Options Bar. select <Add parameter. 25 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select <Add parameter. 24 On the Options Bar. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 589 . For Group parameter under. specify the following: ■ Under Parameter type. select Family parameter. Click OK.> for Label... select Family parameter.Add length and depth family parameters 23 Select the 2000 mm dimension. Under Parameter Data. select Dimensions. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. enter Length for Name. 26 Select the 1000 mm dimension.. 28 In the Parameter Properties dialog.> for Label.

When the solid geometry is snapped to the reference planes.■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. Select Type. click Family Types. enter Depth for Name. so when you open the Family Types dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. For Group parameter under. select Dimensions. 31 In the Family Types dialog. Notice the reference planes adapt to the new dimension parameters. 590 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you can still see the model. Click Apply. These reference planes will be the skeleton that you snap the solid geometry to. enter 3000 mm for Length. Therefore. Click OK. you should flex the design now to ensure the reference planes and labelled dimensions adapt to changes as expected. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. 30 On the Design Bar. it will also adapt to the same changes. Flex the design 29 Adjust the location of the reference planes within the drawing area.

9 Move the cursor over one of the symbolic lines. the symbolic line thickness was modified for training purposes. NOTE In the image below. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. 5 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Options Bar. Click OK. 8 On the Options Bar. Your lines may have a lighter weight. select Level: Ref. and enter 100 mm for Depth. click Set Work Plane. and click OK. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry | 591 . press TAB until the chain of lines is offered as a selection option. you create the solid geometry of the desktop with an extrusion. and click to select all four symbolic lines. “Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry” on page 591. under Specify a new Work Plane. Click Apply. Create the desktop using an extrusion 1 On the Design Bar. click . 3 Select the upper left reference plane intersection for the first corner of the rectangle. 7 On the Design Bar. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 6 In the Work Plane dialog. 4 On the Design Bar. click Lines.32 In the Family Types dialog. Level for Name. click . Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry In this exercise. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Symbolic Lines. and then select the lower right reference plane intersection for the second corner of the rectangle. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. enter 2000 mm for Length.

15 Move the cursor over the bottom edge of the desktop. click Finish Sketch. under Elevations.10 On the Design Bar. double-click Front. click Modify. 592 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and select the top edge. and select the bottom edge. Move the desktop up 12 On the Design Bar. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. 11 In the Project Browser. click Dimension. The desktop extrusion extends 100 mm above the reference level. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. 14 Drag the top edge of the desktop upward until the temporary dimension value is 750 mm. Add height and thickness dimensions 17 On the Design Bar. 16 Drag the bottom edge of the desktop up until the desktop is 100 mm thick. 13 Move the cursor over the top edge of the desktop.

Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry | 593 . 24 Select the 100 mm dimension. enter Thickness for Name. 25 On the Options Bar. 21 Select the 750 mm dimension. select Family parameter. For Group parameter under. Under Parameter Data. select Dimensions. Under Parameter Data. as shown. click Modify. For Group parameter under. 26 n the Parameter Properties dialog.> for Label. Select Type... specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. select <Add parameter. select Dimensions. 22 On the Options Bar. Add height and thickness family parameters 20 On the Design Bar. Click OK.> for Label. select Family parameter.. 23 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select <Add parameter. Click OK. enter Height for Name. Select Type.18 Add a vertical dimension from the reference level to the top edge of the desktop.. click Modify. 27 On the Design Bar. 19 Add a vertical dimension from the bottom of the desktop to the top edge.

and click to locate a new vertical reference plane offset 100 mm to the right. and enter 100 mm for Offset. so when you open the Family Types dialog. Notice the desk top adapts to the new dimension parameters. 594 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you can still see the model. 31 In the Family Types dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Enter 750 mm for Height. Click Apply. 30 In the Family Types dialog. under Floor Plans. click . click Family Types. click Ref Plane. Offset two reference planes to locate the first drawer base corner 1 In the Project Browser. Click OK. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry In this exercise. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. “Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry” on page 594.Flex the design 28 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area. and click Apply. Enter 1200 mm for Height. 2 On the Design Bar. you create the solid geometry of the desk drawer base. enter 4000 mm for Length. and click Apply. 3 On the Options Bar. double-click Ref. 4 Move the cursor over the left vertical reference plane. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. and click Apply. 29 On the Design Bar. enter 2000 mm for Length. Level. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

5 Move the cursor over the upper horizontal reference plane. 7 Add a dimension referencing the left vertical reference plane and the offset plane you added. Lock the dimension as shown. 8 Add a dimension to the top horizontal reference plane and the offset plane below it. click Dimension. and click to locate a new horizontal reference plane offset 100 mm below it. 6 On the Design Bar. Click the lock icon as shown. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 595 .

Level for Name.Sketch the left drawer base 9 On the Design Bar. 15 Click both of the lock icons to lock the edges of the extrusion to the reference planes. and click OK. click Set Work Plane. select Level: Ref. 12 On the Design Bar. After you complete the rectangle. click Lines. 596 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under Specify a new Work Plane. 14 Select the intersection of the new offset reference planes for the first corner of the rectangle. 11 In the Work Plane dialog. two lock icons display. and then specify a point 300 mm to the right and 800 mm down for the second corner of the rectangle. click . 13 On the Options Bar. as shown. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 10 On the Design Bar.

16 On the Design Bar. TIP You can select multiple elements by holding the CTRL key down. click Modify. click the Mirror tool. 21 Select the vertical centerline reference plane as the mirror axis. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. 17 Add a vertical dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. You can also highlight the entire line chain. . Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 597 . using the TAB key. Mirror the left rectangle to create the right drawer base 18 On the Design Bar. 19 Select the four sketched lines. click Dimension. 20 On the Tools toolbar.

23 For the align-to reference. 24 Select the top horizontal line of the right drawer extrusion as shown. 22 On the Tools toolbar.A duplicate of the left drawer base is mirrored to create the right drawer base. as shown below at the cursor. click . select the horizontal reference plane second from the top. 598 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

27 Add and lock the following two dimensions to the right drawer extrusion: ■ Add a dimension from the right vertical reference plane to the right edge of the drawer base. Add a dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. 25 Click the lock icon to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. 26 On the Design Bar. ■ Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 599 . and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. click Dimension.A lock icon displays.

600 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. one on each extrusion that references the width of the drawer base. Click OK.28 Add two final dimensions. 29 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the left extrusion. 30 On the Options Bar. as shown.. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select <Add parameter. select Dimensions.. select Family parameter. For Group parameter under. enter Drawer Base Width for Name.> for Label. Under Parameter Data. Select Type.

select Drawer Base Width for Label. Extend the drawer base extrusions up to the desktop 36 In the Project Browser. double-click Front.32 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the right extrusion. 34 On the Design Bar. 38 Select the lower edge of the desktop as the align-to reference. 35 On the Design Bar. 37 On the Tools toolbar. click . click Finish Sketch. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 601 . click Modify. under Elevations. 33 On the Options Bar.

and click OK. click it to lock the alignment. The solid geometry for the desk drawer base is now complete. click the Scale control and select 1:20. Flex the design 46 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog. 43 Click the Annotation Categories tab. click . 40 On the Design Bar. 42 On the View menu. notice that annotations display in this view. you can still see the model. click Visibility/Graphics. a lock icon displays. 44 Clear Show annotation categories in this view. 41 On the View toolbar. However. 602 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .39 Select the upper edge of the drawer base. 45 On the View Control Bar. After the alignment. click Modify.

50 Proceed to the next exercise. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click Apply. enter 4000 mm for Length. 48 In the Family Types dialog. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. and click Apply. “Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry” on page 603. under Elevations. Notice the desk adapts to the new dimension parameters. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. click Family Types. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 2000 mm for Length. Click Apply. double-click Right. Enter 750 mm for Height. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 603 . and click Apply. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry In this exercise. you create the solid geometry of the desk rolltop. 49 In the Family Types dialog. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Enter 1200 mm for Height. Create the rolltop extrusion 1 In the Project Browser.47 On the Design Bar. Click OK.

2 On the Design Bar. click . click . then move the cursor up 300mm and to the left 400mm. 5 On the Design Bar. then the lower horizontal sketch line. 8 On the Tools toolbar. 604 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 7 Sketch the rectangle beginning at the intersection of the desktop and the right reference plane. and click the lock icon to lock the alignment. and click to specify the upper left corner. 3 On the Design Bar. and click OK. select Reference Plane: Center (Left\Right) for Name. click Set Work Plane. under Specify a new Work Plane. 6 On the Options Bar. click Lines. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. as shown. 9 Select the desk top. 4 In the Work Plane dialog.

11 On the Design Bar. then select the right parallel sketch line. 12 Add one dimension referring to both vertical sketch lines. click Dimension. Add another dimension to both horizontal sketch lines. and lock the alignment.10 Select the right vertical edge of the desktop extrusion. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 605 . and lock it. and lock it.

and then select the fillet arc tool from the menu. . 606 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 15 Select the left vertical sketch line. 16 On the Design Bar. click Lines. the upper sketch line. Do not be concerned with the precise dimension of the arc radius. 14 On the Options Bar. TIP You may need to click the down arrow button. and then move the cursor down and to the right until you create and arc similar to the image below. click Finish Sketch.13 On the Design Bar. click the Fillet arc tool.

20 Select the right edge of the right drawer base.The rolltop extrusion outline is complete. click . select the right edge of the rolltop. and click the lock icon. Align the left and right edges of the rolltop with the drawer bases 17 In the Project Browser. select the left edge of the rolltop. 18 On the Tools toolbar. under Elevations. double-click Front. and click the lock icon. 19 Select the left edge of the left drawer base. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 607 .

The solid geometry of the rolltop is now complete. Enter 200 mm for Thickness. The desk should adapt to all the changes. 23 On the Design Bar. 24 In the Family Types dialog. If not. you can still see the model. click Family Types. You can also use dimension constraints. and click Apply. and click Apply. enter 4000 mm for Length. Enter 1500 mm for Height.21 On the View toolbar. and click Apply. click . Enter 1500 mm for Depth. 608 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click Apply. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Flex the design 22 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog. you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned.

Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry | 609 . return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. you create the solid geometry of the drawers and apply material to the desk. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry In this exercise. click Set Work Plane. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. enter 2000 mm for Length. “Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry” on page 609. 2 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. and click OK. Click OK. under Specify a new Work Plane. Click Apply.25 In the Family Types dialog. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. select Pick a Plane. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Enter 750 mm for Height. 4 Select the front plane of the right drawer base. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Create the desk drawer extrusions 1 On the Design Bar.

click . select Multiple Alignment. click Lines. 11 On the Tools toolbar. 14 On the Tools toolbar. Lock each dimension as you add it. under Elevations. select the left vertical line on the left lowest drawer first. click drawer set on the left. After selecting the line of an upper drawer. 12 On the Options Bar. . If you cannot see the locks on the dimensions. NOTE Adding and locking these dimensions is very important. NOTE The exact configuration of the rectangles representing the drawer fronts is not critical. click the lock that displays to lock the alignment. click . and repeat the previous step by selecting the right vertical lines of the 610 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . these locked dimension assure that the drawers flex as expected. 13 To constrain the four upper drawers. zoom the view until you do. double-click Front. click Dimension.5 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. and then select the corresponding left vertical lines of the two drawers above it. 8 Sketch six drawers similar to the image below. 7 On the Options Bar. 10 Add a dimension between the vertical edges of the drawer base and the vertical lines of each bottom drawer. If you modify the desk length or the drawer base width. There should be four dimensions as shown.

for Material. click 24 In the Materials dialog.Wood. 17 On the Design Bar. click OK. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry | 611 . 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 In the Materials dialog. 29 In the Materials dialog. Apply material to the desk 21 Draw a pick box around the entire desk to select all the extrusions. click Extrusion Properties. 27 In the Material Library dialog. and click OK. enter Desk . and select Shading with Edges. 28 Click OK. click . Dark. under AccuRender. under Materials and Finishes. 20 On the View toolbar. enter 20mm for Extrusion End. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 In the New Material dialog. click . 19 On the Design Bar. click for Texture. Polished. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. and click OK. click Modify.15 On the Tools toolbar. click Finish Sketch. and repeat the previous two steps on the right set of drawers. These steps ensure the top drawers remain aligned and flex with the constrained bottom drawer. 31 On the View Control Bar. click Duplicate. 22 On the Options Bar. under Constraints. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Cherry and select Stained. click . Cherry. 16 On the Design Bar. click the Model Graphics Style control.

click Family Types. Enter 200 mm for Thickness. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. 612 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . If not. 34 In the Family Types dialog. 35 In the Family Types dialog. You can also use dimension constraints. and click Apply. you can still see the model. Click Apply. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 4000 mm for Length.Flex the design 32 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog. 36 Proceed with the final exercise in this lesson. you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. Enter 750 mm for Height. you define new furniture types based on the rolltop desk model that you just created. and click Apply. Click OK. and click Apply. The desk should adapt to all the changes. 33 On the Design Bar. Defining New Furniture Types In this exercise. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. enter 2000 mm for Length. “Defining New Furniture Types” on page 612.

20 Specify a point in the drawing area to add the first desk. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. Define new furniture types with various widths and depths 1 On the Design Bar. 19 In the Type Selector. Load the new furniture family into a new project 13 On the Standard toolbar. and click OK. 8 Under Family Types.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. verify that Length is 2000 mm and Depth is 1000 mm. enter Rolltop Desk 2000 x 1000mm for Name. Defining New Furniture Types | 613 . click Save. click New. 7 In the Family Types dialog. 10 In the Family Types dialog. under Family Types. to start a new project based on your default template. navigate to the location of your Training Furniture. 2 In the Family Types dialog. select Rolltop Desk 200 x 1000mm. click 14 On the View toolbar. and click Open. 11 On the File menu. and click Apply. 17 On the Options Bar. Training Furniture. click New. enter 2100 mm for Length and 1100 mm for Depth. 3 In the Name dialog. select it. click New. enter Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm for Name. click . enter Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm for Name. 5 Under Family Types. and click Apply. You now have three new furniture types defined within your furniture family. click Apply. 6 In the Name dialog. 12 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new furniture family project with the name. click Family Types. and click OK. enter 2250 mm for Length and 1250 mm for Depth. and click OK.rfa file. 18 In the Open dialog. click Load. 9 In the Name dialog.rfa. 4 In the Family Types dialog. click Component. 15 On the View Control Bar. click the Model Graphics Style control and select Shading with Edges.

23 In the Type Selector. 24 Specify a point in the drawing area to the right of the previous two desks. and click to add the third desk. 22 Specify a point to the right of the first desk. You now have three new rolltop desks based on the new rolltop desk furniture family prototype. Balusters are simply profile extrusions with an assigned height family parameter. and add the second desk. This completes the Creating a Furniture Family lesson.21 In the Type Selector. you draw a baluster with an extrusion. Creating a Baluster Family In this lesson. Drawing a Baluster In this exercise. you create a custom baluster and apply it to a set of stair railings. select Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm. 614 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm.

expand Floor Plans. select Ref. 9 On the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. 4 On the Design Bar. 2 On the View menu. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. Draw the baluster plan profile 3 In the Project Browser. Drawing a Baluster | 615 .rft. the baluster profile should be centered on the vertical and horizontal reference planes.Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. However. and click OK. 7 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Finish Sketch. click Training Files. Create a new family based on the default profile template 1 Expand the left elevation view. and double-click Ref. Top and bottom cut angles for the baluster are also displayed. The bottom of the baluster is at the reference level and the baluster has an assigned default height of 750mm. click Set Work Plane. The reference planes that display are part of the default baluster template. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Baluster. In the left pane of the New dialog. Level. click Lines. 8 Draw the closed baluster plan profile as shown. 6 In the Work Plane dialog. Draw your profile approximately 30mm wide by 60mm deep. their exact location is not critical. expand Views (all). click New ➤ Family. Level for Name.

13 Select the top reference plane and select the top edge of the extrusion. click Finish Sketch. Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run In this exercise. 4 On the Design Bar. 15 Save the new baluster family with the name Training Baluster. 5 Draw a straight stair run as shown. you assign the new baluster that you just created to a stair run. 14 Click the lock icon. 2 In the left pane of the New Project dialog. click the Modelling tab.rte. the extrusion has a height of 250mm. 11 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Design Bar.rfa. click Stairs. By default. click . The new custom baluster is now complete. double-click Front. click Modify and select the extrusion. 616 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click New ➤ Project. 7 On the File menu. click Training Files.Extend the baluster extrusion to the top reference plane 10 In the Project Browser under Elevations. 12 On the Options Bar. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. Load the new baluster family into a new project 1 On the File menu. Draw a straight stair run 3 On the Design Bar.

Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run | 617 . select it. select Training Baluster : Training Baluster for the Regular baluster. click Shading with Edges. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. click Orient ➤ Southwest. navigate to the location of your Training Baluster. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 On the View menu. 19 Click OK. 11 On the View menu. and click Open. 18 Specify Start and End posts as Training Baluster.rfa file. 16 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog. Apply the custom baluster to the stair run 12 On the Design Bar. 17 Clear Use Balusters Per Tread on Stairs. click . under Baluster Family. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 Zoom in on the new balusters. 9 On the View toolbar. 20 In the Type Properties dialog.8 In the Open dialog. 13 On the Options Bar. click OK. click Modify and select the existing railing. click OK. click Edit for Baluster Placement. click .

and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Rail. Create profiles to define frequently used shapes in your details.rft. click Training Files. a reveal. click New ➤ Family. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu.rfa. Drawing a Sweep Profile In this exercise. Use profiles to define object cross sections such as railings. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. you create a rail profile. Drawing a Rail Profile In this exercise. click Training Files. you create five different profiles: a sweep. In this lesson. cornices. click New ➤ Family. their exact location is not critical. a stair nosing. draw the sweep profile with line and arc segments as shown. In the left pane of the New dialog.rft. In the left pane of the New dialog. 618 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The new sweep profile is now complete. However. This completes the Creating a Baluster Family lesson.The stair run is now assigned the new baluster that you created. and a host sweep. Level is open. soffits. verify that Ref. Create a new family based on the default profile template 1 On the Design Bar. You then create an in-place sweep based on a 2D path and apply the host sweep to a wall.Sweep. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. you draw a sweep profile. the sweep profile should begin at the reference plane intersection. Creating Profile Families A profile is a series of closed two-dimensional lines and arcs. under Floor Plans. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. 2 Starting at the reference plane intersection. balusters. 3 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . Create a new family based on the default rail profile template 1 In the Project Browser. and other sweep-defined objects. a railing. click Lines.

Create a new family based on the default stair nosing profile template 1 Notice the existing planes and text provided within the template. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection.The reference planes that display are part of the default rail profile template. The rail height is measured from the floor elevation to the rail top. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the riser face and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the tread surface. you create a stair nosing profile.rft. In the left pane of the New dialog. click Lines. click Training Files. their exact location is not critical. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. However. the top of the rail profile should coincide with the rail top reference plane. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the rail centerline and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the rail top. click New ➤ Family. Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile | 619 . 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . Additional text specifies the lower-left quadrant as the location for the stair nosing. The new rail profile is now complete.rfa. Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile In this exercise. Draw the rail profile 2 On the Design Bar. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Stair Nosing. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. The reference planes that display are part of the default stair nosing profile template. draw the rail profile with line segments as shown.Rail.

with the vertical reference plane labeled as the wall face. The new stair nosing profile is now complete. their exact location is not critical. In addition.rft. under Floor Plans. you create a reveal profile. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . and the wall body indicated to the right of the wall face reference plane. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. However. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Reveal. you must draw the stair nosing in the lower-left quadrant. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. Drawing a Reveal Profile In this exercise. Create a new family based on the default reveal profile template 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Ref. draw the stair nosing profile with line and arc segments as shown.rfa. click Training Files.Draw the stair nosing profile 2 On the Design Bar. In the left pane of the New dialog. The reference planes that display are part of the default reveal profile template. The horizontal reference plane represents the offset from floor level to the reveal. 620 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Stair Nosing. the top of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the tread surface reference plane and the right edge of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the riser face reference plane. Level is open. click New ➤ Family. Reveal profiles are used with the Reveal tool in the project environment to define a wall cutout.

Draw the reveal profile 2 On the Design Bar. In the left pane of the New dialog. However. verify that Ref.rft. Drawing a Host Sweep Profile In this exercise. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile .Reveal. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines. you create a host sweep profile. the left edge of the reveal profile must coincide with wall face reference plane and the reveal must be drawn within the wall body (to the right of the wall face reference plane). under Floor Plans. Level is open. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. their exact location is not critical. Drawing a Host Sweep Profile | 621 . which may be any vertical surface. Create a new family based on the default host sweep profile template 1 In the Project Browser. click Lines. click Training Files. click New ➤ Family.rfa. Host Sweep profiles are similar to reveal profiles and are used with the Host Sweep tool in the project environment to define a shape to add to a host surface. The new reveal profile is now complete. draw the reveal profile with line segments as shown. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Hosted.

with the vertical reference plane labeled as the host face and the host body indicated to the left of the host face reference plane. draw the reveal profile with line and arc segments as shown. click OK. Create a new project 1 On the File menu. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection.rfa. click Training Files. their exact location is not critical. click Create. Specify the family category 5 On the Modelling menu. The new host sweep profile is now complete. and the host sweep profile must be drawn outside of the host body (to the right of the host face reference plane).Host Sweep. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. 622 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .rte.The reference planes that display are part of the default host sweep profile template. Draw the host sweep profile 2 On the Design Bar. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. the left edge of the host sweep profile must coincide with the host face reference plane. click New ➤ Project. you apply the sweep profile that you just created to a 2D path. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines. click Lines. Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path In this exercise. The reference plane intersection is the origin of the host sweep profile. However. 2 In the New Project dialog. click Browse. 4 In the New Project dialog.

Modify the sweep profile configuration 18 In the Project Browser. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.6 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. click Ref Plane. beside Load Profiles. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. and click OK. 19 Zoom in on the right end of the sweep. click Load Profiles. and click Open. navigate to the location of Profile . and click OK. 16 On the Design Bar. Sketch the 2D sweep path 8 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Sketch 2D Path. 15 On the Design Bar. select Profile . select Generic Models for Family Category.Sweep.Sweep. expand Views (all). Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path | 623 . click Lines and sketch the 2D path approximately as shown. enter Sweep for Name. the exact location of the path is not critical. NOTE When you sketch the 2D path. 9 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. Apply the sweep profile to the 2D path 12 On the Options Bar.rfa. and double-click South. click Finish Sweep. click Finish Path. 14 In the Type Selector. click . 17 On the View toolbar. 10 On the Design Bar. expand Elevations. 7 In the Name dialog. 13 In the Open dialog. select it. click Finish Family.

rte. Create a new project 1 On the File menu. click Finish Family. on the Options Bar. Draw a wall group 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Under Constraints. click Browse. 23 Select the sweep profile again and. click OK. 624 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The sweep profile application is now complete. click Edit. and open Metric Templates\DefaultMetric. 26 On the Design Bar. 25 Click OK. Under Other.21 Draw a vertical reference plane coincident with the left edge of the profile as shown. Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls In this exercise. click . 27 On the View toolbar. click New ➤ Project. on the Options Bar. 2 In the New Project dialog. click 24 In the Element Properties dialog. you apply the host sweep profile that you created to a group of walls. select Profile Is Flipped. 4 In the New Project dialog. Enter 25 degrees for Angle. 22 Select the sweep profile and. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. click Training Files. click Wall. enter 600 for Vertical Profile Offset. do the following: ■ ■ ■ .

6 Draw four walls as shown. 10 Select a point on the left wall for the wall sweep. click . 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. verify that Horizontal is selected.NOTE When you draw the walls. 11 Select a point on the right wall for the next wall sweep. click Host Sweep ➤ Wall Sweep. their exact location is not critical. Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls | 625 . 9 On the Options Bar. 7 On the View toolbar.

click 16 In the Element Properties dialog.rfa. The default wall sweep is replaced with your host sweep profile. 21 Move the cursor to rotate your viewpoint to view the host sweep from underneath. click Spin [Shift]. and click Open. click Modify. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. floor and ceiling finish. This completes the Creating Profile Families lesson. 20 In the Dynamic View dialog. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. The reference planes that display are part of the default room tag template. select Profile . 14 In the Open dialog. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol.12 On the Design Bar. 626 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Creating a Room Tag In this lesson. under Construction. and area with labels added to extract project data. you create a room tag which displays room name. and click OK. 19 On the View toolbar. navigate to the location of Profile .Host Sweep. Create a new tag based on the default room tag template 1 On the View menu. and open Metric\Templates\M_Room Tag.Host Sweep for Profile. select it. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. click Training Files. you specify the room tag parameters. 15 Select the wall sweep and. click OK. Replace the default wall sweep with the new host wall sweep 13 On the File menu. . In the left pane of the New dialog. Specifying Room Tag Parameters In this exercise. on the Options Bar.Host Sweep : Profile . Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. click .rft. click Edit/New.

23 In the Select Parameter dialog. 3 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click Edit/New. 15 In the Select Parameter dialog. enter 2mm for Name. click Label. select Label : 2mm. 7 In the Type properties dialog. click . verify that Label : 3mm is displayed. and click OK. 14 Specify the location for the first label as shown. and click OK. 17 In the Type Selector. click OK. select Ceiling Finish. enter 2 for the Text Size parameter. clear Underline. select Floor Finish. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK.Edit the 3mm label 2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Duplicate. click Label. Add a 2mm label 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. and click OK. Combine labels into a room tag 11 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. select Area. and click OK. and click OK. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog. 22 Specify a point below the Ceiling Finish label for the last label location. select Name. 16 Zoom in on the label. 12 In the Type Selector. select Underline. verify that Center and Middle are selected for Text Alignment. Specifying Room Tag Parameters | 627 . 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 18 Specify a point below the Name label for the next label location. 20 Specify a point below the Floor Finish label for the next label location. The name label is displayed with the text underlined. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 In the Name dialog. 19 In the Select Parameter dialog.

Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. Creating an Annotation Symbol In this lesson. click . Sketch a north arrow symbol 2 On the Design Bar. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol with a circle and lines. Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol In this exercise. notice that there is only one view available. 24 Save the new room tag with the name Finish Area Tag. The reference planes that display are part of the default generic annotation template. In the left pane of the New dialog. click Lines. and open Metric\Templates\Generic Annotation.rft. The new room tag is now ready for use. 3 On the Options Bar. This completes the Creating a Room Tag lesson.The Area label has a predefined value of 150 SF. Notes included with the template specify annotation parameters. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol.rfa. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol and place it in a new project. 628 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 4 Specify the reference plane intersection for the circle center point. click Training Files. Create a new annotation symbol based on the default generic annotation template 1 In the Project Browser.

click Modify. 9 Draw a vertical line from the center point to the bottom of the circle.5 Drag the cursor and specify a radius of 8mm. 8 Draw a vertical line from the top to the center point of the circle. 7 Draw a horizontal line from the left side to the right side of the circle through the center point. click . 6 On the Options Bar. Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol | 629 . 10 On the Design Bar.

and click OK. you add the new north arrow annotation symbol that you created to a project. Load the new north arrow into a new project 1 On the File menu. enter North Line for Name. under Modify Subcategories. Adding the New North Arrow to a Project In this exercise. 8 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family.The new north arrow annotation symbol is ready to edit. Training North Arrow. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. click Sheet. 16 In the Type Selector. select 3 for Line Weight. verify that Generic Annotations is selected for Subcategory of. The north arrow annotation symbol is now complete. select A1 metric. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Add an annotation objects subcategory 11 On the Settings menu. 17 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. click Modify. click Training Files. 19 Save the new north arrow with the name. 12 In the Object Styles dialog. and click OK.rte. Apply the new line weight to the upper vertical line 15 On the Design Bar. 630 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and select the upper vertical line. click New ➤ Project. 18 Select the template notes and press DELETE. click Object Styles. 7 Click OK. 2 In the New Project dialog. click New. select North Line. click Browse. 13 In the New Subcategory dialog. in the North Line row.rfa. click Modify. 9 On the File menu. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. click OK. 4 In the New Project dialog. 5 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet In this exercise. click New ➤ Titleblock. In the left pane of the New dialog. navigate to the location of Training North Arrow. and click Open. This completes the Creating an Annotation Symbol lesson. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu.rft. 12 In the Type Selector. Creating a Titleblock Family | 631 . click Symbol. The titleblock has linework. and labels. Create a new family based on the default titleblock template 1 The default titleblock template consists of 4 border lines. and open Metric\Templates\A0 Metric.rfa. 14 On the Design Bar. select Training North Arrow. select it. you draw all of the linework necessary to create a custom A0-size sheet. text. you create a custom titleblock sheet based on the A0 metric titleblock template. 13 Specify a point in the lower right corner of the sheet to place the symbol. graphics. Creating a Titleblock Family In this lesson. and your project data. You customize the titleblock with a new text style. click Training Files.10 In the Open dialog. 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify.

3 On the Options Bar. and enter -25 for Offset. 10 Draw a horizontal line 120mm below the last horizontal line as shown. and enter 140 for Offset. 9 Draw a horizontal line 140mm below the upper inside border as shown. 7 On the Options Bar. click . click Lines. click 8 Enter 0 for Offset. and then specify the lower right corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle. 632 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click .Sketch the inside border 2 On the Design Bar. 6 Move the cursor over the right inside border line. and click to draw a new vertical line. click . . Add vertical and horizontal lines 5 On the Options Bar. 11 Draw a horizontal line 120mm above the lower inside border as shown. 4 Specify the upper left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner.

14 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. 23 Move the cursor over the seventh horizontal line. 22 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. click . and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. 18 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. and enter 20 for Offset. 26 Zoom out to view the entire sheet. 19 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. 25 On the Design Bar. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. click Modify. select Title Blocks. select Wide Lines. click Modify. 24 Move the cursor over the eighth horizontal line. 16 In the Type Selector. press CTRL. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet | 633 . click Lines.12 On the Design Bar. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. enter 30 for Offset. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. 21 On the Options Bar. 20 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. 15 On the Design Bar. and select the second and third horizontal lines. 17 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Type Selector.

3 Place the image in the upper right corner of the sheet as shown. click Duplicate. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.The titleblock linework is now complete.jpg. and labels to your titleblock. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. Add a company logo 1 On the File menu. 4 Zoom in on the logo. Create a new 10mm text style 5 On the Design Bar. click Text. you add a company logo. click Training Files. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock In this exercise. 6 On the Options Bar. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. and open Common\Company Logo. click . text notes. 634 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Edit/New. click Import/Link ➤ Image.

Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 635 . enter 10 for Text Size. Press ENTER to add each new line of text and click outside of the text box to complete the text. Add company name text 12 Draw a text box under the first horizontal line as shown. in the text box. Add company address and phone number text 15 In the Type Selector. 16 Draw a text box below the initial text. and select Bold. 13 Enter Arch Design Inc. 11 Click OK twice. enter 10mm Bold for Name. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. and drag the text note down as shown. under Text. 18 Select the drag handle. 17 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and select the last text note. select Text : 8mm.9 In the Name dialog. and add an address and phone number as shown. 14 Click outside of the text box to complete the text.

and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ ■ Consultant: Address: Address: Telephone: 22 On the Design Bar. click Text. address. select Constrain and Multiple. 25 Click inside the Consultant text group. 23 On the Edit toolbar.19 Click outside the text box to complete the modification. click . 21 Draw a text box below the second horizontal line. click Modify. 24 On the Options Bar. and select the consultant text note. Add consultant name. and phone number text 20 On the Design Bar. 636 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

26 Move the cursor down 120mm and click to specify the first copied text note position. 27 Move the cursor down another 120mm and click to specify the second copied text note location. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 637 .

33 In the Type Properties dialog. 34 Click OK twice. and enter Checked By:. and enter Date:. click Edit/New. select Text : 5mm. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. and enter Sheet Number:. 36 Draw a text box in the lower right space of the titleblock. enter 5mm for Name. click . under Text. click Text. and click OK.Create a new 5mm text style 28 On the Design Bar. and enter Drawn By:. 638 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter 5 for Text Size. 29 On the Options Bar. Add drawing data text 35 In the Type Selector. 38 Draw a text box in the next space up. 37 Draw a text box in the next space up. 39 Draw a text box in the next space up. click Duplicate. 32 In the Name dialog. 31 In the Type Properties dialog.

click Label. and click OK. and click to specify the label location. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 639 . 44 Select the left drag handle on the label. 42 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Date field. The label displays a default value wrapped to 3 lines. select Right and Bottom for Text Alignment. select Project Issue Date. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 43 In the Select Parameter dialog.Add drawing data labels 40 On the Design Bar. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. 41 On the Options Bar.

640 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 46 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click to specify the label location. 54 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 15mm Label for Name. click Center and Middle. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. 53 In the Name dialog. select Drawn By. 60 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Date field. and click OK. under Text. 61 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click to specify the label location.45 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Drawn By field. and click to specify the label location. and click to specify the label location. 55 Click OK twice. 48 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click OK. 47 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Checked By field. Add sheet number and project data labels 56 In the Type Selector. select Project Number. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. click Duplicate. click . 51 In the Element Properties dialog. 50 On the Options Bar. 58 In the Select Parameter dialog. click Edit/New. 57 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Sheet Number field. Create a new 15mm label style 49 On the Design Bar. select Label : 15mm Label. and click OK. select Checked By and click OK. select Sheet Number. enter 15 for Text Size. 59 On the Options Bar. click Label. and click OK.

and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 641 . 66 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field. and click OK. click Label. 68 Select the left drag handle on the label. and click OK. and click to specify the label location. select Project Name. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 64 In the Select Parameter dialog. 67 In the Select Parameter dialog. 63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field.62 Select the left drag handle on the label. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. select Client Name. Create a 4mm label style 69 On the Design Bar. and click to specify the label location. 65 Select the left drag handle on the label.

5 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 642 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 73 In the Name dialog. 78 Place the cursor in the border area below the left side of the Sheet Number field. enter 4mm Label. The titleblock graphics. click Left and Middle. click Duplicate. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. text. and click OK. click Load. 77 On the Options Bar. 71 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. Add Project Path label 76 In the Type Selector. click New ➤ Project. 81 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. select Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. 9 Click OK. 8 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 72 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. click Modify. navigate to the location of Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. select it. 79 In the Select Parameter dialog. select File Path. click Training Files. click OK. enter 4 for Text Size. 80 On the Design Bar. select 4mm Label. you add the titleblock that you created to a new project. and then adjust the width of the File Path field so that it is approximately equal to the width of the Sheet Number field.rte. 75 Click OK twice. 74 In the Type Properties dialog. click Sheet.rfa. and labels are now complete. Load the new titleblock family into a new project 1 On the File menu. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project In this exercise.rfa file. 4 In the New Project dialog. and click Open. under Text. 2 In the New Project dialog. and click to specify the label location. click Browse. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. click . 7 In the Open dialog.70 On the Options Bar.

Enter Jane Smith for Client Name. 16 Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter January 1. 14 On the Settings menu. Enter In Progress for Project Status. 13 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. Enter 2005-01 for Project Number. click Modify and select the titleblock. click . Adding the Titleblock to a New Project | 643 .Modify titleblock properties 10 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. Enter Office Building for Project Name. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. 11 On the Options Bar. enter Name for Drawn By. and click OK. 2005 for Project Issue Date. under Other. click Project Information.

This completes the Creating a Titleblock Family lesson. Sketch the roof cross-section with a closed profile in an elevation view. and add a dome roof and a concave floor with revolved forms as in-place families. and set the suffix to None. you create the dome roof with a revolved form. format the Area to use 2 decimal places. Set the Length units to millimeters. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you start with an incomplete building information model of the Pantheon. on the Settings menu. set the Area to Square meters. In-place families interact with the building model according to their assigned family category. and open Common\c_Pantheon. To change the units of measurement to meters. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family In this exercise. You create an in-place family in your current project rather than in the Family Editor.rvt. Creating In-Place Families In this lesson. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 644 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Training Files. NOTE This project was created using an imperial template and components. click Project Units. click Orient ➤ Southeast. Open the existing Pantheon building model 1 On the View menu.

Next. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. 5 In the Name dialog. expand Views (all). 8 In the Work Plane dialog. expand Elevations. select Section: Wall Section . and click OK. you add a dome roof with oculus (circular opening) to the Pantheon building model.Center. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 645 . Specify the dome roof revolved form parameters 6 On the Design Bar. 9 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. click Set Work Plane. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. and click OK. select Pick a Plane. 10 In the Go To View dialog. 7 On the Design Bar. and double-click South. select Roofs for Family Category. click Create. and click OK. and click Open View. Specify the Roofs family category 3 On the Modelling menu. 2 In the Project Browser. enter Dome for Name.

click . click . 646 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .The center wall section view is displayed. click Axis. click Lines. 13 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. Draw the axis of rotation for the dome roof revolved form 11 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. 16 Specify the intersection of the Upper Cornice horizontal reference plane and vertical axis as the circle center point. Draw the lower face of the dome roof 14 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Options Bar.

Draw the oculus rim profile 18 Zoom in on the top of the circle. The circle is tangent to the interior wall face and the level 1 reference plane at the floor line. and select Chain. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 647 . and draw the five rim profile line segments in the shape of a reverse C as shown. 19 On the Options Bar. click . The reference planes that display are guides for drawing the oculus rim profile.17 Move the cursor out. 21 Snap to reference plane intersections. 20 Specify the reference plane intersection for the start point of the rim profile as shown. until it creates an intersection with the level 1 reference plane.

27 On the Options Bar. click .Split the circle 22 On the Tools toolbar. click Lines. 25 Select the intersection of the circle and the lower left vertical line of the profile as shown. click . 28 Specify the endpoint of the upper left rim profile line segment as the arc start point. The circle is trimmed between the rim profile and the first split point. Draw the upper face of the dome roof 26 On the Design Bar. 24 Select a point on the circle to the right of the rim profile. 648 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 23 On the Options Bar. select Delete Inner Segment.

click . 35 Select the interior face of the wall. 32 On the Options Bar. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 649 . and then select a point on the arc above the tangent point as the segment to keep. Trim the arc below the tangent point 34 On the Tools toolbar.29 Specify the top of the stairs in the wall section as the arc endpoint. click and select Chain. and then draw a vertical line down the interior wall face to the lower dome roof face tangent point. Draw two lines to close the dome roof profile 31 On the Design Bar. 33 Draw a horizontal line from the arc endpoint to the interior edge of the wall. 30 Specify a point on the arc approximately as shown. click Lines.

click Finish Sketch. 38 In the Materials dialog. Specify the concave floor revolved form parameters 1 On the Modelling menu. 41 On the Design Bar. Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family In this exercise. Specify lightweight concrete for the dome roof material 36 On the Design Bar. 40 On the Design Bar. select Concrete . you create the concave floor slab for the Pantheon building model. 650 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Create. and click OK. click . 2 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. 37 In the Element Properties dialog.The dome roof closed profile is now complete.Cast-in-Place Lightweight Concrete for Name. The dome roof in-place family is now complete. click OK. 42 On the View toolbar. click Finish Family. 39 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. select Floors for Family Category. click for Material. click Revolution Properties. under Materials and Finishes.

and click OK.3 In the Name dialog. double-click South. select Section: Wall Section . select Pick a Plane. and click OK. 12 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. 8 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. 11 On the Options Bar. 7 In the Work Plane dialog. enter Concave Floor for Name. 9 In the Go To View dialog. and click Open View. 4 In the Project Browser under Elevations. Draw the axis of rotation for the floor revolved form 10 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. click . and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. 6 On the Design Bar.Center. click Axis. Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family | 651 . 5 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve.

for the start point of the floor profile as shown. click . 15 Specify the intersection of the T.O. and select Chain. 16 Drag the cursor up 800 mm. NOTE You may need to zoom in closer to the intersection to select the first point.Draw the concave floor profile 13 On the Design Bar. 652 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 14 On the Options Bar. Footing level line and the axis. click Lines. and specify the next point for the floor profile as shown. 17 Specify the intersection of the level 1 reference plane and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile as shown.

22 In the Materials dialog. and click OK. such as reference planes and sub-categories. Footing level line and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile. annotation families. 25 On the Design Bar. click Revolution Properties. click OK. double-click 3D Section View. select Cobblestone for Name. the new family has specific default contents. click Finish Family.18 Specify the intersection of the T. click for Material.O. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. Appendix A . Revit Architecture differs between templates for model families. 19 Specify the intersection of the of the T.Exploring Family Templates Revit Architecture ships with a large number of family templates. click Finish Sketch. and title blocks. Based on the template you select. This completes the Creating In-Place Families lesson. Appendix A .Exploring Family Templates | 653 . Footing level line and the axis for the last point of the floor profile. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. When you create a new family. Specify cobblestone for the concave floor material 20 On the Design Bar. 26 In the Project Browser under 3D Views.O. you start with the selection of a family template. 24 On the Design Bar. The concave floor closed profile is now complete.

Category: None Casework wall based Family template for casework.Post Family template for posts of balusters.rft Baluster Description Family template for baluster families. Geometry can be locked to upper and lower reference level in elevation views.Model Family Templates The templates for model families are in Documents and Settings/All Users/Application Data/Autodesk/RAC 2008/Metric Templates. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Category: None Baluster . 654 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Category: Casework Casework Family template for casework. The following table gives an overview of the templates for model families: Template Name *. Contains sample wall geometry.

Category: Columns Curtain Wall Panel Family template for filling elements of curtain walls. Category: Curtain Panels Detail Component line based 2D family. Geometry can be locked to upper and lower reference level in elevation views. the column inherits the material of the wall. is used to create 2D detail components. contains a reference line and left and right reference planes. Category: Detail Items Detail Component 2D family. Geometry can use length parameter as “stretch” value.rft Description Column Family template to create columns. includes the filled region tool. Includes the filled region tool. If a column intersects a wall. Category: Detail Items Model Family Templates | 655 .Template Name *.

Category: Doors Electrical Equipment Family template to create electrical equipment families.Curtain Wall Description Family template for door elements of curtain walls. Category: Curtain Panels Door Family template for doors. Category: Electrical Equipment Electrical Fixture ceiling based Family template to create electrical equipment families.Template Name *.rft Door . Ceiling based families can only be placed on any ceiling in a project. 656 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Contains a sample ceiling geometry.

Category: Furniture Model Family Templates | 657 .rft Description Category: Electrical Fixtures Electrical Fixture wall based Family template to create electrical equipment families. Category: Electrical Fixtures Electrical Fixture Family template to create electrical equipment families. Contains sample wall geometry. Category: Electrical Fixtures Entourage Family template to create entourage families.Template Name *. Category: Entourage Furniture System Family template to create furniture system families. Category: Furniture Systems Furniture Family template to create furniture families. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project.

Face based families can only be placed on any face in a project. Category: Generic Models Generic Model floor based Family template to create any generic model geometry. Category: Generic Models 658 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Template Name *. Contains sample floor geometry. Floor based families can only be placed on a floor face in a project. Contains a sample ceiling geometry. Category: Generic Models Generic Model face based Family template to create any generic model geometry.rft Generic Model ceiling based Description Family template to create any generic model geometry. Ceiling based families can only be placed on ceiling in a project.

Category: Generic Models Sample: Wall Opening with 2D graphics in plan view and a void extrusion. Category: Generic Models Generic Model roof based Family template to create any generic model geometry. Contains sample wall geometry. Model Family Templates | 659 . Geometry can use length parameter as “stretch” value.Template Name *. Contains sample roof geometry. Category: Generic Models Generic Model wall based Family template to create any generic model geometry. Contains a reference line and left and right reference planes.rft Generic Model line based Description Family template to create any generic model geometry. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Roof based families can only be placed on any roof face in a project. Includes the filled region tool.

Template Name *. Floor based families can only be placed on a floor face in a project. Category: Generic Model Lighting Fixture floor based Family template to create lighting fixtures. Contains sample roof geometry. Category: Lighting Fixtures Lighting Fixture roof based Family template to create lighting fixtures. Roof based families can only be placed on a roof face in a project. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools.rft Generic Model Description Family template to create any generic model geometry. Category: Lighting Fixtures 660 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. Contains sample floor geometry.

Contains sample wall geometry. Linear Lighting Fixture wall based. Category: Lighting Fixtures Model Family Templates | 661 .rft Lighting Fixture ceiling based Description Family template to create lighting fixtures. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools.Template Name *. Category: Lighting Fixtures Linear Lighting Fixture floor based. Wall based families can only be placed on a wall face in a project. Contains sample ceiling geometry. Linear Lighting Fixture ceiling based. Category: Lighting Fixtures Lighting Fixture Family template to create lighting fixtures. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. Ceiling based families can only be placed on a ceiling face in a project. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. Linear Lighting Fixture roof based. Category: Lighting Fixtures Lighting Fixture wall based Family template to create lighting fixtures. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. Linear Lighting Fixture Family templates to create linear lighting fixtures. Contains the same defaults as the Lighting Fixtures.

slabs. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Masses can report gross volume. Contains sample wall geometry. Category: Mass Sample: Mass families from the content library. Ceiling based families can only be placed on ceiling faces in a project. gross surface area. Faces of masses can be used to create other model elements like walls. Contains sample ceiling geometry. Category: Mechanical Equipment Mechanical Equipment wall based Family template to create mechanical equipment families. Category: Mechanical Equipment 662 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .rft Mass Description Family template to create massing families. and gross floor areas. Mechanical Equipment ceiling based Family template to create mechanical equipment families. and roofs Massing families can also be generating floor area faces.Template Name *.

Contains sample wall geometry. Category: Mechanical Equipment Parking Family template to create parking families.rft Mechanical Equipment Description Family template to create mechanical equipment families. Category: Parking Planting Family template to create planting families. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Category: Plumbing Fixtures Model Family Templates | 663 .Template Name *. Category: Plumbing Fixtures Plumbing Fixture Family template to create plumbing fixture families. Category: Planting Plumbing Fixture wall based Family template to create plumbing fixture families.

gutter. Category: Profiles. A profile is only used in combination with system families. wall sweep) can be explicitly assigned under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. A profile is only used in combination with system families. A profile is only used in combination with system families. Category: Profiles.rft Profile Description Family template to create 2D profiles. Profile-Hosted Family template to create 2D profiles for hosts. Profile usage can be explicitly assigned. Category: Profiles. A profile is only used in combination with system families. Category: Profiles. slab edge.Template Name *. mullion. Profile usage can be explicitly assigned. Profile usage (fascia. Families based on this template can be used in a project with the tools in the Modelling menu ➤ Host Sweeps. Contains default reference planes Rail Centerline and Rail Top. Profile-Rail Family template to create 2D profiles for rails. 664 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Profile-Reveal Family template to create 2D profiles for wall sweeps and wall reveals.

RPC Family Family template for models using the Real People Collection product family. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Category: Profiles. Category: Specialty Equipment Speciality Equipment Family template to create specialty equipment families. Contains sample wall geometry. Category: Specialty Equipment Model Family Templates | 665 .rft Profile-Stair Nosing Description Family template to create 2D profiles for stair nosing.Template Name *. A profile is used only in combination with system families. Category: Entourage Site Family template to create Site families. The family has an rpc file link included. Category: Site Speciality Equipment wall based Family template to create specialty equipment families.

Spot Lighting Fixture roof based. Category: Lighting Fixtures Family template to create structural columns. such as beams and braces. 666 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .rft Spot Lighting Fixture floor based. Category: Structural Foundations Structural Framing . Spot Lighting Fixture ceiling based. it moves its position if the base of the structural column is moved. If a structural foundation family is placed below a column. Category: Structural Columns Structural Foundation Family templates to create structural foundation families.Template Name *. the column cuts out the wall. specific setting for symbolic representation and the structural material type can be defined. The family templates contain specific reference planes for members and stick symbols. Contains the same defaults as the Lighting Fixtures. Geometry can be locked to upper and lower reference level in elevation views. Spot Lighting Fixture wall based. specific settings for symbolic representation and the structural material type can be defined. Under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. Spot Lighting Fixture Structural Column Description Family templates to create spot lighting fixtures. The family has illumination and spot properties for the rendering tools. If a structural column intersects a wall.Beams and Braces Family template to create structural framing families. Under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. A structural column can be defined as a room-bounding element if the structural material type is set to concrete or precast concrete. Beams can be placed on structural columns.

Category: Curtain Panels Window with trim Family template for windows including trim on the exterior side.Complex and Trusses Family template to create structural framing families.rft Description Category: Structural Framing Structural Framing .Template Name *.Curtain Wall Family template for window elements of curtain walls. such as trusses. Category: Structural Framing Window . Category: Windows Model Family Templates | 667 .

Category: Section Marks Family template to define the symbol for spot elevations. Category: Room Tags Family template for section heads. In the family the intersection of the horizontal and right reference planes define connection location with the system section line. and parameter text size are always related to the current scale of the View Control Bar. Annotation families consist mainly of lines.rft Callout Head Door Tag Generic Annotation Description Family template for the tag of a callout. text size.rft Window Description Family template for windows. click Tag ➤ Multi-Category to add a tag. A MultiCategory tag needs a shared parameter as filter parameter. Category: Door Tags Family template for generic annotations. text. The category can be set under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. and parameters. Annotation families are scale-dependent. the same shared parameter is added to a project as a project parameter and can be used to filter selected elements to be tagged with the MultiCategory tag. Category: Windows Annotation Family Templates The templates for annotation families are in Documents and Settings/All Users/Application Data/Autodesk/RAC 2008/Metric Templates/Annotation. Symbol size. Category: Level Heads Family template for Multi-Category tags. On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Thus. Category: Callouts Family template for door tags.0mm on a plotted sheet. Category: Multi-Category Tags Family template for room tags.0mm has a size of 2. Category: Generic Model Tags Family template for the grid heads. parameter text created with a text height of 2. The intersection of 2 reference planes defines the insertion point of a tag. The following table gives an overview of the templates for annotation families: Template Name *.Template Name *. Category: Grid Heads Family template for level heads. The category can be set under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. filled regions. Category: Spot Elevation Symbols Generic Tag Grid Head Level Head Multi-Category Tag Room Tag Section Head Spot Elevation Symbol 668 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Category: Generic Annotation Family template for tags.

24 x 18. In the Select a Titleblock dialog.Template Name *. In a project.36 x 24. and parameters.rft View Title Window Tag Description Family template to define view title of a view in a sheet.rft ■ A1 metric. text.42 x 30.rft ■ D . Imperial ■ A . Category: View Titles Family template for window tags.rft ■ B . the title block can be assigned to a sheet using View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet.rft Metric ■ A0 metric.rft ■ C .5.rft ■ A3 metric.17 x 11. The following table gives an overview of the templates for title block families: Template Name Comments Family templates for title blocks using common standard sizes.11 x 8. Category: Window Tags Titleblock Family Templates The templates for titleblock families are in Documents and Settings/All Users/Application Data/Autodesk/RAC 2008/Metric Templates/Titleblocks.rft ■ A4 metric.rft Titleblock Family Templates | 669 .rft ■ A2 metric.rft ■ New Site Metric. Title block families consist mainly of lines for the plan border. filled regions. all loaded title block families are listed for selection.rft ■ E1 . You import images to your title block.

670 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

The goal of this tutorial is to teach you the proper approach to parametric component creation. you learn the process and methodology of creating a new family. At the end of this tutorial. you will understand the process. The truss also has multiple types. and detail level controls. The parametric component that you design in this tutorial is an open web wood floor truss.Parametric Component Design Techniques 17 In this tutorial. assigned subcatecories. During this tutorial. In this case. you create a new parametric component within the Family Editor. the length of the trimmable truss determines the size and grade of the truss chords. formula-based parameters. In exercises that become increasingly complex. 671 . In the center of the truss is a mechanical service clearance to accommodate HVAC systems. and the specific techniques for creating a parametric component. methodology. not specifically how to make a floor truss. This type of component uses a broad spectrum of design techniques within the Family Editor. you learn specific techniques and best practices that you can apply broadly when creating other families in Revit Architecture 2008.

you determine the requirements of the new component. 2 What additional design requirements affect the design plan for this beam family? Additional design requirements ■ ■ ■ The truss should automatically adjust depth as the length changes. It should also be an available option within a beam system. imagine that your firm specializes in light commercial and residential design. and structural walls. A rectangular mechanical clearance opening must be centered within the beam. If the design requirements can be met with a simple design. In this case. the beam design must be advanced in order to have the flexibility that the specs require. the design specification requires that the floor truss snaps to columns. beams. a generic floor-based component might work. you should avoid over-designing the component. For training purposes. there is a computing performance cost that must be paid within the project. NOTE When creating a new family. Two types should be created. Using the new family within a project 3 How will you use the family within a project? 672 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . In this lesson. Take this into consideration during your design planning. you accomplish two main tasks: you determine the component needs and select the family template that is suited to those needs. the component should use the point-to-point insertion method with the joist web members adjusting parametrically.Planning a Parametric Component Family Creating a new parametric component family is no different than any other design process. Knowing why you are creating a particular family and what you need it to do will drive the specific design process. you select the best available template with which to begin the new structural beam family. In addition. Decide component type and design requirements 1 What type of component are you designing? In this case. In the next exercise. planning ahead is one of the most important steps. Because this component has to interact closely with other structural components. this must be a structural beam component. Your assignment is to create a truss that adapts parametrically to changes in the building design. it is an open-joist wood floor truss. Determining Component Needs In this exercise. For every complexity added to a family. Although this solution is possible. a 2x3 truss and a 2x4 truss. and also works intuitively with them. If the component did not have to interact so closely with other structural components. The design requirements dictate how simple or complex a family must be. it is not the best solution. This decision dictates which family template you begin with. then you should design only what is needed to satisfy the requirements. In this case.

In addition. especially if you are going to be nesting subcomponents that may require separate scheduling. Selecting the Family Template In this exercise. ■ What materials remain constant throughout a project? The chord and web material will always be wood. would require Instance or Type parameters. you determine which family template provides the best starting point for the new beam family. the means by which you gather the information you require within the schedule needs to be built into the component. ■ How will the component need to be scheduled? This is an important question. ■ What types are most commonly used? In this training case. the planning stage and questions may differ. You have completed the planning stage for the new family. only the 2x3 and 2x4 trusses with wood web members are required. you determined that the component type is a structural beam. “Selecting the Family Template” on page 673. 4 Continue with the next exercise. such as wood type. These materials can be applied using Object Styles. This critical decision reduces the quantity of template options. Depending on the family you are designing. In the previous exercise. Selecting the Family Template | 673 .For instance: ■ What materials need the most control? These materials.

and open Metric\Templates. notice the preview. click Training Files. you will access them from the Training Files folder. On the right side of the New dialog. The New dialog opens to the templates folder that is specified in your Settings ➤ Options dialog. There are two structural framing templates provided. scroll to the structural framing templates. 5 Select Metric Generic Model floor based. Like most generic family templates. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. In addition. the template name often includes information how the component would be used with a project. this is where you access family templates. 4 Scroll through the various template options. However. NOTE Do not double-click the template or open it.rft 674 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques .Beams and Braces.Review the template options 1 Close any open projects or families. it provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). Usually. ■ Metric Structural Framing . to ensure you are using the templates referenced in this tutorial. Notice that most of the template names include the component type. Select it so that the preview displays. 6 In the New dialog. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. You should be in the Metric Templates folder.rft. for example: wall based or floor based.

10 Maximize the view.rft This template is designed for complex framing components and trusses.This template is design specifically to accommodate point-to-point insertion and the specific snapping. Floor Plan: Ref. Although the template name suggests this is the appropriate template. it is not the best starting point for the beam family. Notice this template offers three vertical planes on each side of the center (left/right) reference plane. 7 Select Metric Structural Framing . Open the family template 9 Double-click Metric Structural Framing .Complex and Trusses.Complex and Trusses. Level. spacing.Beams and Braces.rft and notice the preview. This template is the best starting point for the new family. Floor Plan: Ref.rft to open it. ■ Metric Structural Framing . Because of its simplicity. 8 Select Metric Structural Framing . Level Selecting the Family Template | 675 . It provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back).rft. and notice the preview. it is not designed to create a component capable of point-to-point insertion.Beams and Braces. These planes are designed specifically to accommodate point-to-point beam insertion and the special snapping and display requirements of beam components. and display functions required by structural beams.

double-click Front. 13 Proceed to the next lesson. These reference planes act as part of the skeleton to which the solid geometry will align and lock. Like many templates. under 3D Views. 2 Place the cursor over the leftmost vertical reference plane until the tooltip displays the name of the plane. and dimensions that provide a skeleton for the solid geometry. Dimensioning the solid geometry directly also works. you snap and lock the solid geometry to these reference planes and lines. Notice that the beam extrusion is centered on the level line. 676 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Therefore. “Creating the Component Skeleton” on page 676. Adding Reference Planes In this exercise. 12 In the Project Browser. Reference Plane: Left. lines. 11 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you started in the previous exercise. using reference planes and lines is considered more reliable and is therefore a best practice. NOTE When creating or modifying a family. under Elevations. creating a skeleton to build upon is the foundation of a new component family. however. When a beam family based on this template is added to a project. This beam extrusion is supplied within the template as a starting point. it is not necessary to create a skeleton of reference planes or lines and then align and lock the solid geometry to it. you add reference planes to the beam design. double-click View 1. TIP The name also displays on the Status Bar. you can see the rectangular beam extrusion and a symbolic line. under Floor Plans. the top of the beam extrusion is aligned to the associated level of the plan view. Review existing reference planes 1 In the Project Browser. Creating the Component Skeleton In this lesson. the geometry supplied can be used or discarded as needed. double-click Ref.In this view. Level. you add the reference planes. As you add solid geometry later in the tutorial.

■ Left and Right: These two planes mark the points where the beam intersects with other columns. The six reference planes shown in the project below were added as a training reference. ■ Member Left and Member Right: These two planes refer to the left and right extent of the beam solid geometry when displayed in a medium or fine display view of a project. The reference planes in this template are designed to accommodate the point-to-point insertion of a beam component. In the project plan view image below. Reference planes that display within a family file do not display within a project. ■ Stick Symbol Left and Stick Symbol Right: Adding Reference Planes | 677 . The reference planes and their respective explanations are listed below.3 Repeat this step for the other two vertical planes on the left side. notice the location of the beam extents. NOTE The reference planes shown in the project image below were added as a training reference. two steel columns and a steel beam have been added to a project. In the image below. The two arrows point to the snap points that the left and right reference planes refer to. they do not display when the family is loaded into a project.

you add the solid geometry for the truss as a sweep. it is important to be familiar with the template so you do not create duplicate or conflicting planes. 8 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm below the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). You will use these two reference planes to control the beam width and keep it centered on the reference plane: Center (Front/Back). Before adding new reference planes. click Ref Plane. NOTE Be careful not to select the symbolic line. 7 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm above the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). 678 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 5 On the Edit Toolbar. Each family template has a different set of reference planes established within it. Delete existing solid geometry 4 Select the rectangular beam extrusion.These two planes refer to the extents of the stick symbol when it is loaded into a project and the plan view display setting is coarse. In a later exercise. click . Add new reference planes 6 On the Design Bar.

When a copy of the reference plane displays below it. Level as the mirror axis. and select the Level: Ref. under Elevations. Level. The next four reference planes that you add mark the thickness of the truss chords. To do this. 10 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. click to place it. planes to control beam depth 9 In the Project Browser. TIP You can also use the mirror tool to accomplish this task. 11 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm below the Level: Ref. 14 On the Options Bar. Adding Reference Planes | 679 . select the lower horizontal reference plane. 12 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm above the Level: Ref. double-click Front. This beam requires additional reference planes to complete the truss skeleton. TIP You can control the direction of the offset by moving the cursor slightly to either side of the line you intend to pick. click Ref Plane. 15 Place the cursor over the top horizontal reference plane.Add ref. click on the Edit toolbar. click Ref Plane. and specify an Offset of 38 mm. These two reference planes mark the top and bottom extents of the beam. click . Level.

680 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques .16 Place the cursor over the lower horizontal reference plane and when a copy of the reference plane displays above it. Before you move on to the next exercise. you must add four additional reference planes to accommodate the center chase. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. click to place it as shown. 17 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Left. specify an Offset of 200 mm. 18 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Right. click to place it as shown. click to place it as shown. You have completed the reference planes that make up the skeleton of the chords. 19 On the Options Bar.

24 In the Project Browser. Although there is nothing technically incorrect regarding the reference planes in this view. 23 Use the Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right) to add reference planes to the left and right of it as shown below. click to place it as shown. Level. Adding Reference Planes | 681 . which you do in the next exercise. Notice the reference planes that you added in the elevation view. 21 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). under Floor Plans. double-click Ref. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. click to place it as shown. 22 On the Options Bar. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it.20 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). specify an Offset of 238 mm. cleaning up some of the extents would make the view easier.

you add some of the dimensions and constraints that control how the open web floor truss adapts to changes in its geometry. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save. enter Wood Floor Truss for File name.25 On the Design Bar. Make sure you remember where you saved it. 682 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . You have finished creating the initial skeleton of the open web wood floor truss. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. you can make sure the new family adapts to changes in geometry as expected before adding solid geometry to it. 28 In the Save As dialog. 26 Starting with one of the reference planes you added to define the center chase. Adding Dimensions and Constraints In this exercise. navigate to the folder of your choice. Repeat this step for the remaining extents so that your plan view resembles the image below. In the following exercise. By applying dimensions and constraints directly to the skeleton of the family. and click Save. “Adding Dimensions and Constraints” on page 682. NOTE You use this family for the remainder of this tutorial. you add dimensions and constraints to the to the skeleton. select the reference plane and adjust the extents similar to the image below. click Modify.

4 On the Design Bar.rfa. This ensures that changes to the chord width are distributed equally across the center reference plane. click . Wood Floor Truss. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Dimension. This tool is the aligned dimension tool. Dimension chord width 1 On the Design Bar. Adding Dimensions and Constraints | 683 . click Modify. It allows you to dimension between parallel lines. and click the EQ symbol when it displays. separate the overriding values by dragging the value controls as shown.Dataset Continue to use the dataset. After adding the dimension. TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings during this procedure. 5 Select the dimension you added in the previous step. 6 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 3 Select each of the horizontal reference planes and place the dimension to the left as shown. 2 On the Options Bar.

Add the depth dimension and equality constraint 8 In the Project Browser. Level. and the lower horizontal reference plane. 684 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques .7 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane. 9 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. double-click Front. Place the dimension as shown. You may need to use the TAB key to toggle the selection to the reference plane. NOTE The center horizontal reference plane overlaps the level line: Ref. the Center reference plane. click Dimension. and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. 10 Select the upper horizontal reference plane. 11 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane and move it to the left of the equality constrained dimension you added previously. place the dimension to the left as shown.

15 Add four dimensions as shown. Dimension chord thickness 14 On the right side of the model. add two dimensions as shown. 13 Add a dimension referring to the reference planes to the left and right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. place the dimension under the lines as shown and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness.Dimension and constrain the center chase width 12 Add a dimension referring to the three vertical reference planes in the center of the model. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness of the vertical members and the members that border the center chase. and place it below the dimension you added previously. Adding Dimensions and Constraints | 685 .

686 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . it becomes a parameter. There are many types of parameters and various ways to create them. Creating New Length Parameters In this exercise. ■ Dataset Continue to use the dataset. they allow you to “flex” the model in order to test your design. you label the dimensions to create instance and type parameters.rfa. If the component is something that is cut or otherwise extremely flexible. Level. The parameters that you create when designing a family are the same parameters used within a project to control the instance and type parameters of that family. In the next exercise. These parameters are the key to providing flexibility within a project. Create the chord width parameter 1 In the Project Browser. consider making it a type parameter. it is important to decide how much control over the component will be required after the component is loaded into a project. If the component has material that varies per component. Wood Floor Truss. you label the dimensions that you added in the previous exercise. consider making it an instance parameter. consider making it a type parameter. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. double-click Ref. “Creating New Length Parameters” on page 686. Things to consider when deciding “instance” or “type:” ■ ■ ■ If the component comes in standard sizes that must be maintained. When you design a new family. 2 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the chord as shown. When you label a dimension in the Family Editor. You should lean towards simplicity whenever possible. In addition. If the parameter controls something that usually remains constant by its nature.You have finished adding the dimensions and constraints that control how the truss skeleton adapts to changes. dimensions. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. under Floor Plans. and constraints as needed. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create new length parameters that control the basic dimensions of the floor truss. You choose whether to make it an instance or type parameter. you will add additional reference planes. Throughout the tutorial. consider making the material parameter an instance parameter. In this exercise.

Select Type. select Add parameter for Label. Creating New Length Parameters | 687 . under Elevations. select Family parameter. 6 Select the dimension on the left that refers to the depth of the truss. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. double-click Front. ■ Click OK. select Add parameter for Label. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. Under Parameter Data. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Click OK. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. enter Chord Width for Name.3 On the Options Bar. select Family parameter. 7 On the Options Bar. enter Depth for Name. Under Parameter Data. This indicates whether the parameter is a type or instance parameter. Select Type. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. Create truss depth parameter 5 In the Project Browser.

Create center chase width parameter
9 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the center chase interior.

10 On the Options Bar, select Add parameter for Label. 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Parameter Type, select Family parameter. Under Parameter Data, enter Center Chase Width for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Type. Click OK.

Create chord thickness parameter
12 On the right side of the model, select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the lower horizontal truss chord as shown.

13 On the Options Bar, select Add parameter for Label. 14 In the Parameter Properties dialog, specify the following:

Under Parameter Type, select Family parameter.

688 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

■ ■ ■ ■

Under Parameter Data, enter Chord Thickness for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Type. Click OK.

TIP You may need to drag the text label downward as shown.

Apply chord thickness label to other dimensions
15 On the right side of the model, select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the upper horizontal truss chord. 16 On the Options Bar, select Chord Thickness for Label.

17 Apply the Chord Thickness label to the vertical chords and the vertical members on the left and right side of the center chase as shown.

Creating New Length Parameters | 689

18 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. In the Family Types dialog, notice the labelled dimensions display under the list of parameters and under the group, Dimensions. When you load this family into a project, these parameters will be available within the Type Properties dialog for the beam. 19 Click Cancel. 20 On the File menu, click Save. 21 Proceed to the next exercise, “Flexing the Component Model” on page 690.

Flexing the Component Model
One of the most important steps in the process of creating a new parametric component is the flexing of the model. Flexing the model means to change parameter values, thus forcing the model to adapt to the changes. This is not limited to length parameters. If you add a new material parameter, you should also test it to make sure it works as expected. You should flex the model after any major change to the design.

You should flex a new family after:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Adding or modifying an element. Adding or modifying a parameter. Adding a new constraint. Nesting a component. Adding or modifying a parameter formula.

When you flex a family, you should always do it from the Family Types dialog, rather than by manually stretching or manipulating the objects within the family. When you change a parameter value and apply the change, this is the most accurate way of testing how the family will behave within a project.

690 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

In this exercise, you flex the model to test the various length parameters that you added in the previous exercise. Even though you have yet to add any model geometry to the family, it is important to verify that the reference lines adjust to changes as constraints are maintained. After you verify this, you can add the model geometry to the skeleton and be relatively certain that it will also flex as expected. Dataset Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Preparing the family for flexing
1 When flexing the model, you need to be able to see the model within the drawing area and also apply new values within the Family Types dialog:

Maximize the Revit window and adjust the zoom settings so the model is in one corner of the drawing area. When you open the Family Types dialog, you can drag it to the opposing corner. or

Reduce the Revit window and keep the model centered in the drawing area. When you open the Family Types dialog, you can drag it off the Revit window as shown.

Adjust your display using one of the two methods before opening the Family Types dialog. 2 On the Design Bar, click Family Types, and drag the dialog so that you can view the model.

Flex the truss depth
3 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 600 mm for Depth, and click Apply. Notice the depth of the truss adapts to the change in dimension value. Also notice the equality constraint spreads the additional depth evenly above and below the Ref. Level. In addition, notice that the reference planes marking the chord thickness adapted to the change in depth while maintaining their specified value. Verifying that the entire model adapts to changes and making sure nothing “breaks” is the essence of flexing.

Flexing the Component Model | 691

4 Enter 450 mm for Depth, 80 mm for Chord Thickness, 800 mm for Center Chase Width, and click Apply. Notice that the model adapts to all of the changes.

Reset parameters
5 In the Family Types dialog, reset the parameters back to their original values:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 300 mm for Depth. Enter 38 mm for Chord Thickness. Enter 400 mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply. Click OK.

When working within the Family Editor, you should always flex the design after you add new elements or modify the existing design in any way. 6 On the File menu, click Save. 7 Proceed to the next lesson, “Adding Solid Geometry” on page 693.

692 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Adding Solid Geometry
In this lesson, you add the solid geometry using extrusions for the chords and trimmable plywood ends. After creating the extrusions, you constrain them using a combination of locked alignments and labelled dimensions. After flexing the design, you load the truss into a project to verify that it works as designed.

Creating Solid Extrusions
In this exercise, you create the top and bottom chords of the truss. After adding the chords, you align and lock their position. Dataset Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Add chord extrusions
1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Left. 2 Zoom in around the center of the truss design.

3 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 4 In the Work Plane dialog, click Name, select Reference Plane: Member Left, and click OK. 5 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 6 On the Options Bar, click , and select Lock.

7 Select the four reference planes that border the top chord as shown.

Adding Solid Geometry | 693

Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. 8 On the Tools toolbar, click .

When using the Trim tool, click the part of the line you want to keep. 9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the top chord sketch as shown.

10 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 11 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

12 Select the four reference planes that border the bottom chord as shown. NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming, the lines will no longer overlap.

13 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the bottom chord sketch as shown.

694 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

15 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 16 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1. Notice the chord extrusions and the symbolic line. The chords need to be aligned and locked to the correct reference planes in order for them to flex with changes in the geometry.

17 On the File menu, click Save. 18 Proceed to the next exercise, “Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry” on page 695.

Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry
In this exercise, you add constraints to the chord extrusions and then flex the family to verify that it works as designed. Dataset Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Constrain the extrusion ends
1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 2 Enter SD; this is the keyboard shortcut for Shading with Edges. This makes the chord extrusions more visible within the view. 3 Select the chord extrusions.

4 Drag the right arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Right, as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.

Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry | 695

5 Drag the left arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Left, as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.

Flex the design
6 Prepare the view for flexing in the same way you did during the flexing exercise. You’ll want to set up your screen so you can see the model truss while the Family Types dialog is open. On the Design Bar, click Family Types.

7 In the Family Types dialog, enter 6000 for Length, and click Apply. Notice that the extrusions did not move or change their length. This is because the length dimension references the extreme left and right reference planes, not the member right or member left reference planes. Therefore, you must add a new constraint before flexing the length. 8 In the Family Types dialog, enter 3000 for Length, click Apply, and click OK.

Add a new dimension and constraint
9 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 10 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Left and the reference plane: Member Left as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value.

696 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

11 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Right and the reference plane: Member Right as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value.

In this particular case, adding this constraint to the model has no impact on how it works within a project. This is a two-point placement beam family that uses the member left and member right reference planes as the determining extents of this component. Later in this lesson, you load this family into a project to test how it works within a project environment.

Flex the length
12 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 13 In the Family Types dialog, enter 6000 for Length, and click Apply. Notice that the extrusions adjusted to the change in length. This tells you that the constraints on the extrusion ends are working.

TIP If one of the extrusion ends did not adjust as expected, use the Align tool and add the constraint. Afterwards, flex the model once again to make sure the fix works as expected. 14 Click OK.

Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry | 697

In a later exercise, you add the web members. Therefore, you need a truss long enough to add web arrays and do not need to return the truss back to its original length value.

Flex the chord width, depth, and thickness
15 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1. 16 Enter SD for Shading with Edges.

17 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 18 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 600mm for Depth. Enter 200mm for Chord Width. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. TIP When flexing, it is important to remember the original values so you can reset them afterwards. Therefore, try picking a method, such as doubling, that allows you to easily return to the original values.

Click Apply.

The chords should adjust to each of the new values. 19 Specify the beam values shown below:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 89mm for Chord Width. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness. Click Apply, and click OK.

20 On the File menu, click Save. 21 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Additional Solid Geometry” on page 698.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry
In this exercise, you add the extrusions for the truss ends and the center chase.

Dataset

698 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Add the center chase extrusions
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Ref. Level. 2 Zoom in on the center of the truss and select the model line that represents the beam stick symbol. 3 On the View Control Bar, click the Hide/Isolate control, and click Hide Element. This will make it easier to sketch the center chase extrusions. 4 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 6 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

7 Select the four reference planes that border the left, vertical member of the center chase as shown.

Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. 8 On the Tools toolbar, click .

9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the left, vertical member of the center chase sketch as shown.

10 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 11 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

12 Select the four reference planes that border the right, vertical member of the center chase as shown.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 699

NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming, the lines will no longer overlap.

13 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the center chase sketch as shown.

15 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 16 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 17 Zoom in on the center chase.

Align and lock the new extrusions
18 On the Tools menu, click Align. This next process is very important. The ends of the chase extrusions must be aligned and locked to the horizontal reference planes coincident with the interior edges of the chords. Although you can align and lock extrusion to extrusion, it is considered a best practice to align and lock to reference planes. 19 For the align-to reference, select the reference line on the top of the lower chord as shown. You may need to press TAB to toggle the selection options.

700 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

20 Click the bottom edge of one of the chase extrusions, and after the alignment, click the lock symbol to lock the alignment.

21 Align the top edge of the chase extrusions with the reference line coincident with the lower edge of the upper chord, and lock the alignment as shown.

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Flex the center chase
23 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 24 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 486mm for Depth. Enter 800mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, redo any problematic alignments and constraints. 25 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply, and click OK.

Clean up the view
26 Zoom to Fit.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 701

27 Clean up the view by moving the dimensions off to the side as shown. This will make subsequent work much easier.

Add the truss end extrusions
28 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-left corner as shown.

29 On the Options Bar, select Add Parameter for Label. 30 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter Trimmable End Length for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Instance. Click OK.

31 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-right corner of the view. 32 On the Options Bar, select Trimmable End Length for Label. 33 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 34 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length, click Apply, and click OK.

Sketch the right end extrusion
35 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Right. 36 Zoom around the truss elements. 37 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 38 In the Work Plane dialog, select Reference Plane: Member Right for Name, and click OK. 39 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 40 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

702 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

41 On the upper chord, select the lower horizontal reference plane; on the lower chord, select the upper horizontal reference plane. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch.

42 On the Options Bar, enter19mm for Offset. 43 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown.

44 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

45 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 703

46 On the Design Bar, click Extrusion Properties. 47 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, verify that 300mm is specified for the Extrusion End value, and click OK. 48 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Sketch the left end extrusion
49 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Left. 50 Zoom around the truss elements. 51 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 52 In the Work Plane dialog, select Reference Plane: Member Left for Name, and click OK. 53 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 54 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

55 On the upper chord, select the lower horizontal reference plane; on the lower chord, select the upper horizontal reference plane. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch. 56 On the Options Bar, enter 19mm for Offset. 57 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown.

704 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

58 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

59 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown.

60 On the Design Bar, click Extrusion Properties. 61 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, specify -300mm for the Extrusion End value, and click OK. NOTE This extrusion value must be negative in order to push the extrusion towards the center of the truss. 62 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Add alignment constraints
63 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front.

Although the truss ends line up with the reference planes controlling the length of the trimmable ends, they are not aligned and locked to those reference planes and would not pass a flex test. 64 Zoom in on the left end of the truss. 65 On the Tools menu, click Align. 66 Select the Member Left reference plane as the align-to point.

67 Select the left edge of the left end extrusion, and lock the alignment.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 705

68 Select the reference plane coincident with the right edge of the left end extrusion; this is the align-to point. 69 Select the right edge of the left end extrusion, and lock the alignment.

70 Repeat the previous five steps for the right end of the truss. Make adjustments to account for the right side. TIP When you finish the alignments, if you select the end extrusion, a lock displays on each side indicating the constraints to the reference planes. 71 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Flex the design
72 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 73 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 486mm for Depth. Enter 600mm for Trimmable End Length. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints. 74 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length. Click Apply, and click OK.

75 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1.

76 Save the Family. A new dataset is provided for you beginning with the next lesson. It is identical to the truss you have been designing. If you are comfortable with your design, you can continue using it in the next lesson. If you have experienced any errors or have deviated from the exercises in any way, you should close the file and begin with a fresh dataset. 77 Proceed to the next lesson, “Testing the Family in a Project” on page 707.

706 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Testing the Family in a Project
In this lesson, you load the family into a project to test it in a real-world environment. After you load it into the project, you add several beam instances and then modify the shape of the foundation to see how the beams adapt.

Loading a Family into a Project
In this exercise, you load the truss family into a project that consists of foundation walls, a sill, and a rim joist. NOTE Close any open families or projects. The truss family that you use in this lesson is identical to the truss you have created in the previous exercises. Although you could continue using the previous family, it is recommended that you use the new family in order to ensure consistency. Datasets

Open the truss family
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa.

Open the project file

Click File menu ➤ Open.

Testing the Family in a Project | 707

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_WWF1.rvt.

Load the truss family into the project
1 On the Window menu, clickm_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa. 2 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. The truss family is loaded directly into the only other open file. If you had multiple projects or families open, a dialog would have displayed asking for you to specify which projects you wanted to load the family into. Notice that the project file is now active. 3 In the Project Browser, expand Families, expand Structural Framing, and notice that the Wood Floor Truss_1 family has been loaded. 4 Proceed to the next exercise, “Testing a Family Instance in a Project” on page 708.

Testing a Family Instance in a Project
In this exercise, you add several instances of the truss family to the project, and then modify the project to see how the beams adapt. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you used in the previous exercise.

708 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

expand 3D Views. The rim joist was added as a beam. verify that Chain is not selected.Add beams to project 1 In the Project Browser. This project consists of foundation walls. 2 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. the truss family you loaded will interact with it as one beam does to another. TIP If the Structural tab of the Design Bar is not active. double-click Level 1.Southeast Isometric. select m_Wood Floor Truss_1. 4 In the Type Selector. a wood sill. therefore. under Floor Plans. a slab. right-click in the Design Bar. click Beam. Testing a Family Instance in a Project | 709 . expand Views. 6 Using point-to-point insertion. and a wood rim joist. and click Structural. add three vertical beams that snap to the rim joist at each end. and double-click 3D .

double-click 3D . Notice the wood truss sits on top of the sill and attaches to the rim joist as expected. not the wall or rim joist. under 3D Views.Southeast Isometric. 7 In the Project Browser. You do not need to be precise. double-click Level 1. you are merely testing the new floor truss to verify that it adapts to the changes. Try to make them approximately equidistant as shown. 9 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until the walls form an approximate square. 710 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . under Floor Plans.NOTE Do not be concerned with the exact location of the three beams. 8 In the Project Browser. NOTE Make sure you drag the grid line.

This should return the project to its original dimension. The project and family need to interact based on a consistent file name.10 In the Project Browser.Southeast Isometric. Testing a Family Instance in a Project | 711 . click Save as. 12 On the File menu. click Undo Drag. double-click 3D . under 3D Views. The center chase remained the same width while remaining centered. you nest the web components into the truss and create an array that adapts to changes in length. 11 On the Edit menu. ■ ■ The truss ends remained constant and adapted to the new beam length. 13 In the Save as dialog. Notice the wood truss adjusted to the changes. IMPORTANT Do not change the name of the family. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project with its existing name. In the next lesson.

15 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans.Edit a family from within a project 14 Select one of the wooden truss components. and create a formula controlled array to fill in the truss. 3 Select the symbolic line in the center of the truss. click Edit Family. the wood floor truss family becomes the active view. Level. Dataset Continue to use the datasets from the previous exercise. and click Hide Element. you nest two wooden web members into the truss. and open Metric\Families\m_Wood_Web. Working with Nested Subcomponents In this lesson. double-click Ref. 2 In the Project Browser. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family.rfa is the active file. 5 On the File menu. 712 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . “Working with Nested Subcomponents” on page 712. Because the family is already open. You then align and lock the web extents before applying a formula-controlled array. Load the wood web family ■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Hide/Isolate. 17 Proceed to the next lesson. 16 When prompted to open the truss family for editing.rfa. click Training Files. click Yes. Prepare the view for nesting 1 Make sure that m_Wood Floor Truss_1. This will aid in the placement of the wood web. Adding a Nested Component In this exercise. 4 On the View Control Bar. you nest wood web members into the floor truss.

Adding a Nested Component | 713 . Notice the model lines that surround the web component. Add two wood web components 6 On the Design Bar. This will make aligning the wood web easier. Do not select it. verify that m_Wood_Web: Wood Web is selected. 11 Place the cursor over the left wood web. click Modify. The geometry is driven by formula-based parameters that link to the host family. click Component. You will align the left web component first. 9 On the Design Bar. IMPORTANT Make sure you snap the center line of the web components to the center reference line of the truss. This will be accomplished in the next exercise when you link the nested parameter with the host parameter. Snap the center line of the web to the center reference plane of the truss. double-click Front. 8 Add two instances of the wood web component as shown. 7 In the Type Selector. you align the web panel using these lines rather than the extrusion edges. under Elevations. Also notice that the depth of the web members needs to be changed. select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the left center chase extrusion. 10 In the Project Browser. they are visible only when you place the cursor over the component. Place one wood web on each side of the center chase. this is the keyboard shortcut for Align. In the following steps.This family is a single extrusion as shown. The extrusion is aligned and locked to invisible model lines that make it easier to array within the truss. 13 For the align-to point. Align the nested web components 12 Enter AL. Leave a slight gap between the chase and the web.

click Modify. IMPORTANT Do not lock the alignment 15 Repeat the previous two steps to align the left edge of the right web component to the right edge of the center chase as shown. click Ref Plane. In addition.14 Select the right vertical model line of the left web component as shown. 18 Add two reference planes as shown. Place each reference plane just to the outside of the center of the web components. Each of these web components represents the starting point of the web arrays that you add later in this lesson. Add reference planes for array anchors 17 On the Design Bar. NOTE You do not have to align the top or bottom the web components because the height of the web members will adapt to the truss height after you create and link the parameters in the next exercise. 714 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 16 On the Design Bar. it is important to note that you should avoid adding unnecessary constraints.

25 Add the following two dimensions: Adding a Nested Component | 715 .19 On the Tools menu. 20 Select the center of the left web component as the align-to point. 22 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the web component. Dimension and label array anchors 24 On the Design Bar. you align the reference planes to the center of the web components. The reference plane you added in the previous step represents half the web width. click Align. In the steps that follow. click Dimension. 21 Select the reference plane that you added to the left of the web components center as shown. 23 Repeat the previous two steps to align and lock the right web component and the reference plane as shown.

■ In the next exercise. click Save As. 26 On the Design Bar. 716 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. 27 On the File menu. Creating Formula-controlled Parameters In this exercise. click Modify. Select the reference plane that is coincident with the right edge of the left web component and the outside edge of the center chase. ■ Right web dimension ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the right web component. You then link the nested web parameters to the new host parameters. you label these dimensions. length. click Family Types. click Add. 2 In the Family Types dialog. you add new parameters to control the web components. Place the dimension as shown. You also add a formula to the parameter in order to maintain the web position as the truss changes depth. navigate to the same directory in which you saved the project file and save this family there with its current name. 28 In the Save As dialog. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. “Creating Formula-controlled Parameters” on page 716.Left web dimension ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the left web component. Select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the right web component and the outside edge of the center chase. Create a new parameter for web depth 1 On the Design Bar. under Parameters. or the width of the center chase. Place the dimension as shown.

In addition. 5 Click OK. Select Type. enter Depth . under Constraints. click OK. In the Type Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. 4 In the Family Types dialog. click OK. TIP You can expand the width of the Family Types dialog to facilitate typing within the formula field. This formula ensures that the web depth will account for any changes in the chord thickness or truss depth.(Chord Thickness * 2) for the WebDepth Formula. Creating Formula-controlled Parameters | 717 . Select Length for Type. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. under Other. Click OK. and click OK. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. ensure you enter it exactly as it is named. click Edit/New. When you refer to another parameter within a formula. click the button to the right of the WebHeight value. Notice the web members are resized to fit more precisely between the chords. Select Common for Discipline. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebDepth for Name.3 In the Parameter Properties dialog. notice that “= “displays within the WebHeight button. click Modify. under Parameter Data. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. Link the nested component to the new parameter 6 Right-click the left web component. 12 On the Design Bar. NOTE Formulas are case sensitive. select WebDepth. notice the center of each nested web component is locked to the reference plane that bisects it.

Create new formula-controlled parameter for center chase
13 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 14 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:

Enter CC for Name. This parameter is primarily for convenience. It will use a formula to add the center chase width and the thickness of the two bordering chords.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Select Other for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Length for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

16 Under Other, enter Center Chase Width + (2*Chord Thickness) for CC Formula. After you enter the formula, the resulting value is displayed as an inactive field.

Create WebArrayLength formula-controlled parameter
17 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 18 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter WebArrayLength for Name. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Length for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

19 Under Constraints, enter (Length - (CC+300))/2 for WebArrayLength Formula. This formula subtracts the length of the center chase and its two bordering chords plus an additional 300mm before dividing it in two to specify the length of each array. The additional 300mm is to account for the ends, which must remain at least 150mm long.

Create WebArrayNum formula-controlled parameter
20 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 21 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter WebArrayNum for Name. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Integer for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

22 Under Constraints, enter WebArrayLength/(2*WebDepth) for WebArrayNum Formula. 23 Click OK.

718 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Add parameter to anchor web array
24 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the left web as shown.

25 On the Options Bar, select Add parameter for Label. 26 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter Webhalflength for Name. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Instance. Click OK.

27 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the right web. 28 On the Options Bar, select Webhalflength for Label. 29 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Add formula for Webhalflength
30 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 31 Under Constraints, enter (WebArrayLength/WebArrayNum)/2 for Webhalflength Formula. 32 Click OK. Notice the location of the web components has adapted to the formula.

Creating Formula-controlled Parameters | 719

Associate web component parameters
33 Right-click the left web component, and click Element Properties. 34 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 35 In the Type Properties dialog, under Other, click the button to the right of the WebArrayLength value. 36 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select WebArrayLength, and click OK. In the Type Properties dialog, the button next to the WebArrayLength value should have an equals sign within it. 37 In the Type Properties dialog, click OK. 38 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 39 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 40 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1.

Because you have added and constrained new components, it is very important that you flex the model to ensure the nested components and the formulas that controls them work as expected. It is especially important to flex the model before arraying the truss so that you don’t multiply any existing problems.

Flex the design
41 Adjust the view so you can flex the truss while in the Family Types dialog. 42 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 43 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 686mm for Depth. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints.

44 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness.

720 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Click Apply, and click OK.

45 On the File menu, click Save. 46 Proceed to the next exercise, “Arraying Nested Subcomponents” on page 721.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents
In this exercise, you array the nested web components, add alignment constraints, and link the arrays to the WebArrayNum parameter. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise.

Array the left web component
1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 2 Select the nested web component left of the center chase.

3 On the Edit menu, click Array. Creating an array requires two basic steps. First, you specify the move start point; then you specify the move end point. You must use precision when arraying because any error is multiplied as the array grows. 4 On the Options Bar, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that Group and Associate is selected. Enter 3 for Number. Select 2nd for Move to. Select Constrain.

5 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents | 721

6 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.

7 Press ENTER to complete the array. 8 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Array the right nested web component
9 Select the nested web component right of the center chase. 10 On the Edit menu, click Array. 11 On the Options Bar, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that Group and Associate is selected. Enter 3 for Number. Select 2nd for Move to. Select Constrain.

12 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. 13 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.

14 Press ENTER to complete the array. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 16 Zoom out to view the truss.

Align and lock the arrays
17 Zoom in on the left array of web components. 18 On the Tools menu, click Align.

722 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

19 In the left array, place the cursor over the boundary between the two left web components until the reference highlights, then select the line twice.

Because there are two overlapping lines at this location, you are aligning the two bordering web components to each other. 20 Click the lock symbol to keep the web components locked at their edges.

21 Within the left array, align and lock the two right web components.

22 Within the right array, align and lock the two boundaries between the three web components. Use the same techniques as you did in the previous three steps. NOTE This step is very important. If you do not lock the edges of the array, the web components overlap each other when you change the depth of the truss.

Label the arrays
23 Select the middle web component of the left array. 24 Notice the array line displays above the components with the array value. Place the cursor over the array line as shown and select it.

NOTE Do not select the array value. 25 On the Options Bar, select WebArrayNum for Label. 26 Select the middle web component of the right array. 27 Select the array line over the web components on the right. 28 On the Options Bar, select WebArrayNum for Label. 29 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents | 723

30 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss.

Notice the arrays appear to be too long. This is because earlier in the tutorial, you added a dimension to lock the Member Left and Member Right reference plane to the outer Left and Right reference planes. The primary reason for this was to allow for flexing the length. 31 Zoom around the left side of the truss. 32 Select the dimension between reference plane Left and Member Left as shown.

33 Delete the dimension. 34 On the Tools menu, click Align. 35 Select the reference plane, Left, as the align-to point. 36 Select the reference plane, Member Left, and lock the alignment as shown.

Notice the end of the array still overlaps the trimmable end. You will fix this in later steps by changing the parameter value.

724 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

NOTE With most beam families, you would not want to align and lock these two reference planes; however, in this case, the wood floor truss normally sits on a sill bordering a rim joist. Therefore, this solution has little, if any, significant impact. 37 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 38 Zoom in around the right side of the truss. 39 Delete the dimension between reference plane Right and Member Right. 40 Align and lock reference plane Right and Member Right.

41 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss.

Change trimmable end length value
42 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 43 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 150mm for Trimmable End Length. 44 Click Apply, and click OK. Notice the web arrays fit within the truss without overlapping the ends.

Flex the design
45 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1, and prepare the view for flexing. 46 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 47 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 686mm for Depth. Enter 12000mm for Length. Enter 900mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents | 725

TIP When flexing a complex model such as this, you should flex the model in as many ways as possible to verify it is working correctly; however, for training and time purposes, these steps have been reduced. 48 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 6000mm for Length. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply, and click OK.

You have completed the design of the primary components of the truss. 49 On the File menu, click Save. 50 Proceed to the next exercise, “Reloading a Family into a Project” on page 726.

Reloading a Family into a Project
In this exercise, you reload the truss family into the project. You then increase the distance between the foundation walls to see how the truss adapts to the changes in length.

726 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. In addition to the truss family, the project, m_WWF1.rvt, should be open. Close any other open projects.

Reload the truss into the project.
1 Verify that the truss family is active and the 3D View, View 1, displays. 2 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 3 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the project file becomes active and the beam has updated with the latest changes.

4 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 5 Drag Grid 2 downward until the shape of the building footprint is almost square. 6 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click 3D - Southeast Isometric. Notice the truss has adapted to the changes.

Reloading a Family into a Project | 727

7 On the Edit menu, click Undo Drag. 8 Save and close the project file and the family file. In the next lesson, you begin with a new dataset which is identical to both of these files. 9 Proceed to the next lesson, “Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters” on page 728.

Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters
In this lesson, you create and apply subcategories and materials. You then create a parameter to specifically control material application.

Creating and Applying Subcategories
In this exercise, you create new subcategories within the truss family. You then reload the family into the project and apply a material to the subcategory. Datasets
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_WWF2.rvt.

728 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

In this dataset, the truss was added to a beam system that occupies approximately half the building footprint. In addition, four instances of the floor truss were added to the other end of the structure.

Apply Object Styles
1 Zoom in around beam system. Notice no material has been applied to the truss. Within the family, the material values were set to By Category by default.

2 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 3 In the Object Styles dialog, verify that the Model Objects tab is selected, and expand the category Structural Framing. Notice that the Structural Framing category and all of the subcategories have no material value defined. In addition, notice that the subcategories do not apply to the wood floor truss that you have designed. 4 On the Structural Framing category line, click in the material field until the button displays as shown.

Creating and Applying Subcategories | 729

5 Click the button that displays in the Structural Framing Material field. 6 In the Materials dialog, click Wood - Timber for Name, and click OK. 7 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK. Notice the Wood - Timber material has been applied to all Structural Framing components.

When you apply a material to the Structural Framing category, all subcomponents of that category are assigned that material. If there was a metal beam in this building model, it would also have the wood material applied to it. If you create subcategories as you design in the Family Editor, you have more control over component visibility within a project. 8 On the Edit menu, click Undo Object Styles.

Create subcategories within the truss family
9 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. 10 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 11 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 12 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 13 In the Object Styles dialog, under Modify Subcategories, click New. 14 In the New Subcategory dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss for Name, and click OK.

Apply material to subcategory
15 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss subcategory, and click the button to open the Materials dialog. 16 In the Materials dialog, click Duplicate. 17 In the New Material dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss, and click OK. 18 In the Materials dialog, under AccuRender, click .

19 In the Material Library dialog, navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine, Yellow, select Natural,No Gloss for Name, and click OK. 20 In the Materials dialog, click OK. 21 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK.

Apply the subcategory to the truss components
22 Draw a pick box around the entire truss. 23 On the Options Bar, click .

24 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Other, and click OK. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected.

730 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

25 On the Options Bar, click

.

26 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, select Wood Floor Truss for Subcategory, and click OK. 27 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Apply a subcategory to the nested web components
28 Place the cursor over one of the arrayed web components, press TAB to toggle to the web component and click to select it. 29 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 30 Click Yes to open the family for editing. The web component family opens in a 3D view.

31 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 32 In the Object Styles dialog, under Modify Subcategories, click New. 33 In the New Subcategory dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss - Webs for Name, and click OK. By creating a separate subcategory for the web components, you can apply a different material to all web components when using this truss within a project.

Creating and Applying Subcategories | 731

34 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss - Webs subcategory, and click the button to open the Materials dialog. 35 In the Materials dialog, click Duplicate. 36 In the New Material dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss - Webs, and click OK. 37 In the Materials dialog, under AccuRender, click .

38 In the Material Library dialog, navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine, Yellow, select Natural,No Gloss for Name, and click OK. 39 In the Materials dialog, click OK. 40 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK. 41 Select the web extrusion. 42 On the Options Bar, click .

43 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, select Wood Floor Truss - Webs for Subcategory, and click OK.

Reload web component into truss family
44 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 45 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa, and click OK. 46 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes.

Reload truss into project
47 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 48 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_WWF2.rvt, and click OK. 49 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the new object subcategory styles are applied to the truss components.

50 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 51 In the Object Styles dialog, under Categories, expand Structural Framing.

732 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Notice the two new subcategories are listed. You can change the style of only the wood truss components without impacting other structural framing components. 52 Click OK. 53 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics. 54 In the Visibility Graphics dialog, under Visibility, expand Structural Framing, clear Wood Floor Truss Webs, and click OK. Notice the web extrusions no longer display; however, the stick symbols continue to display.

55 On the Edit menu, click Undo Visibility/Graphics. 56 On the File menu, click Save As. 57 In the Save as dialog, navigate to a folder of your preference and save the project with the current name. 58 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Material Parameters” on page 733.

Creating Material Parameters
In this exercise, you add a new material parameter that allows you to specify a material for each truss instance. Dataset Continue to use the dataset that you saved in the previous exercise.

Open truss family for editing
1 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. 2 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing.

Create material parameter
4 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 5 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 6 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter Floor Truss Material for Name. Select Materials and Finishes for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Material for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

7 In the Family Types dialog, notice the default material is By Category.

Creating Material Parameters | 733

In this case, do not assign a material to the parameter. When reloaded into a project, this component will continue to use the material assigned to the subcategory by default. This material parameter allows you to assign a material on an instance parameter. 8 Click OK.

Link truss extrusions to material parameter
9 Draw a pick box around the entire truss. 10 On the Options Bar, click .

11 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Wood Floor Truss, and click OK. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected. 12 On the Options Bar, click .

13 In the Element Properties dialog, under Materials and Finishes, click the button to the right of the Material value field. 14 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select Floor Truss Material, and click OK. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 16 Place the cursor over one of the web components, press TAB, and select the component. 17 On the Options Bar, click .

18 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 19 In the Type Properties dialog, under Other, click the button to the right of the WebMaterial value field. 20 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select Floor Truss Material, and click OK. 21 Click OK twice. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Reload truss into project
23 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_WWF2.rvt, and click OK. 25 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed. 26 Select a floor truss that is not part of the beam system. 27 On the Options Bar, click .

28 In the Element Properties dialog, under Materials and Finishes, click the Floor Truss Material field and click the button that displays. 29 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Steel for Name, and click OK. 30 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 31 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Notice the material is applied only to the selected beam.

734 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

32 On the File menu, click Save. 33 On the File menu, click Close. 34 Close any open files. You can save the open files if you wish. In the next lesson, a new dataset is supplied. 35 Proceed to the next lesson, “Controlling Component Visibility” on page 735.

Controlling Component Visibility
In this lesson, you add controls to specify the views in which each element displays and at what detail level.

Assigning Detail Level and View Controls
In this exercise, you designate the display of elements in specific views and at specific detail levels.

Datasets
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_WWF3.rvt.

Change detail levels
1 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Coarse.

Controlling Component Visibility | 735

Notice the rim joist no longer displays. However, notice the floor truss has not changed appearance, because you have yet to assign a detail level to each of the elements within the truss family. Currently within the truss, all elements display at all times in all views.

2 Select a floor truss. 3 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 4 Click Yes to open the family for editing.

Apply detail level controls to web components
5 Select a web component. 6 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 7 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 8 Select the web extrusion. 9 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 10 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under View Specific Display, clear Plan/RCP. Clear Left/Right. Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

11 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 12 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa, and click OK. 13 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed.

Assign detail level to center chase extrusions
14 Select the center chase extrusions. 15 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 16 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under View Specific Display, clear Plan/RCP. Clear Left/Right. Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

736 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Assign detail level to truss ends
17 Select the end extrusions. 18 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 19 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Under View Specific Display, clear Plan/RCP. Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

Assign detail level to truss chords
20 Select the truss chords. 21 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■

Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

Reload truss into project
23 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_WWF3.rvt, and click OK. 25 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice that the floor truss solid geometry is not displayed.

26 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Medium. Notice the floor truss solid geometry is displayed. 27 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 28 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Coarse.

Assigning Detail Level and View Controls | 737

Notice the symbolic representation of the beams.

29 On the File menu, click Save As. 30 In the Save As dialog, navigate to your preferred location and save the project with the current name. 31 Proceed to the next lesson, “Creating Component Types” on page 738.

Creating Component Types
In this lesson, you create multiple floor truss types to speed up the design process when working in a project. In the final exercise, you create a conditional formula that adjusts the truss depth based on the truss length.

Creating Multiple Component Types
In this exercise, you create multiple types for a 89x38 truss and a 64x38 truss. Although you can change the parameters of a truss within a project, creating predefined types can speed up the design process.

Open the truss family for editing
1 Select a floor truss. 2 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing.

Create new types
4 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 5 In the Family Types dialog, under Family Types, click New. 6 In the New dialog, enter 89x38 for Name, and click OK. 7 In the Family Types dialog, under Family Types, click New. 8 In the New dialog, enter 64x38 for Name, and click OK. 9 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 64mm for Chord Width, and click Apply. Notice the chord changes width. 10 Select 89x38 for Name, and click Apply. The truss returns to its original designed value. NOTE When creating new components, create types for those most frequently used in your projects. 11 Click OK.

738 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

“Creating Conditional Formulas” on page 739. Notice the two beam types. 22 On the File menu. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. Open the truss for editing 1 Select a floor truss. click Beam. under 3D Views. Creating Conditional Formulas In this exercise. 16 In the Type Selector. you create a conditional formula that changes the depth automatically as the truss increases in length. and click Yes. 19 Add a beam next to the 64x38. click Family Types. click Modify. 350. Load new types into the project 12 On the Design Bar. select 64x38. You are going to enter a conditional formula that follows this basic rule: IF ( <condition>. select 89x38. click Save. 14 In the Reload Family dialog. 400. 18 In the Type Selector. 17 Add a beam in the center of the open space. click Load into Projects. if(Length < 9000. 20 On the Design Bar. 400))) 6 Click Apply. Adding a conditional formula 4 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Load into Projects dialog. 15 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 286. 2 On the Options Bar. if(Length < 7500. 23 Proceed to the final exercise.Southeast Isometric.rvt. double-click 3D . select m_WWF3. <result-if-true>. select Override parameter values of existing types.TIP You can also use new types to flex the model. enter the follow formula for Depth: if(Length < 6600. and click OK. click Edit Family. 21 In the Project Browser. <result-if-false>) 5 In the Family Types dialog. under Dimensions. Creating Conditional Formulas | 739 .

17 Close any open files. and click OK. 16 On the File menu. under Floor Plans. enter 6000 for length. select m_WWF3. double-click Level 1. select Override parameter values of existing types. Regeneration time and overall performance can be affected by over-designed families. you probably noticed a change in the amount of time the view needed to regenerate. 10 In the Load into Projects dialog. Load the truss into the project 9 On the Design Bar. You have completed this tutorial. and click Apply.Flex the design 7 In the Family Types dialog. double-click 3D . click Apply. 740 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 13 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until it is between 8000-9000mm from Grid 1. 15 Notice the change in floor truss depth.rvt. Test the conditional formula within a project 12 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 8 In the Family Types dialog. click Save. 11 In the Reload Family dialog. NOTE You would have to change the depth of the sill and rim joist to accommodate this change. click Load into Projects. Notice the truss depth increases. enter 8000 for length. under 3D Views. and click Yes. IMPORTANT When you changed the width of the building footprint. 14 In the Project Browser.Southeast Isometric.

Using Advanced Features 7 741 .

742 | Chapter 18 Using Advanced Features .

They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. For example. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. Like walls. Like windows. you need to change the length of the wall. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. To switch panel types. To change grids. you need to select a panel. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. panel. you select the grid. and they are not windows. 743 . and you can change these elements individually. and mullions.Curtain Systems 18 Curtain systems are not walls. grid lines. Unlike windows. This affects the entire curtain system. or you can use a specific curtain system command. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. to resize the system.

Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser.Flat Curtain System In this lesson. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. click Wall. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. 4 In the Type Selector. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. 744 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . click Training Files. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and double-click Ground Floor. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans.rvt. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. you create a curtain system using the wall command.

8 In the Project Browser. and double-click Southeast Isometric.6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. 7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. Creating an Entrance | 745 . 10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views.

and click (Properties). 746 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. top and base attachments. Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. and room bounding. For Top Offset. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. enter 1200. you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. using curtain grids. Click OK. select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint. top constraint.11 Select the curtain system. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. under Floor Plans. 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel. double-click GROUND FLOOR.

15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. right-click Elevation 1 . Creating an Entrance | 747 . or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. 20 In the drawing area. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. and click Rename. select the 3 grid lines you just placed.a. and resize the crop boundary as shown. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. click Curtain Grid. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. and SEVENTH FLOOR. click Elevation. 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. select SECOND FLOOR. and click OK. click Modify. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. while pressing CTRL. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. and click OK. THIRD FLOOR. and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. 23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. SIXTH FLOOR. FIFTH FLOOR. 29 In the Select Levels dialog. FOURTH FLOOR. 26 While pressing CTRL. 25 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Project Browser.

30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. Click to create a vertical grid. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. 33 On the Design Bar. one larger than the other. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. click Curtain Grid. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. click Modify. Click to place another grid line. 748 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights.The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels.

Creating an Entrance | 749 . and then select the segment above it. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. and on the Options Bar. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. click Add or Remove Segments. Instead of using the Door command. The two segments are removed. you add a doorway to the curtain system. The segment line style changes to dashed. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view.Next.

40 On the Options Bar.38 Using the same method. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. click Curtain Grid. 750 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . select One Segment. 42 Place dimensions as shown. TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. 39 On the Design Bar. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. and lock them.

44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. click in any white space to exit the editor. and open Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. The panel changes to a double door. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. click Modify. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). 52 On the Type Selector. click Training Files. You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it.rfa. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added.43 Delete the dimensions. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. Use the following image as a guide. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. Next. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. Creating an Entrance | 751 . 54 On the Design Bar.

55 In the Project Browser. click . and click Wireframe. They are part of the curtain panel category. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. on the new curtain system you added. click System Panel : Solid. click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. under Elevations. Next. 60 On the Type Selector. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. 61 With the panel still selected. 65 On the View Control Bar. 56 In the Project Browser. Now. double-click Entrance Elevation. 62 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. click . double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. 57 On the View Control Bar. not as curtain panels. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. This changes the graphics style of the view. 63 Click OK twice. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level.These panels schedule as doors. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. The glazed panels display in blue. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. 752 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . and the solid panels display in white.

select Grid Line Segment. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. 68 On the File menu. 2 On the Options Bar. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress.rvt. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Mullion. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. select Entire Grid Line.66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 753 . 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. click Save As.

Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Two mullion join controls display. select All Empty Segments. there are a few that you do not want.6 On the Options Bar. because their width reduces the size of the doors. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. 754 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . You are going to change some mullion joins. 11 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. so you remove them next. however. 9 Delete the mullions below them. 12 Click the lower mullion join control. Changing mullion joins 10 On the View Control Bar.

you add a curtain system using the wall command. Curved Curtain System In this lesson. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. Finally. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. 14 On the Design Bar. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. 15 In the Project Browser. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. Curved Curtain System | 755 . click Modify. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. double-click Southeast Isometric. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. 16 Save the file. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. 13 Click the top mullion control. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. you can also right-click. Finally.The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion.

5 Click . under Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. 9 Place the second point at the lower right side. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. for Top Constraint. (Arc passing through three points). 756 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . click Wall. 4 In the Type Selector. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 7 On the Options Bar. 10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. Click OK. For Top Offset. enter 1200.

Next. 15 Zoom in to the cylinder. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. eighths. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. double-click East. you change some panels in the system. click Curtain Grid. Next. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. Adding a Curved Curtain System | 757 . and then sixteenths. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. you place grids on the system. You are going to use one of these snaps points.The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. under Elevations. 16 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Project Browser. 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. Divide the halves into quarters.

rft.Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. 7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection. and on the Options Bar. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. select the bottom layer of panels. 18 In the Type Selector. double-click Exterior. 4 On the Design Bar. Remember to click elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise.300mm. 5 On the Design Bar. select Basic Wall: Generic . enter 100. to filter out all other 19 Save the file. under Elevations. 3 In the Project Browser. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 6 On the Options Bar. 758 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . click . for Depth. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. click Lines. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Curtain Wall Panel. click Training Files.

rfa. click Finish Sketch. and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. All fourth floor panels are selected. 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted. click Model Lines. and save the family as Curtain Panel . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 759 .rfa family. All the panels change to the custom panel you created.Pattern. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close.Pattern. under Floor Plans. . clear Chain. and return to the project file. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 21 In the Type Selector. and click . 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 14 On the Design Bar. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click Modify. 11 On the Design Bar.8 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Options Bar. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. 19 In the Project Browser. 18 Load the Curtain Panel . 9 Select the extrusion. select Curtain Panel . select Glass.Pattern. double-click FOURTH FLOOR. and click OK. for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. right-click.

All the panels change to the solid panel. 27 Highlight a panel in the arc. The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. 23 Right-click. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. select System Panel . All fifth floor panels are selected. and then click (Dynamically Modify View). and click Flip Orientation. 24 On the View toolbar. The finished arc wall should look like the following image. double-click FIFTH FLOOR. under Floor Plans. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. 29 Save the file. 28 In the Type Selector. 25 Hold SHIFT and spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise.Solid. right-click. click (Default 3D View).22 Select the curved arc curtain wall. 26 In the Project Browser. 760 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems .

1 In the Project Browser. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 761 . under Elevations. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. click Training Files. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. click Lines. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. For vertical mullions. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog. click ■ ■ For Sides. for Profile Usage. and click OK. and select it. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. select Mullion. click Mullion.rft. If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. . 9 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Polygon). except at the GROUND FLOOR level. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. enter 8. 10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Select Radius. double-click East. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. Click again to specify the ending point. and enter 50 mm for the radius.

double-click Southeast Isometric. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 30 Click . 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. 17 On the Design Bar. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. clear Fine. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. click Modify. 27 In the Project Browser. click Detail Component. 29 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. clear Coarse and Medium. 762 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . 20 Select the detail component. After the new profile is loaded. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.rfa. and click OK. 13 On the Options Bar. click Mullion. and open Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Cylinder Mullion . select Circular Mullion for Family. click Training Files. and return to the project file. 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion. and spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. and click Visibility. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. 28 Click . 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion.rfa family.11 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. click Visibility.rfa. 31 In the Element Properties dialog. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 19 On the Design Bar. under 3D Views. and click OK. it can be added as a mullion type.detail. click Modify. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.

so you remove the unwanted ones. and then apply those custom elements to the system. and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. select All Empty Segments. In this lesson. 37 On the Options Bar. 41 Highlight a mullion in the arc. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. 40 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 38 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. click Modify. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 763 . 35 Under Construction. make custom curtain panels and mullions. click Duplicate. You have placed more mullions than you want. 42 Press DELETE. 39 On the Design Bar. select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. and click OK. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 34 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. 36 Click OK twice. for Profile. 43 Save the file.32 Click Edit/New. right-click. you learned to create a curved curtain system.

2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. 9 On the Design Bar. double-click TOP OF ROOF. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. a storefront system. 1 In the Project Browser. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. and you can click to select them all. click Pick Walls. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. select System Family: Sloped Glazing. Click OK.Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. enter 600. TIP To chain select all the walls. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 764 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. 7 On the Design Bar. and a ruled curtain system. 4 On the Design Bar. click Roof Properties. click Finish Roof. and press TAB. under Floor Plans. select Defines slope. All the inside faces highlight. 5 On the Options Bar. 8 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Family. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson.

click Mullion. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. 17 On the View Control Bar. Storefront System | 765 . under Floor Plans. select Entire Grid Line. click Modify. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. double-click GROUND FLOOR. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 18 Save the file. double-click Southeast Isometric. Storefront System In this exercise. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 11 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. 16 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 12 Zoom in to the skylight.10 In the Project Browser. 1 In the Project Browser. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar.

6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. 4 In the Type Selector. click Wall. select Unconnected for Height. 7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and enter 2400. 766 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems .You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. 5 On the Options Bar.

and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 2400 mm. enter 10200 mm. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. To see how the grid layout is defined. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. 12 Select the storefront wall. The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance. click Modify.The curtain wall cuts the original wall. This specifies an exact length for the wall. This means that the panel heights will be exactly 2400 mm. 9 On the Design Bar. which is specified in the type. double-click Southeast Isometric. 10 In the Project Browser. click Edit/New. and click . 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters. the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing. under 3D Views. 8 Click the temporary dimension. even if the wall height changes. For this wall. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall. and press ENTER. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. Storefront System | 767 . and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 1524 mm.

select All Empty Segments. 20 Save the file. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. see the Revit Architecture help. you find Number. or end. for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading.The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. double-click Southeast Isometric. under 3D Views. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 19 Select a curtain grid. center. 16 Click OK. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. click Mullion. Angle. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. In this exercise. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. 18 On the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. By setting the Angle value. 768 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . Justification. and Offset. enter 15. the Number is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern.

making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. Curtain System by Lines | 769 . 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. and highlight the model line. 6 Click the highlighted line. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab.3 On the View Control Bar. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level.

Next. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. quarters. click Curtain Grid. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 11 Click OK. A panel between the 2 lines is created. 770 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. 9 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and click . 10 Select the panel. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. 13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps.8 Select the highlighted line. and then eighths. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system.

15 Highlight a top level glazed panel. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. right-click. 18 Save the file. 16 In the Type Selector. Curtain System by Lines | 771 . select System Panel : Solid. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system.This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. and then eighths. Finally. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. quarters. embed a curtain system inside another wall. and define a ruled curtain system. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system.

772 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems .

you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2008. In addition.Roofs 19 In this tutorial. gutters. 773 . you learn how to add fascia. and soffits to the roofs that you create.

Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and mansard roofs. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. Creating an Extruded Roof In this exercise. and click OK. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In this lesson. expand Views (all). select Name. and open Metric\m_Roofs. Before you can sketch the roof profile. 5 In the Go To View dialog. expand Floor Plans. you learn to create several different types of roofs. including hip. gable. and double-click Level 1. 4 Click OK. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway.rvt. click Training Files. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. You do not need to create the work plane. 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Creating Roofs In this lesson. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. shed. 774 | Chapter 19 Roofs .

you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. 9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. and so on). 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. click Ref Plane. click the blue square on the witness line. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. centerline. Creating an Extruded Roof | 775 . 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls.The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof.

sketch the roof profile. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar.11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. 776 | Chapter 19 Roofs . Next. select Chain. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane.

Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. 16 On the View toolbar. 17 On the Tools toolbar. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. Creating an Extruded Roof | 777 . The roof should resemble the following illustration. click . Next. 18 Select the edge of the roof. and then select the exterior face of the wall. click . press TAB. click to display the model. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. 19 On the Tools toolbar. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls.The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction.

you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. expand Sections (Type 1). click Modify. “Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint” on page 778. click Attach for Top/Base. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise.The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Section 1. 24 On the Options Bar. press CTRL. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. 26 On the View toolbar. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. 778 | Chapter 19 Roofs . and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. 21 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. and select the second wall. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. click to view the completed breezeway roof in the model.

and enter 600 for Overhang. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 2 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.rvt. By default. and on the Options Bar. click Modify.To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. 6 On the Options Bar. 5 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. Next. click . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 4 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. select both slope definition lines. m_Roofs. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. click Pick Walls. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 779 . clear Defines slope. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. verify that Defines slope is selected. 9 Press CTRL. 7 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint.

Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. clear Defines slope. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. 780 | Chapter 19 Roofs . After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. under Dimensions. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and double-click Level 3. “Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint” on page 780. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. 1 In the Project Browser. and enter 600 for Overhang. and click OK. click Finish Roof. When you complete the roof. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans.rvt. expand Views (all). click Pick Walls.10 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 When you see the informational dialog. 11 On the Design Bar. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click to view the gable roof and attached walls in the model. m_Roofs. 13 On the View toolbar.

sketch the chimney opening. 8 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. select Defines Slope. add new slope lines to the roof. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. 9 Using automatic snaps. click . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 781 . 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. and then verify that a dashed green line displays to the exterior side of the walls. 10 On the View menu.5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. press TAB. click Modify. 13 On the Options Bar. Next. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. 6 Click to select all the walls.

5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. expand Floor Plans. Verify that a dashed green line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. “Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint” on page 782. click to view the new roof in the model. click Pick Walls. m_Roofs. Next. 782 | Chapter 19 Roofs . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. click Finish Roof. 17 When you see the informational dialog. 18 On the View toolbar. close the roof sketch. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and enter 600 for Overhang. and double-click Level 2. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. select Defines Slope. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. select Defines slope. expand Views (all). The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.15 On the Options bar. 3 On the Options Bar.

Next. select the left vertical slope definition line. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. click to display the model. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 11 To trim the first line segment. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. Next. click Lines. 16 On the View toolbar. clear Defines Slope. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. 10 On the Options Bar. using the following illustration for guidance. click Roof Properties. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 783 . and click . The Element Properties dialog is displayed. click . and click OK. 14 Under Constraints. 7 On the Options Bar. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level.6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 9 On the Tools toolbar. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level.

24 Select the edge of the hip roof.17 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to view the back of the house. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. join the two remaining walls to the roof. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. click Modify. 784 | Chapter 19 Roofs . Next. 23 On the Tools toolbar. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. 21 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. click . Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. 18 On the Design Bar.

The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. 6 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. press TAB. and enter 300 for Overhang.rvt. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. expand Views (all). 25 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. clear Defines Slope. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. Verify that a green dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 785 . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Pick Walls. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. m_Roofs. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and double-click Level 2. “Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint” on page 785. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. enter 0 for Overhang. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

you add a slope-defining line. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 8 On the Tools toolbar. and click OK. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. to use the Dynamic View tool to rotate the model. select Defines slope. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. click Roof Properties. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines.7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 786 | Chapter 19 Roofs . Next. 19 Click 20 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. 10 To trim the first line segment. click Modify. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. and press ENTER. click . 16 Under Constraints. Next. select the left vertical roof line. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. 9 On the Options Bar.

expand Views (all). you add slope arrows to the shed roof. 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 787 . click . expand Views (all). 4 In the Project Browser. and enter 600 for Offset.21 Proceed to the next exercise. click Modify. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. verify is selected. you need to add two reference planes. expand Floor Plans. click Ref Plane. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. add two new slope arrows. Next. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. and double-click Level 2. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. 9 On the Tools menu. Next. 5 On the View menu. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. 12 On the Options Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and double-click 3D. 7 On the Options Bar. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. click Split Walls and Lines. 14 On the Options Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. click Slope Arrow. To help locate the position of each split. expand 3D Views.rvt. clear Defines Slope. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Before you can add slope arrows. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. m_Roofs. 11 On the Design Bar. “Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof” on page 787. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. 3 On the Options Bar. 2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house.

and move the cursor to place the arrow. select both slope arrows. and double-click Garage Roof. select Defines Slope. select Slope for Specify. . 23 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. 20 Under Dimensions. expand Floor Plans. click Edit. 788 | Chapter 19 Roofs . click Finish Roof to complete the roof. When you sketch a hip roof. and then click OK. Begin the tail at the right reference plane. When eave heights differ. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. enter 500 for Rise/1000.15 to add the second slope arrow. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. 1 In the Project Browser. ■ 16 Repeat steps 13 . 3 On the Options Bar. 18 Press CTRL. the adjacent eave heights must align. click Modify. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. expand Views (all). 5 On the Options Bar. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps.rvt. and click 19 Under Constraints. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. “Aligning Roof Eaves” on page 788. m_Roofs. 4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 22 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise.15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: ■ Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

under Dimensions. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. click Finish Roof. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. click . on the Options Bar.6 With the two gable end lines selected. 12 On the Design Bar. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 10 On the Options Bar. select a method to align the eaves. When aligning eaves. Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click to display the model. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. click Align Eaves. and click OK. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. The eave lines display with a dimension. and save the exercise file with a unique name. on the File menu. 13 On the View toolbar. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. 14 If you want to save your changes. Creating a Mansard Roof | 789 . click Save As. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. “Creating a Mansard Roof” on page 789. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. Next. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. and double-click North. click .rvt.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click to display the model. 3 Select the roof and. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. under Constraints. 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Elevations. expand Views (all). click Training Files. 6 On the View toolbar. 790 | Chapter 19 Roofs . click Modify. 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. on the Options Bar.

expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 3. After you create a roof. click Save As.Next. press TAB. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. and then select Defines slope. and Soffits | 791 . gutters. and soffits in Revit Architecture. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Gutters. 14 On the Options Bar. 17 On the View toolbar. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating Fascia. under Dimensions. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating Fascia. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. and select the remaining three lines. 18 If you want to save your changes. gutters. and Soffits In this lesson. click Finish Roof. click Modify. click . and soffits. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 7 In the Project Browser. click Lines. on the File menu. click . Gutters. you learn how to create roof fascia. and save the exercise file with a unique name. enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. 10 On the Options Bar. you can easily create its fascia. and click OK. expand Views (all). click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. click to display the model with the complete mansard roof.

rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and open Common\c_Condominium. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Built-up Fascia. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. 8 In the Name dialog. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. and click OK twice. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. click . click Duplicate. and click OK. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. select M_Fascia-Built-Up. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. click Training Files. 5 On the Options Bar.Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile.rfa. under Construction. click Training Files. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Open. 792 | Chapter 19 Roofs .rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Press CTRL.

and click OK. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. “Creating Gutters” on page 793. 2 On the Options Bar. under Construction. c_Condominium. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Modify to exit the Fascia command. 3 In the Properties dialog. Creating Gutters | 793 . 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. click in the Value field for Material.rvt. Creating Gutters In this exercise. 10 Click to place the gutter. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name.13 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. click . click Edit/New. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. and click OK three times.

click Pick Roofs. 12 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you learn how to place a roof soffit. expand Views. 4 Select the roof. 3 On the Design Bar. and double-click Roof. “Creating Soffits” on page 794. Creating Soffits In this exercise. c_Condominium. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit.11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. 794 | Chapter 19 Roofs . 1 In the Project Browser.

on the File menu. and double-click 3D. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Creating Soffits | 795 . click Save As. and then select the soffit to join them. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. expand Views (all). 6 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Tools menu. click Join Geometry. click Finish Sketch. 8 Select the roof. expand 3D Views.5 On the Design Bar. 9 If you want to save your changes.

796 | Chapter 19 Roofs .

Area Analysis 20 In this tutorial. 797 . Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. Finally. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed.

and verify that Level 1 is the active view. 3 Under Area. 798 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Common\c_Area. your values will be different. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. click the Area Schemes tab. There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. expand Views (all). For Rounding. Click OK. In the final exercise. These schemes define spatial relationships. For Unit Suffix. select Millimeters. click Training Files. click Project Units.rvt. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. select mm. TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the Project Units dialog. click Settings. select m2 Click OK. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. click OK. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. If you are using metric units.Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. under Length. select Square meters. select 2 decimal places. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. For Unit Suffix. right-click in the Design Bar. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Units. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. and click Room and Area. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. 7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. 4 In the Project Units dialog. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise.

Click OK. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. forming a closed loop. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''. 11 In the New Area Plan dialog. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. the system-computed height defaults to the level. 9 Click Cancel. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. If you select No. under Views (all). 12 When the informational dialog displays. 13 In the Project Browser. click the Room Calculations tab. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. or 0. When you select Yes in this dialog.Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. it is not necessary in this exercise. Create a gross building area plan 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 799 . click Area Plan. You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. you must manually add these boundary lines.

An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. 800 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . click Area Plan. and store area.14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Click OK. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. click Area. 15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. 18 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. rather than the area tag. you create a new area plan for rentable space. 17 In the New Area Plan dialog. NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. you must select one of the reference lines. To modify the area. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. Next. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. common areas. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings.

and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 801 . click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). 24 In the upper left corner of the building model. When you add area boundary lines. When you pick the walls. the area boundary lines do not update automatically.Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). If you do not select this option. 22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. you can either draw them or pick them. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. Add area boundary lines 20 On the Design Bar. 19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. click Area. 23 On the Design Bar. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. click Area Boundary. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. 21 On the Options Bar. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall.

29 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 1 for Name. 31 On the Design Bar. and click to select the area. 26 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. click Modify and select the area. click . click . 28 In the Element Properties dialog. 32 On the Options Bar. place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. 802 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis .25 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 27 On the Options Bar. 30 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. click Area. Click OK. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. Select Office area for Area Type.

33 In the Element Properties dialog. 34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. Click OK. enter Core for Name. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 803 . Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. and Tenant 4 in the lower right. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 2 for Name. Select Building Common Area for Area Type. 36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model. Select Office area for Area Type. and select Store Area for Area Type. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK. 35 Add an area to the building model core.

you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. and click Save. click Save. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model.rvt. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. In this exercise. In the next exercise. name the project Area-in progress. and click to place the legend. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type.Notice that within the two store areas. 37 On the File menu. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 38 Navigate to your preferred directory. 804 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. click Color Scheme Legend.

The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule.3 When the dialog displays. 7 Under Available fields. and click OK. 5 In the New Schedule dialog. 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog. 8 Add the fields Area and Name. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Schedule/Quantities. click the Fields tab. select Areas (Rentable). click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. 9 Click OK. select Area Type and click Add. under Category. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 805 .

806 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis .

At any time. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. building elements. 807 . floors.Massing 21 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. If you modify a massing face. and roofs. you then need to update the building face. After you make building elements. or both. curtain systems. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. In this tutorial. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. you can specify the view to display massing elements. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project.

You assign the default wall. 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. and cutting geometry. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_Massing_Start. and click Massing. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. roofs. 808 | Chapter 21 Massing . The Design Bar title changes to Mass. floor. double-click Level 1. Adding a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Create Mass. and floors.Using Massing Tools In this lesson. click Training Files. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog. under Views (all). you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. sweeps.

click Lines. and click OK. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. 18 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. click Extrusion Properties. under Constraints. 19 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. 8 On the Design Bar. click . click Lines. 15 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). 16 On the Sketch Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. and then click . and click OK. under Materials and Finishes. enter 25000 for Extrusion End. on the Options Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. enter 1550 mm for the Offset. select Mass (Opaque) for Name. 13 On the View toolbar. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. 10 In the Materials dialog.6 On the Sketch Design Bar. click the Value for Material. Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. and click 17 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 1. on the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 809 .

21 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 On the Design Bar. double-click {3D} to see the results. double-click West. enter 25000 for Extrusion Start and 27500 for Extrusion End.Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. click Finish Sketch. 28 In the Work Plane dialog. and click OK. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. click Extrusion Properties. and then click . select Pick a plane. select Mass (Transparent) for Name. highlight the larger form. under Constraints. under Materials and Finishes. press TAB to highlight the entire face. Continue creation of next massing form 26 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click OK. 810 | Chapter 21 Massing . under Views (all). 27 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Materials dialog. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 30 Click to select the face. 20 On the Design Bar. TIP If necessary. 29 In the drawing area. The second form is on top of the first form. under Views (all). 25 In the Project Browser. click the Value for Material.

click . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 811 . 36 On the Options Bar. and click to select the line start point. 35 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. click the arrow next to the drawing options. click Lines.31 On the Sketch Design Bar. Next. 37 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. 34 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. TIP If you do not see this option. Sketch the blend base 32 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. 33 On the Options Bar. and click on the Options Bar. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. click .

39 Select the arc and the horizontal line. click 48 Create an arc as shown. . 47 On the Options Bar. click Edit Top. 42 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. 40 On the Edit toolbar. click Lines and. on the Options Bar. click . under Views (all). 45 On the Design Bar. 812 | Chapter 21 Massing . click 46 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. double-click East. under Elevations (Building Elevation). click Modify. and delete the vertical construction line. Sketching the blend top 43 On the Design Bar. . 41 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown.38 On the Design Bar. 44 In the Project Browser.

51 On the Design Bar. 50 In the Element Properties dialog. In the next exercise. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. In this exercise. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model.49 On the Design Bar. click . NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected for Material and that -92000 is specified for Second End. and click OK. 53 Proceed to the next exercise. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. click Blend Properties. click Finish Sketch. 52 On the View toolbar. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model | 813 .

and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. 15 On the Design Bar. 814 | Chapter 21 Massing . click Lines and. as shown. on the View Control Bar. 4 On the Options bar. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. m_Massing_Start. 10 Enter SI for intersection snap. 14 Click OK. 9 On the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. 7 Using the same technique. click and select Chain. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids.rvt. select the mass. click Extrusion Properties. 11 Sketch two additional void extrusions as shown. snap the corners to the intersections. 2 In the drawing area. under Views (all). 12 On the Design Bar. click NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. click and enter 15000 for Offset. on the Options Bar. and 0 for Extrusion Start. place three more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. 13 Under Constraints. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. and then click Hidden Line. When sketching each extrusion. click Finish Sketch. enter 12000 for Extrusion End.

Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 815 . Finally. 2 In the Family Types dialog. click Family Types. click Save As. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create new family types from a mass family file. 12000 mm for Height.rvt. enter 15000 mm for Width. 3 In the Name dialog. click Training Files. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. You place several instances of the mass families into the project. click .16 On the View toolbar. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. under Other. 4 In the Family Types dialog. 19 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. click New. and click Apply. Creating three new family types 1 On the Design Bar. In this exercise. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm for Name.rfa. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. 17 On the Mass Design Bar. 18 On the File menu. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. and 18000 mm for Depth. click Finish Mass. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. and click OK.

and click Apply. and click Apply. and 6000 mm for Depth. and click OK. and click OK. In this exercise. 6 Enter 68000 mm for Width. 11000 mm for Height. 1 If not already selected. you opened a mass family file and created three new types of this family file. You also load other existing mass families and place them. 8 Enter 46000 mm for Width. click Save As. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. 816 | Chapter 21 Massing . 11 Save the file as Box-Training. 9 Click OK.5 Click New and enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm for Name. 7 Click New and enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm for Name. you load and place the new family types that you created from the previous exercise. and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place. Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. 18000 mm for Height. click on the View toolbar to show the massing model. click Training Files. and 9000 mm for Depth. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 10 On the File menu.rvt.

TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. select the triangle. 6 Open the Box-Training. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. and click to place the mass.rfa. 11 Select the box. 16 On the Design Bar. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. click Place Mass. 25 In the drawing area.2 In the Project Browser. 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. enter 90 for Angle. under Floor Plans. 23 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 18 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter. and open the Metric\Families\Massing folder. 24 On the Design Bar.rfa. Semi Barrel Vault. 17 Press CTRL. 8 In the Type Selector. and Triangle. and click . select Rotate after placement.rfa family files. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 12 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter. and click OK twice.rfa. click Modify. under Views (all). and click OK twice. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. 14 In the Type Selector. 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Modify. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. 4 On the File menu. 20 In the Type Selector. 10 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. Arc Dome. 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family as shown. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 817 . 3 On the View Control Bar. click Place Mass. 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family as shown. select the 3 boxes. 21 On the Options Bar. click Place Mass. double-click Site. and click . 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.

click Place Mass. In this exercise. 818 | Chapter 21 Massing . 29 In the Type Selector.26 Select the triangle. you join these mass elements. 32 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter. and click . 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 34 On the View menu. Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed all overlap. select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. click . 33 On the View toolbar. 30 Place the box mass family as shown. You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. 31 Select the box and click . In the next exercise. and click OK twice. 27 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter. click Orient ➤ Northeast. and click OK twice. you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise.

click 2 On the Tools toolbar. click .rvt file. Dataset ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. 4 Select the triangle. and then press ESC to see the result. 3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar. NOTE When you join geometry.Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. . you join and modify the mass elements you placed from the previous exercise. Joining Mass Elements | 819 .

TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. click 8 On the Options Bar. 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. enter SM. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. 11 Drag the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection as shown. 820 | Chapter 21 Massing . 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. click for Axis. under Floor Plans.Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. and snap to the midpoint of the edge. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. under Views (all). on the Edit toolbar.

12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. you joined mass elements together. click . . and then select the triangle. 17 Press ESC to see the result. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. Joining Mass Elements | 821 . You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. In this exercise. click 14 On the Tools toolbar. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element.

11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. select Sloped (primary). enter 90 degrees for Angle. 8 On the Options Bar. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. click . 4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog.) 3 On the Design Options toolbar. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. double-click Site. 10 On the Options Bar. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. under Floor Plans. do not clear the check mark. 5 In the Project Browser. click Place Mass. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. select Rotate after placement. 7 In the Type Selector. Placing semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and then click OK.Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design.rvt. 1 On the Design Bar. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. click Modify. and select the triangle mass element. under Views (all). 822 | Chapter 21 Massing . clear Curved. (If Design Options is already selected. 2 On the Window menu. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design.

16 On the View Control Bar. click Modify. 14 In the drawing area. 13 On the Design Bar.12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. under Views (all). and click . and click . 15 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property. and click OK twice. under Elevations. Placing arc dome mass elements 17 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 21 In the drawing area. and click OK twice. click Modify. 20 On the Design Bar. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. click Place Mass. and click Wireframe. click . select the three arc domes. 18 In the Type Selector. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. 19 Place 3 arc domes as shown. 23 In the Project Browser. Mass Elements in Design Options | 823 . TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. double-click North. 22 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property.

It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. double-click {3D}. click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. 824 | Chapter 21 Massing . 29 In the Project Browser.24 On the View Control Bar. 28 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. and click OK. click . move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. TIP To find the correct shapes. under 3D Views. and click OK. select Curved from the Design Option menu. 32 Click the value for Design Option. 27 On the Design Options toolbar. and click Wireframe. While pressing CTRL. 25 Move the three arc domes to the position shown. select Curved. and watch the status bar. Create a Design Option set 26 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults. click Visibility/Graphics. click the Design Options tab. click . 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 30 On the View menu. under Views (all). clear Sloped.

you placed mass elements into Design Options. select Curved and. and click Close. and open Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components. Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. you can make it the primary option. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. under Option. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 34 In the Design Options dialog. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 825 . Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. 33 On the Design Options toolbar. you pick massing faces to create walls. click Make Primary. click Training Files. In this exercise. 35 Close the warning that displays. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. click .rvt.You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option.rvt. 36 On the File menu.

click . 9 On the Design Bar.Brick on CMU. 6 On the Options Bar. click Orient ➤ Southeast. click Wall by Face. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. 3 On the View menu. double-click Level 3. click Wall by Face. under Views (all). Creating walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). 5 In the Type Selector. double-click {3D}. The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. 826 | Chapter 21 Massing . 8 In the Project Browser. and select Wall Centerline for Loc Line. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. 2 On the View toolbar. select Basic Wall: Exterior . click to show the massing model.

18 Select all the faces shown in red. click Wall by Face. under Floor Plans. 11 In the Project Browser. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. double-click Level 5. 16 In the Type Selector. Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 827 . 15 On the Design Bar.NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. 14 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. under Views (all). under Views (all). 12 On the Design Bar. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. under Floor Plans. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. click Wall by Face.

23 Open the 3D view to see the results. If desired. click . You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. under Views (all). click Wall by Face. 20 On the View Control Bar. and click Wireframe. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. Creating Floors by Picking Faces In this exercise. under Floor Plans. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. In this exercise. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. 19 In the Project Browser. 21 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 9.You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. you pick massing faces to create floors. you can select the overlapping curtain wall. 828 | Chapter 21 Massing .

7 In the Floor Area Faces dialog. click Floor Area Faces. 3 On the Model Categories tab. Creating Floors by Picking Faces | 829 . 2 On the View menu. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. 6 On the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. select all levels. Curtain Systems. click Visibility/Graphics. double-click {3D}. clear Curtain Panels.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. under Views (all). and click OK. and Walls. 4 Click OK.rvt.

click Modify. and click OK. and select the three 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown.8 On the Design Bar. select Levels 1-4. 12 In the Floor Area Faces dialog. 9 On the View menu. click Orient ➤ Northeast. 11 On the Options Bar. 10 Press CTRL. 830 | Chapter 21 Massing . click Floor Area Faces.

and select the semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. 23 On the View toolbar. 17 In the Floor Area Faces dialog. click Modify. Creating Floors by Picking Faces | 831 . clear Exclude Options. double-click Level 1. 21 Drag a pick box over the entire model to select all the floor area faces. and click OK. click Floor by Face. verify that Select Multiple is selected. 22 On the Options Bar. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. under Views (all). click . 15 Press CTRL. 18 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Options Bar. 20 On the Options Bar.13 On the Design Bar. select Level 1. 16 On the Options Bar. click Floor Area Faces. under Floor Plans. click Create Floors.

832 | Chapter 21 Massing . In this exercise. This shows you the gross floor area of each mass. you pick massing faces to create roofs. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. under Schedules/Quantities. You then viewed a massing schedule that listed the gross floor area of each mass in the model. double-click Mass Schedule. you created floors by first creating floor area faces and then picking those faces to create floors.24 In the Project Browser.

1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Options Bar. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 833 . click Create Roof.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. click Create Roof. double-click {3D}. click Roof by Face. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements.rvt. under Views (all). NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family.400mm. 4 In the Type Selector. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. Creating roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select Basic Roof : Generic .

click Visibility/Graphics. Curtain Systems. 8 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. click Create Roof. select Curtain Panels. and then click OK. 10 Repeat these steps to create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. and Walls. 7 With the Roof by Face command still selected. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. 834 | Chapter 21 Massing . 11 On the View menu. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise.Your model should now look as shown. 12 Click the Model Categories tab. select Sloped Glazing in the Type Selector. In this exercise. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. 9 On the Options Bar.

click Create System. be sure that Select Multiple is selected. click Curtain System by Face. under Views (all). 3 In the Type Selector. 1 In the Project Browser.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm. 5 Press CTRL. Creating Curtain Systems | 835 . 6 On the Options Bar. double-click {3D}.rvt. 4 On the Options Bar. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown.

select the blended form on the in-place mass. 8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected. 836 | Chapter 21 Massing .7 Repeat the same steps for the two other domes.

Editing Elements Created from Massings | 837 . In this exercise.9 On the Options Bar. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. 10 Click Modify to exit the command. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. click Create System. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces.

838 | Chapter 21 Massing . clear Curtain Panels. and then click OK. 1 In the Project Browser.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. Curtain Systems. double-click Site. you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. click OK. and Walls. click Edit/New. Roofs. 3 On the Model Categories tab. 7 Enter Larger Size for Name. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. under Floor Plans. enter 30000 for Width. 2 On the View menu. click Duplicate. Next. click Visibility/Graphics. Floors. 4 Select the box mass family as shown and click . under Views (all).rvt.

click Modify. 12 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. 14 Open the 3D view to see the result. clear Exclude Options. 13 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. 11 On the Options Bar. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 839 .10 On the Design Bar.

you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. TIP To select the curtain wall. 18 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. 16 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the three walls shown. 840 | Chapter 21 Massing . remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. Also. 17 On the Options Bar. click . 15 In the Project Browser. click OK. click Remake. under Floor Plans. 19 On the View toolbar. double-click Level 1.The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. In the next steps. under Views (all). you want to select the smaller one.

20 Select the roof as shown.TIP If you temporarily hide one of the resized walls. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 841 . click Remake. you will notice that Revit Architecture resized the floors. 21 On the Options Bar.

1 Open the 3D view.22 Select the arc dome curtain system. 842 | Chapter 21 Massing . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise.rvt. In this exercise. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. you changed the size of an existing mass family. and click Remake. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements.

4 Rename the view 3D . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. The 3D view now shows only the building shell. click Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. 8 Click None to clear the selection. click All to select all categories. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 843 . right-click on the 3D view. Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. 3 In the Project Browser.Turn off massing 2 Click on the View toolbar to turn off massing. 9 Select Mass. 7 Clear one of the check boxes. 6 On the Model Categories tab. 5 On the View menu.Massing only.

844 | Chapter 21 Massing . you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. you can continue adding additional Revit modeling components.In this exercise. to the building shell. such as columns and an extruded roof. If desired. This concludes the massing tutorial. You might create the model shown.

It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. you also simplify the modification process. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. In this tutorial. By grouping objects. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. For example. 845 .Grouping 22 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2008. place. You can also nest groups within other groups. or with those working on a different project. and modify repetitive units. you not only simplify their placement. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. all instances in the building model are updated. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects.

You mirror one instance of the group. hotel rooms. 846 | Chapter 22 Grouping . and double-click First Floor. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods.rvt. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. In this exercise.Creating. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. When you make changes to a nested group. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. After you create a model group. The new group is considered nested within the host group. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. In another exercise. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. expand Floor Plans. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. expand Views (all). and typical office layouts. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium. you add the new model group to a previously created group. Modifying. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. the host group is also updated automatically.

and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. 3 Draw a selection box around the kitchen.2 Enter ZR. 4 On the Edit toolbar. click (Group). enter Typical Kitchen. Creating and Placing a Group | 847 . and click OK.

848 | Chapter 22 Grouping . Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. 7 On the Design Bar. click Zoom To Fit. 8 On the View toolbar. Zoom flyout. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen.The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. click Modify. select the center control for the group origin.

under Groups. click Modify. 12 On the Design Bar. and click Create Instance. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. right-click Typical Kitchen.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. expand Model. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. Creating and Placing a Group | 849 .

The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan.13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. 15 On the Options Bar. click (Mirror). clear Copy. 850 | Chapter 22 Grouping . 14 On the Edit toolbar.

click (Rotate). 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. and on the toolbar. Creating and Placing a Group | 851 .17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell.

click Modify. click Zoom To Fit.19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. 21 On the Zoom flyout. 852 | Chapter 22 Grouping . 20 On the Design Bar.

Save the dataset 22 On the File menu. you make changes to an instance of a group. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. and click Save. click Save As. as shown.rvt.rvt. one mirrored. Modifying a Group In this exercise. When you finish editing. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. Modifying a Group | 853 .You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. and one rotated. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.

press TAB to highlight the wall. and click 4 Move the cursor over the door. 854 | Chapter 22 Grouping . 7 Click (Exclude group member). 5 Click (Exclude group member). and click to select it. and click to select the door. (Include group member). and click to select the wall. 3 Click (Exclude group member).2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. press TAB. NOTE To display an excluded element. press TAB. select the element. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance.

click Door. 11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. click Wall. 10 In the Type Selector.8 On the Design Bar. Modifying a Group | 855 . select Basic Wall : Generic . select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm. 15 On the Options Bar. Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. 14 In the Type Selector. 13 On the Design Bar. move the cursor to the left. click Modify. clear Tag on Placement. 12 On the Design Bar. 16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet.127mm.

and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. 18 On the View toolbar. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. 23 In the drawing area. click Edit Group. move the cursor up. click Zoom To Fit. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. 21 On the Options Bar.17 On the Design Bar. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. 856 | Chapter 22 Grouping . In edit group mode. All other elements in the model are grayed out. Zoom flyout. click Modify. 20 Select the Typical Kitchen group.

The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. you add the Typical Kitchen group. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. under Floor Plans.rvt.25 On the Design Bar. created in an earlier lesson. click Modify. 26 Select the opening. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. enter 1000. and on the Options Bar. double-click First Floor. Nesting Groups | 857 . 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. for Unconnected Height. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. in the Project Browser. enter 2134. which acts as the host. Nesting Groups In this exercise. under Constraints. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. click Properties. 29 In the group editor toolbar. 28 For Base Offset. and click OK. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. click Finish. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change.

858 | Chapter 22 Grouping . 5 In the drawing area. 4 In the group editor toolbar. click (Add to Group).2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. click Edit Group. select the Typical Kitchen group. 3 On the Options Bar.

8 In the Project Browser. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. select the wall between the folding doors. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. you add door tags to a group. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. under Floor Plans. 7 In the group editor toolbar. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. click Finish. such as text. In the next exercise. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. Working with Detail Groups | 859 . Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. such as door and window tags. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson.6 Press TAB. double-click Second Floor. and filled regions. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. and each of the bifold doors.

rvt. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. double-click First Floor. click to draw a rectangular region. under Floor Plans. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. 860 | Chapter 22 Grouping . 4 On the Options Bar. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. click Filled Region.Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model.

click to add an arc leader. 12 Enter Tile. 7 On the Design Bar. and on the Design Bar. Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. click Text. click Finish Sketch. 9 On the Options Bar. and select a point below the left elevator.6 Move the cursor down and to the left. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. click Modify. Creating a Detail Group | 861 .

17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. as shown. and click OK. and select the note and the filled region. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. 20 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 14 On the Edit toolbar. Add a group instance to a different drawing view 19 In the Project Browser. 18 On the Design Bar. expand Detail. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. 862 | Chapter 22 Grouping . and click Create Instance.The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. under Groups. under Floor Plans. 16 In the drawing area. click (Group). right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. double-click Second Floor.

under Floor Plans. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. clear Leader.21 In the drawing area. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. it cannot be added to a group in the same manner that a drawing component can be added. Using Attached Detail Groups | 863 . click Zoom To Fit. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise.rvt. double-click First Floor. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. Because the detail group contains variables. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click to place the detail group. click Tag ➤ By Category. click Modify 23 On the Zoom flyout. 22 On the Design Bar. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser.

Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area.4 Place door tags in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. draw a selection box around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. 8 In the Filter dialog. 9 On the Edit toolbar. and click OK. 864 | Chapter 22 Grouping . click (Filter Selection). as shown: 5 On the Design Bar. select Door Tags. 7 On the Options Bar. click Check None. click (Group). click Modify.

enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. click Place Detail. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. therefore. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. under Floor Plans. for Attached Detail Group Name. 14 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Project Browser. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. and click OK. double-click Second Floor. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags.10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. 13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. and click OK. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. Using Attached Detail Groups | 865 . Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser.

3 For File name. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. and click OK.rvt. and click Open. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). 866 | Chapter 22 Grouping . 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. under Groups\Model. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. select 2 Bedroom Unit. click OK. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. In this case. and click Save. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project.16 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. verify that Project is selected. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. click New ➤ Project. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. Load the group in a new project 4 On the File menu. click Desktop. browse to the Desktop. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog.rvt. 5 In the New Project dialog. accept the default template file. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. When you load the group from the library into a new project. verify that Same as group name is selected. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. and click Save Group. for Create new. click Modify.

either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. and click Create Instance. expand Groups. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. and expand Model.rvt. click Link. and on the Options Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. click Modify. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. click Training Files. When a group is converted to a link.A warning dialog is displayed. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. Saving and Loading Groups | 867 . click Use Existing.

25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. verify that Attached Details is selected only. and the link is removed. click Modify. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 23 In the confirmation dialog. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. select the linked Revit model. click OK. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. click Remove Link. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. expand Revit Links. 20 On the Options Bar. 868 | Chapter 22 Grouping .17 On the Design Bar. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. 18 In the Project Browser. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group.rvt file is added as a link to the project. 24 In the message dialog. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. click Bind. and click OK.

Site 23 In this tutorial. 869 . you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2008 to add and modify site components within a project.

You add property lines manually. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. click Toposurface. 3 On the Design Bar. you add a building pad to the site. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. and open Metric\m_First_Project. convert the data to a table.Using Site Tools In this lesson. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. In the second part of this exercise. In the final exercises. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Site. and walkways. click Point. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Using the first method. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. you create a toposurface using two different methods. click Training Files. and double-click Site. The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. right-click in the Design Bar. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data.rvt. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. islands. and then modify the data. This project file was created using the default metric template. 870 | Chapter 23 Site . The scale of this view is 1 : 100. 4 On the Options Bar.

5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. Use the following illustration as a reference. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000 mm elevation points inside the 3000 mm contour. 8 On the Options Bar. Creating a Toposurface | 871 . Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. enter an absolute elevation of 6000 mm. The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration.

12 On the Settings menu.TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. under Additional Contours. 10 Repeat the previous step for 9000 mm. 13 In the Site Settings dialog. 12000 mm. 11 On the Design Bar. enter 1500 mm. Use the following illustration as a reference. 15000 mm. click Finish Surface. and 18000 mm absolute elevations. under Increment. click Site Settings. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. 872 | Chapter 23 Site . and click OK.

Before importing the contour data. rename the level Basement. and press ENTER. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. and double-click South. and click Shading with Edges. expand Elevations (Building Elevation).This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. 15 On the View Control Bar. click Yes. click Model Graphics Style. enter 1000 mm. Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. modify the level names and elevations. 19 On the Design Bar. click the elevation value. 18 In the Project Browser. Creating a Toposurface | 873 . click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 16 On the View toolbar. click Modify. and press ENTER. under Views (all). rename the level Base Site Elevation. click . 14 On the View toolbar. on the Standard toolbar. click to delete it. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. 23 Click the Level 1 text. 21 Click the Level 2 text. and press ENTER.

28 On the Design Bar. click Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. and click OK. select Preserve colors. clear Current view only and choose Select for Layers. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. Click Open. Until it is exploded. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. click Modify. it is considered an import symbol. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. 25 On the File menu. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. click Modify. 29 Select the imported topography. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. 874 | Chapter 23 Site . under Floor Plans. Under Import or Link. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. under Views (all). Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. 31 On the Design Bar. 30 On the Edit menu. click Pin Position. click Training Files.24 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. Under Layer/Level Colors.

when the edges highlight. Creating a Toposurface | 875 . 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. clear Elevations. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog. and click OK. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. select it. 36 On the Design Bar. click Toposurface. clear C_INDX. 32 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. click the Annotation Categories tab. 34 Under Visibility. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. When you select the import symbol. and then click OK.

41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. 40 On the View toolbar. name the project Site-in progress.The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. “Adding Property Lines” on page 876. click Finish Surface. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. this project file is required in its current state. click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. and click Save. 39 On the Design Bar. you add property lines using two methods.rvt. 876 | Chapter 23 Site . Notice the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. Using the first method. 43 On the File menu. 42 On the View toolbar. click . Using the second method. click Save As. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. 45 Proceed to the next exercise.

and click OK. Click Modify. under Floor Plans. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. If you have not completed the previous exercise. Using the 3-point Arc tool. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. Select and delete the right vertical line. Site-in progress. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. do so before continuing. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes.rvt. click Lines. click Property Line. Adding Property Lines | 877 . 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. select Create property lines by sketching. add an arc line on the right. click Lines. On the Design Bar. double-click Site. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar.

A warning dialog is displayed. 15 Starting in Row #1. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. click Property Line. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. on the Standard toolbar. click OK. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. and click OK. 10 In the Property Lines dialog. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. 8 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography.6 On the Design Bar. 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E 878 | Chapter 23 Site . select Edit Table. click 12 On the Design Bar. select the lines. when they highlight. 14 In the Property Lines dialog. 9 In the warning dialog. click OK. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ to delete them.

If the gap is not closed. 23 On the View menu. Before adding property line segment tags. click the Imported Categories tab. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. This means there is no gap in the property lines. and click OK. click to place the property lines. 22 In the Tags dialog. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog.Notice that after you complete the last line. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. 19 In the Tags dialog. Adding Property Lines | 879 . 25 Under Visibility.rfa. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. 16 Click OK. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. 20 Click Load. click Visibility/Graphics. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off.dwg and click OK. click Training Files. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments.

In this exercise. 27 On the Options Bar. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. click Save. clear Leader. click Model Graphics Style. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. and click Drafting. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. and click Shading with Edges. In the next exercise.26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. “Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings” on page 880. click to place it. 30 On the View Control Bar. 31 On the File menu. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. 880 | Chapter 23 Site . The tags display more prominently in this view. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. In the final step. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. this project file is required in its current state. you created two sets of property lines. click Tag ➤ By Category. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. right-click in the Design Bar. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography.

and click OK.0 mm. Under Range Type. select Single Value. click Model Graphics Style. enter 1000. enter the name Working Contour. Under Line Pattern. Under Line Color. for Subcategory. 10 Under Additional Contours. 9 In the Site Settings dialog. 2 On the Settings menu. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog. 6 In the Object Styles dialog. In the Object Styles dialog.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select a shade of Brown. under Contour Line Display. and click Wireframe. select Topography. Site-in progress. select Working Contour. 7 Click OK. select Dash dot. Under Subcategory. specify an interval of 1000 mm passing through elevation 0. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu.rvt. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 881 . specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. click New. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. click Object Styles. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. click Site Settings.

such as material. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. and islands. 882 | Chapter 23 Site . In this exercise. Working Contour. parking areas. In the next exercise. click Close. The object style subcategory. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. The next exercise requires a new dataset. and islands. parking areas. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. you create subregions in order to define roads. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. “Creating Topographic Subregions” on page 882. 12 On the File menu.11 Click OK. you create topographic subregions to define roads.

click Subregion. Creating Topographic Subregions | 883 . click Training Files. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. try to replicate the location and proportion.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. click Lines. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. Although the exact dimensions are not important. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. and open Metric\m_Site. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. 2 On the Design Bar.

and click OK. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Parking for Name.NOTE In the Metric dataset. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. and click OK. select Site . click Finish Sketch. under Materials and Finishes. click Properties. click Shading with Edges. 8 On the Design Bar. Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog. 9 On the View menu.Tarmacadam for Name. 6 In the Materials dialog. under Identity Data. When you finish the sketch in a later step. click the Value for Material. 884 | Chapter 23 Site .

click Edit Boundary. under Schedules/Quantities. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. 12 On the View Control Bar. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. double-click Site. double-click Topography Schedule. 16 On the Design Bar. TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. 14 On the Options Bar. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. expand Schedules/Quantities. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. As you create new subregions. they display within this schedule. 18 In the Project Browser. Delete overlapping lines. under Floor Plans. click Finish Sketch. Creating Topographic Subregions | 885 . click Model Graphics Style.Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . and double-click Topography Schedule. 17 On the View Control Bar. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. and click Hidden Line. and click Shading with Edges. Notice that the project area has increased. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. click Model Graphics Style. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch.Tarmacadam. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps.

click Lines. 886 | Chapter 23 Site . click the Value for Material. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. enter Island . 25 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Shading with Edges.Grass for Name. 22 On the Design Bar. 26 In the Materials dialog. and click OK. 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. under Materials and Finishes. and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog. 30 In the Project Browser. 24 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style. under Identity Data. 29 On the View Control Bar. Within each subregion.Grass for Name. double-click Site. 28 On the Design Bar. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area.Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. click Subregion. 23 In the upper-right parking area. In this training project. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. click Model Graphics Style. and click Hidden Line. double-click Topography Schedule. click Finish Sketch. Precise dimensions are not important at this time. under Floor Plans. and click OK. select Site . 20 On the View Control Bar. under Schedules/Quantities. click Properties.

double-click Site. Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser. and apply the material Concrete . click Subregion. Notice that the schedule has been updated. under Floor Plans. under Schedules/Quantities. 34 On the Design Bar.Grass. Name the subregion Walkway. click Lines.Cast-in-Situ Concrete . 35 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. double-click Site. double-click Topography Schedule. 32 In the Project Browser. Creating Topographic Subregions | 887 .Grass. and apply the material Site . Name each region Island . add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. Using the techniques learned in previous steps.31 In the Project Browser.walkway. 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. You must sketch each region separately.

so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. 38 In the Project Browser. double-click Topography Schedule. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. 888 | Chapter 23 Site . there is still only one toposurface.WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. Notice that the schedule has been updated. click Finish Sketch. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. click Save As. 37 On the Design Bar. under Schedules/Quantities. 39 On the File menu.

Grading the Toposurface | 889 . click Modify. RELATED For more information regarding phasing. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. When you use the grading tool. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. name the project Site tutorial-in progress. under Phasing. 5 On the Design Bar. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. and click OK. select Existing for Phase Created. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. this project file is required in its current state.40 Navigate to your preferred folder. “Using Phasing” on page 992. under Floor Plans. double-click Site. Site tutorial-in progress. and click Save. A warning dialog is displayed. 2 Select the toposurface. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. “Grading the Toposurface” on page 889. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface.rvt.rvt. 3 On the Options Bar. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. click . the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. see the tutorial. Notice that the toposurface displays differently.

and click Select and Edit. 7 In the Graded Region dialog. click Graded Region. Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration.6 On the Design Bar. Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area. select Copy Internal Points. 8 Select the topographic surface. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. 890 | Chapter 23 Site .

12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration. demolished. and click Hidden Line. 11 On the View Control Bar. Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing.10 Press DELETE. Grading the Toposurface | 891 . 13 Press DELETE. click Model Graphics Style. and new.

click . 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. click . click Model Graphics Style. 15 On the Options Bar. 19 On the View Control Bar. and click Shading with Edges. 892 | Chapter 23 Site . specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. 18 On the View toolbar. 20 On the View toolbar. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. click Finish Surface. click Point. 17 On the Design Bar.Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar.

NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. only the original toposurface displays. When you add a building pad. Only the graded topography displays. specify Existing for Phase. 26 On the File menu.rvt. under Phasing. you can delete it. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. click View Properties. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. and click OK. you create a building pad. and click OK. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. and delete it. Site tutorial-in progress. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. Therefore. click View Properties. 23 Select the toposurface. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. “Adding a Building Pad” on page 893. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. Adding a Building Pad | 893 .The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. click Save. 24 On the View menu. this project file is required in its current state. under Phasing. specify New Construction for Phase. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

and click Hidden Line. NOTE By default. double-click Site. click Lines. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar.Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. If you have an existing building model. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 894 | Chapter 23 Site . sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. click Pad. 4 On the Design Bar. the Pick Walls command is active. click Model Graphics Style.

“Adding Site Components” on page 895. Adding Site Components In this exercise. Adding Site Components | 895 . click Save. 7 On the View Control Bar. you add parking and planting components to the site surface. click Model Graphics Style. click building pad. . 11 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice the new 10 On the File menu. click 9 On the View toolbar. this project file is required in its current state. 8 On the View toolbar. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. . click Finish Sketch.6 On the Design Bar. and click Shading with Edges.

Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. and select the parking space. 3 In the Type Selector. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . 896 | Chapter 23 Site . Site tutorial-in progress. click Parking Component.90 deg. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.rvt.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. double-click Site. 5 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click 9 On the View toolbar. Adding Site Components | 897 . click Site Component. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click parking spaces. Notice the new Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task. under Floor Plans. double-click Site. . 8 On the View toolbar. .7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space.

14 On the View toolbar. 13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. 898 | Chapter 23 Site . and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below. choose any tree type.12 In the Type Selector. click .

click . the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 16 On the File menu. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Site tutorial-in progress. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 899 . NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. “Tagging Site and Parking Components” on page 899. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Tag All Not Tagged. click Save. In the following illustration. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. double-click Site. under Floor Plans.15 On the View toolbar. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. this project file is required in its current state. 17 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click OK. 900 | Chapter 23 Site . Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. click Save. you create a parking schedule. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK.3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Site tutorial-in progress.rvt. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. select Parking for Category. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. and click Apply. select Mark. In the following exercise. 5 On the View menu. this project file is required in its current state. 4 Under Available fields. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. “Creating Parking Space Schedules” on page 900. click Schedule/Quantities. and click Add. 7 On the File menu. click Hidden Line. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. click the Fields tab. Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. click Apply. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. 2 In the New Schedule dialog.

Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. number the first three spaces consecutively. under Floor Plans. This closes all the views except the parking schedule.5 Under Available fields. under Views (all). 9 On the Window menu. 7 Under Fields. The parking schedule is displayed. under Space. 13 In the Parking Schedule. 12 In the Site plan. double-click Site. and under Heading. and click Add. select Mark. finish numbering the remaining spaces. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. and click OK. enter Space. 8 Under Fields. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. 15 On the File menu. This allows you to know which space you are numbering. click Save. 10 In the Project Browser. 6 Click the Formatting tab. 14 In the Parking Schedule. select Type. enter Size. and under Heading. click Tile. 11 On the Window menu. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. select Type. If necessary. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 901 . you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. click Close Hidden Windows. under Space.

902 | Chapter 23 Site .

you create framing elevations and add structural braces to the building model. In the final lesson. You begin by adding the structural walls. 903 .Structural 24 In this tutorial. After completing level 1. you copy the entire structure and use the paste-align command to add the structure to the three levels above it. and beams to Level 1. columns. you use the structural tools in Revit Architecture 2008 to create a building model skeleton.

and double-click Level 2. you add structural walls to a project file where only the grid lines have been added. under Floor Plans. and open Metric\m_Structural. You use an imported DWG file as an underlay to trace the initial outline of the structural walls. and select Metric\m_Wall_Import. click Training Files. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The DWG file contains walls that you trace in the next exercise to create the structural walls. click Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. under Views (all). verify that the Level 2 floor plan is open.Adding Structural Walls In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Import or Link. 4 In the Import/Link dialog. Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay In this exercise. click Training Files. 904 | Chapter 24 Structural . 2 On the File menu. you import a DWG file into the Level 2 floor plan. 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog. Import the DWG file 1 Before importing the DWG file.rvt. go to the Project Browser. If necessary. specify the following: ■ Select Link (instead of import). You then sketch additional walls to which you add dimensions and constraints.dwg.

you imported a DWG file. 8 On the File menu. and select Origin to origin. and add the remaining structural walls to the building model. Sketching Structural Walls | 905 . right-click in the Design Bar and click Structural. Dataset This exercise requires the project file.■ ■ Select Current view only. The DWG file is displayed on the Level 2 floor plan. you use the linked DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls.rvt. select Invert colors. Sketching Structural Walls In this exercise. In this exercise. to trace the initial set of structural walls. Select All for Layers. 9 Navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project as Structural_tutorial. select Automatically place. Display the Structural tab of the Design Bar 1 If the structural tab is not displayed. click Save As. Structural_tutorial. 5 Under Layer/Level Colors. you turn off the visibility of the DWG file. “Sketching Structural Walls” on page 905. 6 Under Positioning. 7 Click Open. After you trace the walls. This project file is required for all subsequent exercises in this tutorial. This file is used in the next exercise.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

In the steps that follow. click Structural Wall. select Basic Wall: Generic . 8 Move the cursor over the top right intersection of the line. 5 In the Type Selector. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. their Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Bearing. ■ ■ ■ Select Chain. Click . This requires the bottom of the primary view range to be set to the level below in order to see the walls as you sketch them. In addition. you add a structural wall by specifying the depth of the wall. 7 Begin the first wall by selecting the intersection of the upper left corner of the line chain. Structural walls differ from non-structural walls in several ways. and click to specify the wall endpoint. 3 Draw a zoom region around the upper set of lines. Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line.Sketch structural walls by tracing the DWG 2 On the View menu.200mm. First. rather than the height. 4 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 906 | Chapter 24 Structural . 6 On the Options Bar. you sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. specify the following: ■ Select Depth.

click Modify to finish the sketch. and click to specify the next wall endpoint. and click to complete the chain of walls. 12 On the Design Bar. 10 Move the curser to the right. and click the next line intersection. Sketching Structural Walls | 907 .9 Move the cursor downward to the next line intersection. click . 13 On the View toolbar. 11 Move the cursor to the top of the line chain until a reference plane displays indicating the cursor is on a parallel plane with the slanted wall on the left.

sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. click Structural Wall. and double-click Level 2. Use the Dynamic 14 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ 908 | Chapter 24 Structural . ■ Begin the wall chain by clicking the lower left intersection where the end of the line chain adjoins grid C. Click each exterior line intersection in a clockwise direction. zoom in to ensure you select the intersection of the imported lines and grid C. notice that the wall options you used previously are still selected. 15 Zoom around the second chain of lines. in the View toolbar.TIP If necessary. When you reach the endpoint on the lower right corner of the chain. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. you can spin the model in a 3D view by clicking View tools to modify the 3D view. On the Options Bar. 17 Using the bulleted steps below. 16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.

22 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Click to create a three-point arc. select Basic Wall: Generic .dwg and click OK. Turn off the DWG visibility 20 In the Project Browser. Select Wall Centerline for Loc Line. click . clear m_Wall_Import. click Modify to end the wall chain. 19 On the View toolbar. 21 On the View menu. specify the following: ■ ■ Clear Chain.18 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 26 On the Options Bar. click Visibility/Graphics.200mm. click the Imported Categories tab. ■ Sketching Structural Walls | 909 . click Structural Wall. 23 Under Visibility. double-click Level 2. Unselected categories are not visible in the referenced view. 25 In the Type Selector. Sketch additional structural walls 24 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.

31 Add a vertical wall between the two horizontal walls as shown. 29 Add a horizontal wall beginning at the midpoint of the left vertical wall as shown. click . ■ ■ ■ Select the endpoint of the left vertical wall. This is the right extent of the arc. 28 On the Options Bar. Move the cursor upward and specify an arc radius of 180 degrees. 910 | Chapter 24 Structural . Select the right endpoint of the horizontal wall. This is the left extent of the arc. 30 Move the cursor to the right until it intersects with the slanted wall on the right.27 Follow the sequence of steps in the illustration below to add a 180 degree three point arc.

33 Select the vertical wall you added in the previous step and make sure the temporary dimension between the wall and the centerline of the left vertical wall is equal to 1500 mm. and press ENTER. click the temporary dimension value between it and grid C. click Modify. 34 Select the horizontal wall. and press Enter. If it is not. Sketching Structural Walls | 911 .32 On the Design Bar. enter 1500. enter 1500. click the value.

Create the final structural walls 37 Begin the first wall on the endpoint and wall centerline shown in the illustration below.35 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown. click Structural Wall and on the Options Bar. 912 | Chapter 24 Structural . 38 Draw the 1200 mm wall parallel to the adjoining wall as shown. In the steps that follow. clear Chain. you create the final structural walls for the project. 36 On the Design Bar. Both walls are 1200 mm long.

In this exercise. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. double-click Level 2. under Views (all). Add an aligned dimension 1 In the Project Browser. Floor Plans. 40 On the Design Bar. click Save. you dimension the structural walls and add an equality constraint to the dimension to keep the walls equidistant. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls | 913 . click Modify. you used the DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls. Begin the wall at the top of the right vertical wall and draw it inward so that it is parallel with the wall you sketched in the previous steps. click . “Dimensioning and Modifying Walls” on page 913. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. You also reposition the walls to see how they adapt to changes in the design. in its current state.39 Create an additional 1200 mm wall as shown. 41 On the View toolbar. This project file is required. you added the remaining structural walls required for this building model. Structural_tutorial. In the next exercise. you add dimensions and equality constraints to the walls.rvt. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. After turning off the visibility of the linked DWG. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls In this exercise. 2 Zoom around the lower set of walls. You then make minor modifications to their position. 42 On the File menu.

and click OK. After you select Entire Walls. select Intersecting Walls. click Modify. Select Entire Walls for Pick. Create an equality constraint 7 On the Design Bar.3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 6 Move the cursor to the left. and when it highlights. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. select it. 914 | Chapter 24 Structural . click Dimension. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select . click Options to specify the wall pick options. In the Auto Dimension Options dialog. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Move the cursor over the left vertical wall. and click to place the dimension as shown. Select Wall Centerlines for Prefer. the Options button becomes available.

Dimensioning and Modifying Walls | 915 . 9 Click the EQ symbol to make each of the segments equal. Modify wall position 10 Select the upper horizontal wall as shown.8 Select the dimension you added in the previous steps.

click Save. You also repositioned the walls and observed how they adapted to the change in the design. “Adding Structural Columns and Beams” on page 916. joists. to continue with the next lesson in this tutorial. several different beam types. you added a dimension to the structural walls and used an equality constraint to keep the walls equidistant. This project file is required. in its current state. Notice the horizontal walls remain equally spaced. In the next lesson. 12 On the Edit menu. and purlins to complete the Level 1 structure. Adding Structural Columns and Beams In this lesson. click Undo Edit Dimension Length.11 Click the temporary dimension value. 916 | Chapter 24 Structural . 13 On the File menu. and enter 4000 for the distance between the wall centerline and grid B. you add structural columns. In this exercise. you add structural columns and different beam types to the building model.

Structural_tutorial. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. zoom in to place the column.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Add columns to grid intersections manually 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Add a column to C1 as shown. 2 On the View menu. 4 In the Type Selector. If necessary. In addition. press the SPACEBAR to rotate the column. 5 On the Options Bar. TIP When adding the column. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. and you add a column outside the grids. if the column orientation is not similar to the callout shown below. Adding Structural Columns | 917 . you rotate columns by pressing the SPACEBAR when necessary. select Height and specify Level 2. you use several different methods to add structural columns: you manually select grid intersections.Adding Structural Columns In this exercise. you use the grid intersection tool. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click Structural Column. select M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80.

and C5. 9 Use a crossing selection. Add columns using selected grid intersections 8 On the Options Bar. and select grids 1-5. This option allows you to place columns at the intersections of selected column grids. C3.7 Add similar columns to C2. and A. click Grid Intersection. 918 | Chapter 24 Structural .

Adding Structural Columns | 919 . 13 Press the SPACEBAR until the columns return to their original position. and drag your cursor up and to the left as shown below. 10 Notice columns are added to A1-5. 12 Press the SPACEBAR again. Rotate the columns 11 Press the SPACEBAR. specify a point under grid A and to the right of grid 5. All of the columns on grid A rotate until they are parallel with the vertical grids. Columns A3-5 are shown below.TIP To create the crossing selection. Notice the columns rotate until they are parallel with grid A.

click Finish. the columns on A1-5 do not rotate. 15 On the Options Bar. click Structural Column.14 If necessary. click Grid Intersection. 18 If the columns are not aligned as in the illustration below. Add a column outside of the grid 22 On the Design Bar. you could not have rotated them independently of each other. Although you could have added columns B1-5 with the first set of columns. This completes this set of columns. TIP Notice that as you rotate these columns using the SPACEBAR. zoom out until you can see all the grids. press the SPACEBAR to rotate them. 21 Select column A5 and delete it. That is why you finished the first set and then reentered the grid intersection mode to add columns B1-5. 23 Add a M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80 between B4 and C5. 19 On the Options Bar. Columns B3-5 are shown below. click Modify. 920 | Chapter 24 Structural . 20 On the Design Bar. Add columns B1-5 16 On the Options Bar. and 6900 mm below the exterior face of the horizontal wall above it. click Finish. The column should be 4200 mm to the left of grid 5. 17 Create a crossing selection that includes B1-5.

click . In the next exercise. in its current state. you used various methods to add structural columns. and use the grid tools to add beams automatically. “Adding Structural Beams and Girders” on page 921. Adding Structural Beams and Girders In this exercise. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. click Modify. Different structural conditions exist within the building model that require specific beam conditions.24 On the Design Bar. you add beams manually. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 921 . 25 On the View toolbar. 26 On the File menu. As you use the beam tool. This project file is required. and you rotate the columns using the SPACEBAR. click Save. In this exercise. you learn how to work with these varied conditions. you add structural beams to the building model.

under Floor Plans. To add a beam using point-to-point insertion. Structural_tutorial. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 6 Add a beam between the column shown below and the horizontal wall above it. 5 Zoom around the right side of the building model. Start the beam at the column midpoint and move your cursor up until it connects with the wall centerline. 4 In the Type Selector. click Modify. you specify the start and endpoint of the beam. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit.Dataset This exercise requires the project file. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. Add beams using point-to-point insertion 1 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 2.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 2 On the View menu. 922 | Chapter 24 Structural . click Beam. 8 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown.

click Grid. 11 On the Options Bar.7. 10 In the Type Selector. the Structural Usage parameter of each beam is automatically specified depending on the join conditions. select Girder for Usage. click Beam. and then move the cursor up to grid A. TIP Select the midpoint of the wall first. Use the grid tool to add beams between columns 13 In the Type Selector. the Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Girder. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x32. 14 On the Options Bar. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 923 . When you use the grid tool to place beams. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. if a beam is joined column-to-column.9 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Use the following table for other conditions. Column Brace Horizontal Bracing Horizontal Bracing Other Horizontal Bracing Girder Joist Purlin Other Column* Girder Other Girder Joist Purlin Other Brace Horizontal Brace Girder Joist Purlin Other Other Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Purlin Other Horizontal Bracing Purlin Purlin Purlin Other Other Other Other Other Other *Structural walls produce the same result as columns. 12 Add a beam between the midpoint of the structural wall shown and grid A. 15 Create a crossing selection that includes grids 1 and 2. For example.

click Modify. click Beam. 21 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Options Bar. 24 Select grid 3. click Grid. press and hold CTRL.16 Notice that beams are added at the grids and connected to each column. and press ENTER. 19 Zoom in the upper-right quadrant of the building model. 18 On the Design Bar. click Finish. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. 924 | Chapter 24 Structural . Add beams to an intersecting structural wall 20 Select the structural wall that spans grids 3 and 4. and select grid C. enter 8200. 23 On the Options Bar. 22 In the Type Selector. click the temporary dimension value.

Notice beams are added between columns. 25 On the Options Bar. Add a chain of beams 26 On the Options Bar. Click column B5 to add the first beam. Press ESC to end the chain. notice that beams connect to the structural walls that intersect grids. Click the intersection of grid 5 and the structural wall as shown to add the final beam in the chain. select Chain. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 925 . refer to the following steps and illustration to add two beams to grid 5. select Girder. and for Usage. click Finish. 27 Using point-to-point insertion. In addition. ■ ■ ■ ■ Click column C5 to start the beam chain.

SI. connecting the column at B4. 926 | Chapter 24 Structural . You may need to zoom in significantly to accomplish this. 31 Add a chain of beams beginning with the end of the structural wall at C4. and ending with the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. select Girder for Usage. 29 Add a beam between A4 and the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. NOTE When you begin the beam chain at C4. 30 On the Options Bar. make sure you select the intersection of the grid lines.28 On the Options Bar. Press ESC to end the chain. select Girder for Usage. to snap only to intersections. Press ESC to end the chain. You can also use the shortcut key.

click Grid. If the W310x32.7 beam that intersects it perpendicularly. 34 On the Options Bar.7 beam had crossed grid A. 33 Select grid A.Add beams that intersect other beams 32 On the Options Bar. click Finish. click Grid. The W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 supports the W310x32. 35 Zoom around the beam between A3-4. 36 On the Options Bar. it would have become the supporting beam because it was placed first. and the W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 would have been two separate beams. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 927 .

double-click Level 2. 45 Specify the beam start point at the endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 4 as shown below. In the steps that follow. click Finish. 42 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 44 On the Options Bar. you use point-to-point insertion to add the beam between the two short wall segments that adjoin grid 4 and 5. 41 Zoom around the upper structural walls between A4-5. select Girder for Usage. Add a concrete beam 40 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.37 Select grid B. select M_Concrete-Rectangular Beam: 200 x 500mm. click Beam. 928 | Chapter 24 Structural . click . 39 On the View toolbar. 38 On the Options Bar. 43 In the Type Selector.

47 On the Design Bar. enter SE (shortcut key for endpoints). click Modify. click .46 Move the cursor to the right. Notice the concrete beam you added in the previous step. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 929 . and click the endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 5 as shown below. 48 On the View toolbar.

and click when it intersects grid 2. double-click Level 2. 50 Zoom around the A1-B3 region. under Floor Plans. In the steps that follow. 51 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. select Girder.Add remaining girders 49 In the Project Browser. 55 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall. 52 In the Type Selector. 930 | Chapter 24 Structural . 54 Begin the beam chain by selecting the intersection of the wall and grid 3. and select Chain. for Usage. click Beam. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. you add two W310x67 beams parallel to the wall that intersects grid 3. 53 On the Options Bar.

56 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 931 . and click when it intersects grid 1. 57 On the View toolbar. Press ESC twice to end the beam placement mode. click .

3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. the structural usage of the beams is automatically set to purlin.B3 quadrants. you added beams and girders using the point-to-point insertion method.58 On the File menu. you add joists and purlins to the building model. when you use the automatic beam tool to add beams between joists. This project file is required. 2 Zoom around the A1 . Do not worry about the exact placement at this time. under Floor Plans. 4 In the Type Selector. you add joists and purlins to the building model.7. click Beam. double-click Level 2. in its current state. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. In the next exercise. select Automatic. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x32. click Save. “Adding Joists and Purlins ” on page 932. For example. 932 | Chapter 24 Structural . You then create a joist array. Add a W-Wide Flange joist 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Options Bar. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. You begin by adding W-Wide Flange joists. In this exercise. Adding Joists and Purlins In this exercise. You used the grid tool to add beams to selected grids and learned how varied structural conditions affect the outcome of the automatically placed beams. for Usage.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 6 Add one beam between the A1-2 girder and the parallel girder below it. Structural_tutorial. and their display within the plan view adjusts accordingly. Add the beam a few feet to the right of grid one. while allowing the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions.

Adding Joists and Purlins | 933 . The beam needs to be 1250 mm right of grid 1. Create a joist array 12 With the joist selected. 9 With the beam selected. on the Edit menu. any beam added between two girders becomes a joist when the Automatic option is selected. Modify the temporary dimension value if necessary.7 On the Design Bar. According to the table shown at the beginning of this lesson. 8 Select the beam you added in the previous steps. notice that the Structural Usage value is Joist. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Array. you selected the Automatic option. click on the Options Bar. This value was set automatically because when you created the beam. under Structural. click Modify. 11 Click OK.

Make sure the cursor is over grid A. 15 Move the cursor to the right and parallel to grid A.13 On the Options Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. This creates an array of 14 joists that are parallel to grid A. enter 1250 and press ENTER. Select 2nd for Move to. Enter 14 for Number. specify the following: Click . 14 Click the intersection of the upper extent of the joist and grid A as shown to specify the array start point. Once the direction is set. 934 | Chapter 24 Structural .

17 Add a beam from the midpoint of the first joist to the right of grid 2 that stretches perpendicularly to the next joist on the right as shown. click Beam. Adding Joists and Purlins | 935 . 18 Zoom in around the area surrounding the purlin.Add purlins 16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.

NOTE You can control the structural framing line weight. style. 23 Move the cursor to the endpoint of the next joist on the right. Their display in plan view is dependent on their Structural Usage parameter value. 19 Select the purlin you created in the previous steps. 936 | Chapter 24 Structural . ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. specify the following: Click . and click. Enter 7 for Number. and color within the Object Styles dialog. 22 Click the endpoint of the left joist as shown to specify the array start point. joists.Notice the difference between the line weights and patterns of the girders. 20 On the Edit menu. 21 On the Options Bar. click Array. Select 2nd for Move to. and purlins.

26 In the Filter dialog. and create a crossing selection that includes all the structural framing members in this portion of the view. Adding Joists and Purlins | 937 .The purlins array along the midpoints of the joists. 27 On the Options Bar. clear all options except Structural Framing (Girder) and Structural Framing (Joist). click . and click OK. click . Turn on connection symbol visibility 24 Zoom in around the structural framing below A1-2. 25 On the Options Bar. under Other. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. change the following instance parameters: ■ Select Moment Connection Last.

938 | Chapter 24 Structural . Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels In this lesson. 30 On the View toolbar. and notice the connection symbols display. you create new levels and copy the level one structure to the upper levels of the building model. 29 On the Design Bar. in its current state. This technique saves significant design time and ensures consistency on each level. You then copy the entire structure that you have designed up to this point and use the paste-align command to create the structure on the upper levels. click Modify. In this exercise. and adjust the view until it resembles the image below. This project file is required. you create new levels.■ ■ Select Moment Connection First. In the next lesson. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. “Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels” on page 938. click . you added different joist types and allowed the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions. Click OK. 31 On the File menu. click Save.

4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click Building Elevation. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. Create three new levels 1 In the Project Browser. Click to add Level 3. 2 Select grid 1. Move the cursor over the right extent of Level 2. under Elevations.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 3 Drag the upper grid control up to move the grid heads out of the way of the new levels. select Make Plan View.Defining New Levels In this exercise. 5 On the Options Bar. Structural_tutorial. click Level. you create several new levels. You need at least 3 meters of space. 6 Sketch the new level line 3000 mm above Level 2 as shown below using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Click the level line starting point 3000 mm above the left extent of Level 2. Defining New Levels | 939 . These levels are required in the next exercise where you copy the existing structural components to the new levels.

7 Repeat the steps above to create Levels 4 and 5 as shown. notice that the Level 3 floor plan is displayed. Structural_tutorial. Duplicating the Existing Design In this exercise. you copy the structural elements and use the paste-align command to add them to the new levels. 8 On the File menu. Each level is 3000 mm high. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. 940 | Chapter 24 Structural . where you copy the structural elements and paste align them to the new levels. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. In this exercise.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Save. These levels that are required in the next exercise. This technique saves you significant time compared to manually recreating the design on each level. “Duplicating the Existing Design” on page 940. you created three new levels. Copy the structural elements 1 On the View toolbar. in its current state.In the Project Browser. This project file is required. click .

In the next lesson. it is often easier and more certain to copy from a 3D view if your intent is to select the entire building model. press and hold CTRL. click OK. 7 In the Project Browser. Make sure the entire building model is included. 6 In the Select Levels dialog. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. 5 In the Select Levels dialog. and select Levels 4 and 5. under Elevations. 3 On the Edit menu. Paste the structural components on the new levels 4 On the Edit menu. in its current state. This project file is required. click Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. double-click Building Elevation. In this exercise.2 Draw a selection box around the entire design. you copied the existing structural elements on Level 1 and used the paste-align command to create the structural framing on the upper levels. “Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation” on page 942. click Copy to Clipboard. you create a framing elevation in order to add structural braces. Although you can select and copy the components from any view. select Level 3. click Save. Duplicating the Existing Design | 941 . 8 On the File menu.

rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Creating a Framing Elevation In this exercise. in the Project Browser. click Modify. 6 On the Design Bar. You then add C-channel bracing to one level and array it to the remaining levels. 942 | Chapter 24 Structural . click Framing Elevation. Create a framing elevation 1 In the Project Browser. You use this elevation view in the next exercise to place structural braces. double-click Level 2. at the midpoint between grids 2 and 3. you create a framing elevation in order to provide a view in which to place structural bracing members. 5 Place the cursor over grid C. 4 On the Options Bar. Structural_tutorial. and click. you create a framing elevation. Elevation 1-a. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation In this lesson. make sure Attach to Grid is selected. under Floor Plans. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. You can now view the new elevation. 2 Zoom out so you can see the entire building model.

Notice the stick framing representation. you add structural braces to the building model. Structural_tutorial. This is because the Detail Level of this view is automatically set to coarse. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. Also notice that grid 3 is identified within the view. This project file is required. You are ready to add the structural braces. in its current state. In this exercise. 8 On the File menu. Dataset This exercise requires the project file.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Save. “Adding Structural Braces” on page 943. Adding Structural Braces | 943 . you created an elevation view design specifically to add structural braces. you add c-channel bracing to the building model. You begin by adding a set of braces to level 4. You then array the braces to the remaining levels.7 Double-click the elevation head in order to open the view. Adding Structural Braces In the final exercise of this tutorial. In the next exercise.

4 Enter SE and click the beam endpoint below the intersection of grid 2 and Level 4. When adding the braces.4. ■ ■ SM: Snap only to midpoints of objects. click Brace. Because it is often necessary to make sure you snap to the endpoints and midpoints. and using the shape grips. 944 | Chapter 24 Structural . 5 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5. drag the left and right extents until you can see the grid heads for 2 and 3 as shown.Expand the view extents 1 Before adding the braces. SE: Snap only to endpoints of objects. select the view crop box. 3 In the Type Selector. selectM_ C-Channel: C75x7. you should use the following snap shortcut keys when applicable. Also select grids 2 and 3 and drag them until they appear as shown. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. you use point-to-point insertion.

The brace displays. 6 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5. 7 Enter SE and click the endpoint below the intersection of grid 3 and Level 4. The second brace is displayed. Adding Structural Braces | 945 .

9 Select both braces on Level 4. click Array. Select 2nd for Move to. specify the following: Click . 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 12 Click the intersection of Level 5 and grid 2 to specify the array start point. Select Constrain. The braces are arrayed to Level 1. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. click Modify. 11 On the Options Bar. 946 | Chapter 24 Structural . click Tag All Not Tagged.Array the braces 8 On the Design Bar. 13 Click the intersection of Level 4 and grid 2 to specify the array endpoint. 10 On the Edit menu. Enter 4 for Number.

16 On the View toolbar. In this exercise. 17 On the File menu. and click OK.15 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. click Save. Adding Structural Braces | 947 . click . select Structural Framing Tags. you added structural braces to the design and created a brace array.

948 | Chapter 24 Structural .

They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. called Worksharing. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. such as walls. You can enable Worksharing for any project. Using Worksharing. stairs. 949 . A workset is a collection of building elements. floors. however. doors. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2008. All other team members can view this workset.Sharing Projects 25 When working with large building projects. they cannot make changes to it. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. and so on. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. In this tutorial. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area.

The first time you activate worksets within a project. Working in a shared project In a shared project. such as annotations and dimensions. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. After the project is shared. use Element Borrowing. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. Project size 950 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . When setting up Worksharing. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. In the next exercise. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. you can select which worksets are open or closed. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. Elements specific to a view. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. In the lessons and exercises that follow. When you are working on a shared project. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. After learning the fundamentals. To make a workset editable. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. select the desired workset.Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. and click Editable. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. you specify an active workset. go to the Worksets dialog. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. you must first enable Worksharing. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly.

you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. each team member has control over a portion of the design. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 951 . If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. designers work in teams. such as a tenant interior. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. When you create a new workset. Shared Levels and Grids. Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles.The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. and View worksets. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. not including the Project Standards. On this tab. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. Team member roles Typically. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. Regardless of the default setting. You should have at least one workset for each person. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. Experience has shown that. When creating the new worksets. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. with each assigned a specific functional task. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. for a typical project. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. Instead. As new members create worksets for their own use. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. In most projects. In a multi-story structure. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view.

however. Generally. you should then save to your local file. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. 952 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . if a workset named Interior was created. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. However. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. the file is saved as the central file. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. When you save to the central file. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. proceeds as usual. When you save locally (to your local file). within the local file. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. As you work. This makes them available to other team members. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. After saving to the central file. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. When you save to the central file. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project.Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. you can select which workset is active. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. Therefore. you make that workset editable by you. your changes are saved. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. On the Options Bar. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. When finished or at regular intervals. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. For example. your changes propagate to the entire team. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. This is called “Selective Open. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. they are not propagated to the rest of the team.

This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. reload the latest changes from the central file. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. using VPN. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. In this situation. In the left pane of the Open dialog. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. Alternatively. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 953 . save to the central file. In this instance. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out." Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. make any required worksets editable. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. you should check out the Materials workset. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. and make that workset editable. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely using AccuRender® is supported.Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. you work no differently then you would in the office. In this conceptual exercise. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. for instance. and then save the local file. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. click Training Files. To do this. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. In the next exercise. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. if you know who checked out the required workset. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. When working remotely. and open Common\c_Worksets.rvt.

select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 5 Scroll down the list of workset names. In this simple training project. a small number of team members are working on the building model. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. Therefore. 954 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . For training purposes. In this case. imagine four users including yourself. and notice all are editable by you. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". When you enable worksharing. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset name. Your username displays as the present owner. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. The Worksets dialog is displayed. 4 In the Worksets dialog. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. Only User-Created worksets should display. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. For example. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. and Views. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. ■ 6 Under Show. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. 3 Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. click Worksets. Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. under Show. another is assigned the interior layout. clear Families. Project Standards. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset.Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu.

and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 955 . all building model elements are assigned to that workset. type the name Exterior Shell. 13 Click Rename. click OK. you can rename the default workset. including the interior doors. 10 Click New. expand Views (all). This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. 9 Click OK. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. under Identity Data. and double-click Level 1. it is better to make them visible by default. click . 18 On the Options Bar. however. 22 On the Options Bar. under Identity Data. Because the interior walls appear in many views. currently named Workset1. click New. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. Subdividing the project into worksets 16 In the Project Browser. click . notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. You do. 12 In the Worksets dialog. In this training file. 14 In the Rename dialog. clear Visible by default in all views. 8 Enter the name Interior Layout. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. 24 Select all of the interior elements. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset.Creating new worksets 7 In the Worksets dialog. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. and click OK. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. and walls. 11 Enter Furniture Layout. 21 Select one of the interior walls. When you initially activate Worksharing. 20 Click OK. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. expand Floor Plans. select Interior Layout for Workset. 17 In the drawing area. and click OK. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. select Workset1. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. stairs. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. 15 In the Worksets dialog. Rather than create a new workset for these elements.

If any interior elements remain. 956 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . under Identity Data. 25 On the Options Bar. The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. 31 On the View menu. 29 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. 30 Click OK.The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. click Visibility/Graphics. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. click . click Visibility/Graphics. 27 On the View menu. 32 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. select Interior Layout for Workset. and click OK. click the Worksets tab. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. click the Worksets tab. 28 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout.

but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. make modifications to the building model. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. In addition. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. click Save As. under Identity Data. please do so before continuing. 3 Click Open. select Specify. and click OK. Now that you have created the central file. you enabled Worksharing on a project. 43 On the right side of the dialog. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. 36 On the Options Bar. under Open Worksets. 34 In the Project Browser. select all of the interior elements of the building model. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. “Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets” on page 953. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. If you have not yet completed the exercise. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. Checking in the worksets 41 On the File menu. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. 40 Click Save. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. 44 Click OK. click Close. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. 35 In the drawing area. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. make sure you remember the location of this central file. select Interior Layout for Workset. click . check out worksets. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. Working Individually with Worksets | 957 . Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. 42 In the Worksets dialog. 39 In the Save As dialog. 45 On the File menu. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. you create your local file. double-click Level 2. select the central file and. under Views (all). click Non Editable. Create the central file 38 On the File menu. 2 In the Open dialog. and click OK. click Open. under Floor Plans. click Worksets. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. In this exercise.33 Select Interior Layout. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No.

notice the Editable Only option. 17 On the Options Bar. 6 In the Save As dialog. Next. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. click . On the Options Bar. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. click Worksets. click Modify. 14 In the Project Browser. 958 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . and click OK. 8 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. select Interior Layout. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. 5 On the File menu. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. select Interior Layout for Name. Before working on the model. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. and click OK. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. click Save As. click Options.4 In the Opening Worksets dialog. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. select all the User-Created worksets. 11 Click OK. expand Views (all). Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. and double-click Level 1. and select Yes for Editable. 10 In the Worksets dialog. 12 On the Window menu. Verify that it is cleared. 13 On the Worksets toolbar. expand Floor Plans. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. and click Save. Checking out worksets 9 On the File menu. 7 In the File Save Options dialog. In this case. You have created a local file which is for your use only. If this is selected. 16 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable.

The precise location is not important. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. 28 In the Type Selector. under Identity Data. Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes. click . click Worksets. Modify the building model 24 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. 21 Click OK. 25 Delete the door. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 22 On the File menu. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. Working Individually with Worksets | 959 . The upper exterior wall should still be selected. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset.126mm Partition (2-hr).18 In the Element Properties dialog. click Wall. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. In the Worksets dialog. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. select Basic Wall: Interior . Because this element is not owned by another user. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. 19 Under Constraints. If it was owned by another user. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. 26 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. 23 Click OK. 29 Using the following illustration as a guide. and click OK. you can still edit this wall. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. In this case. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. 20 On the Options Bar. however.

When working in your local file. save to central. displays the workset as well as the element type.30 On the Design Bar. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. At the end of a work session. 31 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. 36 In the Save to Central dialog. In addition. click Modify. click Door. 34 Using the following illustration as a guide. Borrowed Elements is selected. a tooltip. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. you should perform regular saves. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. The Save to Central dialog is displayed with the path to the central file automatically filled in. you should relinquish all worksets. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select: ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets 960 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . By default. Whenever you save. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. Saving your work 35 On the File menu. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. If you place the cursor over any of the new elements. which matches the information in the Status Bar. In this particular case. click Save to Central. it is recommended. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. add two door openings into the rooms you created. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. and save locally immediately afterward. 33 In the Type Selector.

each user must check out worksets. checked out worksets. Throughout the process. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. If you have not yet completed these exercises. skip the following section. consider that person to be User 1.rvt. click Options. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 961 . enter User 2. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. and click OK. two users access the central file through a network connection. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. In the following section of this exercise. select the central file and. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. 4 Click the General Tab and. click Open. User 2: Create a local file. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). In this exercise. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. under Username. leave this file open in its current state. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. This is a system setting. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. select all the User-Created worksets. you created your local file. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. under Open Worksets. specifically sequenced. For training purposes. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. select Specify. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. instructions are staggered. and click OK. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central.■ Save the local file after “Save to Central” 37 Click OK. 8 Click Open. and proceed to Creating a local copy. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. please do so before continuing. For training purposes. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. and reload the latest changes. 7 In the Open dialog. In addition. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. return to the Settings dialog. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. 3 On the Settings menu. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. You modified the building model. 9 In the Opening Worksets dialog. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. make elements editable. and reset the Username to your computer login name. one user has already created a local file. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise.

10 On the File menu. 19 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. click Worksets. and publish changes 17 User 1 should still have the local file open. and select Yes for Editable. modify the building model.” 28 Click OK. click Save to Central. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. and double-click Level 1. You are now the owner of that workset. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. If it is not open. 27 In the Save to Central dialog. and click OK. 21 Select the Interior Layout workset. 16 Click OK. 12 In the File Save Options dialog. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 29 In the Project Browser. You now have a local copy of the project. click Options. 13 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. 23 In the Project Browser. open it now. 24 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. click Worksets. 14 On the File menu. 22 Click OK. expand Floor Plans. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. User 1: Check out worksets. and click Save. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. and double-click Level 1. 18 On the File menu. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. 15 Select the Exterior Shell workset. 26 On the File menu. click Save As. 11 In the Save As dialog. 962 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . and select Yes for Editable. expand Views (all). it becomes the active workset. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 25 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. This file is for your use only. 20 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. If you only have one workset checked out.

Because you now have more than one workset checked out.” 38 Click OK. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. Click Yes. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. click Reload Latest. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. When you save to central. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. under Floor Plans. 42 On the Project Browser. select Yes for Editable. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. and check out additional worksets 39 On the File menu. 40 On the File menu. select the lower exterior wall.30 Using the following illustration as a guide. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. click Component. under Views (all). However. right-click Level 1. The changes User 2 made are apparent. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. click Save to Central. under Floor Plans. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. 36 On the File menu. 46 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click Rename. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 963 . click Save to Central. 31 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. Before adding any furniture. right-click Copy of Level 1. 33 In the Save to Central dialog. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. 45 On the Project Browser. 43 On the Project Browser. 44 In the Rename View dialog. and click Duplicate.” 34 Click OK. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. and click OK. User 1: Reload latest worksets. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. 32 On the File menu. under Floor Plans. 41 Select Furniture Layout. you should create a furniture plan view. click Worksets. and click OK. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. 35 Using the following illustration as a guide.

click Reload Latest. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. NOTE System families. If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. click Visibility/Graphics. 57 In the Element Properties dialog. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” 67 Click OK. choose any desk. 51 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. 52 On the File menu. 66 In the Save to Central dialog. 49 On the View menu. 59 In the Rename dialog. 50 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. 964 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . 53 In the Save to Central dialog. such as Wall Types. 61 On the File menu. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. Therefore. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. click Modify. select Project Standards. 48 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. 65 On the File menu. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 55 On the File menu. 58 In the Type Properties dialog. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. 63 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. 56 Right-click the upper exterior wall. are placed under Project Standards. and click OK. 64 Click OK. and click OK. the Visible by default option was not selected. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 60 Click OK 3 times.200mm. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. rather than Families. click Rename. click Worksets. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset.47 In the Type Selector. under Show. 62 In the Worksets dialog. click Save to Central. enter Exterior Wall .” 54 Click OK. and click inside any room. and click Properties. leave this file open in its current state. click Save to Central. click the Worksets tab.

leave this file open in its current state. Only one user needs to open the dataset and save the central file to a network location. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. click Training Files. Checking out worksets. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. Each user checked out worksets. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. 70 In the Save to Central dialog.User 1: Reload latest. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. There are specific instructions for each user. select Save to Central. In subsequent steps. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. select the following. Save training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. At the appropriate point in this exercise. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. and save 68 On the File menu. and click OK. This exercise requires two users and. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. and still have your local files open. 5 Click Save. select Make this a Central File after save. finished the previous workset exercises. and published their changes back to the central file. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. select Reload Latest. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. throughout this training. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. 3 In the Save As dialog. As each of you work. Each user must have network access to the central file. NOTE When you open the training dataset for this tutorial. “Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users” on page 965. modified the building model.rvt. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. you save the dataset as a central file. click Options. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. In the final exercise of this tutorial. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. 4 In the File Save Options dialog. click Save As. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 965 . you need to set up your central and local files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and these problems are rectified. 69 On the File menu. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” In this exercise.

User 1: Check out worksets 22 On the File menu. and reset the Username to your computer login name.User 1: Create local file 6 For the sake of simplicity. The central file should still be open. click Save As. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 11 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. Checking out worksets 21 Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. and click OK. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. Next. 7 On the File menu. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. 8 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. 966 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . and click OK. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 13 On the File menu. Set the Username to User 2. and click Save. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. click Open. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. On the Settings menu. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. select Specify. click Options. Afterwards. 17 On the File menu. click Save As. if any User-Created worksets are not open. 9 In the Save As dialog. click Options. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. ■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. This is a system setting. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. This is the local file for User 1. and click OK. and click Save. 23 In the Worksets dialog. In addition. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. and click Open. 10 In the File Save Options dialog. and click OK. User 2: Create local file 12 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. 14 In the Open dialog. You have created a local file which is for your use only. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. return to the Settings dialog. select the central file and under Open Worksets. click Options. 18 In the Save As dialog. select them. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. click Worksets. 15 Click Open. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file.

A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. 33 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. select the Interior Layout workset. 31 On the left exterior wall. select Exterior Shell. and select Yes for Editable. 27 In the Worksets dialog. After you submit the request. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. select the second window from the top. 25 Under Active Workset. 28 Under Active Workset. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 29 On the Project Browser. User 2: Check out worksets 26 On the File menu.24 Select the Exterior Shell workset. You are now the owner of that workset. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 967 . and click Editing Requests. select Interior Layout. 30 On the Options Bar. click Worksets. and select Yes for Editable. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 34 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. 32 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. At this point. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. You are now the owner of that workset. double-click Level 1. click the File menu. and then click OK. under Floor Plans. and then click OK. verify that Editable Only is cleared.

41 In the Save to Central dialog. and close 40 On the File menu. A message informs you that your request has been granted. User 2: Check for editability grant 38 In